The Victorian Naturalist The Magazine of the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA in which is incorporated THE MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY OF VICTORIA Vol. 95 January —December, 1978 COMPILED BY JAMES A. BAINES | @ MELBOURNE: | () JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY. LTD. 1-13 Abbotsford Street, West Melbourne, 3003 ABORIGINES Aboriginal Material Culture, No, 1) Vie- torn Wooden Water Vessels (illus,), 54- Aboriginal Muterial Speurthrowers and (llus.), RRO] Aborigines in the Ranges (Otways, Streeleckis, Rocky Jack Divide) (illus.), bee ie 4 No. 2: On Steamers Culture, Paddle Implements (rom Laver’s Hill, Otway Ranges) Cllus,), 222-225 AUTHORS Allan, Erie R,, 31-32 Anonymous, 22, 53, 77, 158, 163, 203 Backhouse, G. N., (with R. W. Vanner), ) 28-132 Baines, James A., 32, 33-34, 75 (supra), 75 (infra), 104, 141, 187, 208-209, 235 Balmford, Rosemary, 91 Beasley, A, W., 172-175 Beaton, G., (with G, Weste), 178-187 Beauglehole, A. Clifford, 67-74, 198-203 Bell, K. N., 108-107, 133-136 Buckingham, lan D., (with M.S. Joshi), 95- 104 Carolan, Pat, 53 Common, lan F, B., 192-195 Cooper, Barry J., 8-12 Corrick, Margaret G,, 26-30, 56-60, 92-94, 188-190, 207 Crechura, G, V,, 150-151 Degabricle, Robert, 74, 148-149 Dixon, Joun M,, 4-7,-216-221 Doery, Mary K,, 12, 13-14, 159 Douglas, J. G,, 137-140, Forster, Joan, 112-119 Galbraith, Jean, 240,247 Gill, Edmund 1D,, 23-25, 182-158 Green, K., (et al.), 226-235 Green M., (et al.), 226-235 Gupta, J, D., (etal), 147 Harley, J. D., (et al), 147 Henshaw, C. H., 204-205 Hornsby, P. E., 108-111 Ingram, Glen J,, 142-146 Johnson, K., 241-242 Joshi, Martland S., (with I. D. Bucking- ham), 95-104 Kent, Reuben D., 221 Lester, Margery J,, 35, 50-52 hts sam M. J., (with J. W. Wainer), 251- Lyndon, Ellen, 52, 158 Melnnes, Daniel E., 191 Messer, Michael, 61 Millett, Mervyn R, O., 15-22 Morris, I. C., 149, 250 Morrison, lan F,, 25 Mutton, Patricia, (et ald, 147 New, T. R., 195-197 Oates, Alison M,, 54-55 Osborne, W,, (et al.), 226-235 Preece, M., (et al.), 226-235 Reid, Derek A., 47-49 Ritchie, Blyth, 52 Robbins, Frank, 160-162, 206-207 Sefton, Allan Roy, 248-250 Smith, Brian J., 164, 236-240 Smith, Malcolm, 162 Stephens, Tanya, (et al.), 147 Thies, Arthur W,, 252 Furner, Elizabeth K., 111 Vanner, R. W., (with G. N. Backhouse), 128-132 Vestiens, W. J. M., 176-177 Wainer, W. J., Gwith M. J. Littlejohn), 251- 252 Wall, J., 243-247 West, A. L., 88-91 Weste, Greta, (with G. Beaton), 178-187 Whinray, John, 62-66 White, Laura M., 163-164 Willis, James H., 44-46 Birps Battery Island, Furneaux Group, Tasmania (bird list), 65-66 Eagle, Wedge-tailed, Moat 221 Congatisn, Snowy Mountains (species list), 23 King of the Air? Kites, Letter-winged, Elanus scriptus, in South Gippsland (note), 52 Queensland P.N.C,V, Excursion (bird list of 127 species), 245-247 South-west Victoria (FNCV Excursion bird list), 14 VORG Conference, 21-23 July, 1978: Tech- niques of Research in Ornithology, 91 EXCURSIONS Mount Buffalo, Field Naturalist trip to eed Excursion 27-1-78—3-2-78), 112- C Otway Ranges, FNCV Easter Excursion, 24- 28 March 1978, 159, 160-162 Queensland Excursion, PNCV 22. July-5 August, 1978, 243-247 South-west Victoria, FNCV Excursion to, 1- 7 October 1977 (with bird list), 13-14 FIELD NATURALISTS’ CLUBOF VICTORIA Accounts, 79-82 Alpine Area, FNCV Submission on the Pro- posed Recommendations of the, 203 Australian Natural History Medallion Fund, 7, 61, 94, 132, 225 Executive Council Report, 78 General meetings, 36, 37, 76, 120, 121-122, 165; 166, 209, 210, 252-253, 254 Group meetings, 39, 83, 123, 167, 211, 258 Kinglake FNCV Nature Reserve, 38, 242 Microscopy Group, 22 Victorian Field Naturalist Clubs Associa Se Meeting and excursions at Creswick, *Vietorian Naturalisl = Back issues availible (from 1894 onwards), 225 ‘Victorian Naturalist? Subject Index, 1884 1977, 163, (delay), 242 FISHES (PRESHWATER) Galaxiid, Dwart, Galaxiella pusilla, Observa- tions on the Biology of Gilus.), 128-132 GEOLOGY, PALAFONTOLOGY & PHYSIOGRAPHY Conodonts Enigmatic Microfossils (illus, ), English and Victorian Terrains, Comparison of the (illus.), 23-25 Flowers, Victoria's Oldest CGllus.), 137-140 Foraminifera as Possils Gillus.), 105-107 Foraminifera, Recent, from Limeburners Bay, Victoria (illus.), 133-136 Geological Features of the National Estate in Victoria, Survey of (note), 53 ‘Gippsland Lakes Region, The morphology of the’, by BE. C, F. (monograph avatlable), 197 Mount Buffalo, Geology of (FNCV Excur sion, January 1978), 206-207 Pilot Range, Beechworth, Victoria, Geology of the (with 2 maps), 95-104 Sandy Beaches (illus,), 172-175 Volcanoes of Western Victoria, Australia, Radiocarbon Dating of the (illus.), 152- 158 Geo- Bird INSECTS Beetle, Carabid, Catadromus preying On Frogs, 251-252 Cuse-moth, Faggot—vandal or opportunist? (note), 25 Glow-worms of the Otways (FNCV Exeur sion, Easter 1978) Cilus.), 160-162 Gungartan, Snowy Mountains (species list), lacordarrei, 34 Moths, Black and white day, family Agaristidaec, Range of (note), 158 Oak Leaf-miner: A new infestation of our street trees? 19] Oak Leaf-miner, Notes on Melbourne area, 195-197 Oak Leaf-miner, Phyllonoryeter messaniella (Lepidoptera: Gracillariidae) established in Australia (illus,), 192-195 Trialeurodes vaporarium, ‘White Fly’ (Hemiptera: Aleyrodidae) (note), 77, 122 the, in the MAMMALS Australian Alps, Mammals of the a briet review of past work, with a view to the future Cllus), 216.221 Austritian Alps (ist of mammal species), 220-221 Pehidnas, Six sunbathing, (Warby Ranges) (note), 149 Pehidnas, Wild, Behaviour in a Group of, 241-242 Gungartin, Snowy Mountains: A Winter Pauna Survey ubove 1500 Metres (with maps and species lists), 226-245 Koala, Phascolarctos cinereus (photo), | Koala, Australia’s ‘native bear’, 45, 74 Koala, Does i need to drink water? Gllus.), 148-149 Koala, Name does not animal’ (note), 162 Marsupiils, Comments on the feeding of young, 61, IE1, 120, 147 Possum, Pigmy, Litthe, Cercartenis lepidtis, First Victorman and other Records of (illus.), 47 Possum, Pigmy, Mountain, Burrarnvs parvus (iving fossil) (photo), 214 Species list, Gungartin, Snowy Mountains, 231-232 Wallabies, Roek, A note on the pouch life of (illus), LOR TT mean “no drink MARINE BIOLOGY & INVERTEBRATES Foraminifera as Fossils Gllus,), 105-107 Foraminifera, Recent, from Limeburners Bay, Vietoria Cllus.), 143-136 Molluses of the Victorian CGireat Dividing Range, Notes on the Gllus., and with map und species list), 236-240 MICROSCOPY EPNCV Microscopes, 38 Foraminifera, Introduction to Gllus.), 105. 107 Foraminifera, Reeent from Limeburners Buy, Victoria Gllus.), 133-136 Microscopy Group, P.N.C.Y. (Microscopes are for Everybody), 22 MISCELLANEOUS Battery Island, Tasmania, Some Records for (illus,, and with species lists), 62°66 Faster in the Otways: Speculation about Unusual Phenomena, 204-205 M.A. Ingram Trust, The, 31-32 Norfolk Island, Field Naturalists in, 12 Northern Territory, Field Naturalists form club Gin Darwin), 158 ‘Victorian Naturalist: Author Index, [884- 1976: Supplementary List of Errata. Omissions and Addenda, 75 Wollongong, The impact of development on the environment during the past fifty years, 248-250 PERSONAL Bennett, Mrs. Eulalie (60 years active mem- bership), 122 Cooper, Barry (marriage, and assistant pro- fessorship in Toronto), 210 Filson, Rex (drawings of Pultanaea spp. for M. G. Corrick’s articles), 122 Fuller, Amy (wildflower painter), 207 Ralph, Cedric, honorary membership, 253; $250 donation, 254 page Keith, In memory of, 1896-1978, 24 Sefton, Allan Roy—Australian Natural History Medallionist for 1978 (with portrait), 208-209; presentation of medal- lion, 254 Wheeler, John Russell, Australian Natural History Medallionist for 1977 (with portrait), 33-34 PLANTS Amanita, The Toadstool Genus (illus.), 42, 44-46 Amanita, New Species of Fungi from Australia, 47-49 Banksia integrifolia, Coast Banksia (girth of biggest tree at Beaumaris), 77 Battery Island, Furneaux Group, Tasmania (list of plant species), 62-65 Bush-peas of Victoria—geaus Pultenaea (all illus.) —no.8: P. subumbellata (Wiry B.-p.), P. paludosa, (Mountain B.-p.), P. muelleri (Mueller’s B.-p.), 26-30; no.9: P. juniperina (Prickly B,-p.), P. platyphylla (Flat-leaf B.-p.), P. retmsa (Blunt B.-p,), 56-60; no.l0: P. foliolosa (Small-leaf B.- p.), P. procumbens (Heathy B.-p.), 92-94; no.ll: P. costata, (Ribbed B.-p.), P. acerosa (Bristly B.-p.), 188-190 ei elas Veteran, on Mt. Buffalo (photo), Eucalypts, Three pale-trunked, of the Buffalo Plateau (illus.), 50-52 Eucalyptus chapmaniana, Bogong Gum, Dis- tribution of, 53 shh iY nee and Tasmania’, by N. A, akefield (new edition, revised std: ° H. ovata) 3 lata Fossil Plants (Victoria's Oldest Flowers _ (illus.), 137-140 oe Fungi, Five small, newly recorded from Vic- toria, Australia (illus.), 178-187 Generic Names of the Victorian Flora, The Origin of—Part 2: Latin, Greek and Miscellaneous (continued) — *Pastinaca to Pentapogon, 32, * Pentaschistis to Pentatropis, 75, “Periballia to *Petroselinum, 104, *Peucedanum to *Phleum, 141: Pholidia to Phylloglossum, 187; Phyllota to *Picris, 235 Orchids: Caladenia patersonii and Diuris punctata (photos of Amy Fuller paint- ings), 169 Otways, Easter in Treeferns), 204-205 Otways, Juicy Fruits of the (FNCV Easter Excursion, 1978), 159 Stomata in leaves (By their skins ye shall know them) (illus.), 15-22 Trees that establish themselves on trunks of treeferns and a Yellow Box that enclosed its own sawn-off stump, 240 Vascular Flora of Victoria, Alterations and additions to the, Part 1, 67-74 Vascular Flora of Victoria, Alterations and additions to the, Part 2, 198-203 the (lronbarks and REPTILES AND AMPHIBIANS Frog, Green-thighed, Litoria brevipalmata (Anura: Pelodryadidae), A new locality for, from South Gippsland, 150-151 Frogs, Carabid Beetle preying on, 251-252 Gecko, A new species of, genus Cyrtodac- tylus, from Cape York Peninsula, Queens- land, Australia (C. galgajuga) (illus.), 142-146 Lizard, Blue-tongue, survives a Jonah-like experience (note), 250 Snake, Black, swallowing a Brown Snake (note), 52 Snake, Brown, being swallowed by a Black Snake (note), 52 , Tortoises, Snake-necked, Chelodina longi- collis, Methods for marking individual (illus.), 176-7 REVIEWS ‘A Field Guide to the Common Genera of Gilled Fungi in Australia’, by Mary Cole, Bruce Fuhrer and Albert Holland, 252 “Flora of South Australia’, by J. M. Black, Part 1—Third Edition (revised and edited by John F. Jessop), 163-164 ‘Science Field Guide—Barnacles’, by A. J. Underwood, 164 FNCY DIARY OF COMING EVENTS GENERAL MEETINGS At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra Monday, 12 February, 8.00 p.m. x i Speaker: Mr. R. Miller, President of the Archaeological Society of Victoria. Subject: “Historical Archaeology in Victoria.” Normal March Meeting ts cancelled and replaced as follows:- Saturday, 10 March, 8.00 p.m. Combined with the FNCAV Meeting at the Uniting Church Hall, The Avenue, Blackburn. Speaker: Dr. J. Willis, Subject: “Interesting Plants of the Dandenongs.” Monday, 9 April, 8.00 p.m. : . Special Study Meeting on Sherbrooke Forest. Speakers from the Geology, Mammal Survey and Botany Groups. Members are encouraged to bring along relevant exhibits. New Members—February General Meeting Ordinary: Mr. Jim Carnes, 102 Ripplebrook Drive, Broadmeadows. Mammals. Mr. Charles Silveira, 4 Payne Street, Gladstone Park, 3043. Mammals & Birds. Miss Patricia Clancy, 11/38 Holyrood St., Hampton, Ms Audrey Gallacher, 8/30 Scott Grove, Glen Iris, 3146. : Joint: Ms. M. Murphy & Mr. D, Fewtrell, c/- 4 Bowley Ave., Balwyn. FNCV EXCURSIONS Sunday, 18 February. Phillip & Churchill Islands. The coach will leave Batman Ave. at 9.30 a.m. Fare $5.50. Bring two meals. Saturday, 10 March—Monday, 12 March. Victorian Field Naturalists Clubs Association Combined Weekend. This year the FNCV are hosts and we hope members will attend as many functions as possible and help return the hospitality we have received so fre- quently from other clubs. There will be meetings on Saturday and Sunday evenings con- cluding with supper and members are requested to bring a plaie of food towards this on both evenings. These meetings will be held in Wellsley Hall, The Avenue, Blackburn, which is off Blackburn Rd., 200 yards south of the railway crossing and station, The hall will be open from 4.00 p.m. and members who wish to have the evening meal there will be provided with tea or coffee. Programme. t Saturday, 10 March. Meet at the Wellsley Hall at 1.30 p.m. for a private car excursion led by Mr, D. McInnes on **Geology along the Yarra’’. Members who find it more convenient ' can meet and join in at the quarry, enr. of Auburn Rd. and Burgess St, Hawthorn at 2.00 p.m. Excursion will end at Fairfield at approx, 4.30 p.m. Saturday, 10 March, 7.00 p.m. at Wellsley Hall. Annual Meeting of the FNCAV. Sunday, 11 March, There will be an excursion to the Dandenongs to look for lyre birds and study the ferns of the area, The coach will leave Batman Ave. at 9.25 a.m, and proceed to Wellsley Hall at approx. 10 a.m. to cater for our visitors and also give members the opportunity to leave their cars there if they wish to travel by coach and have the evening meal at the hall, Pare: $4.00, bring a picnic meal or two if staying at the hall. Sunday, 11 March, 7.30 p.m, Wellsley Hall, The evening meeting will begin early to suit people travelling by public transport. All Clubs will participate in the evening and it will be an opportunity to discuss matters of interest to Naturalists. The Microscopical Group of the FNCV will put on a display of *‘Microscopes Historical and Modern’? and show members many interesting objects under the microscopes. Monday, 12 March. This excursion will be to Jumping Creek Reserve with a look at the Gold Memorial and Pound Bend if time permits. This will be a private car excursion, megene at the Crystal Brook Caravan Park in Warrandyte Rd. at 9.30 a.m. Bring a picnic unch, ; (Continued on page 43) ; 2 Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 The Victorian Naturalist Volume 96, Number 1 January/February, 1979 Acting Editor: Brian Smiih Editorial Committee: Susan Beattie, Margaret Corrick, Reuben Kent, Alison Oates, Rob Wallace. Clarke’s Slip at Eastern View, Otway Coast, S.E. Australia by Edmund D. Gilland R. Clarke .. 4 a ee 4 Mammals and Birds of the Wallaby Creek Catchment, Victoria, with special reference to species using Tree-holes BAG LACT OUTDO ROS Ceiba ntl Re ee ee ea MPL oe 8 Five Small Fungi Collected from Rotting Le ogs and Bark BY Be Rtn Gre VEST re iy. septs ye od ah FP tee Fg 1 The Breeding Time and Growth Rate of Sepia apama. CNMGltSeaeC Ch balOpOce ADV IMM BET fn. Geek dale can pe tiaee 19 Sites of Special Scientific Interest by E.C. F. Bird................ 21 Observations of the *‘White Fly” Trialeurodes vaporariorum and the predator wasp Eucarsia formosa by M. Bates. ........--- 29 Flanged Dumb-bell—Found Simpson, Victoria, August 15, te ieoat aia eat: SCTE kr i ceaawen ier MURS Ss po FOC hi. Stil easy, 2 o> 31 Survey of Fishes in Wyperfeld National Park and Lake Werrimbean by G. J. Apps, J. P. Beumer and G. N. Backhouse.. 32 On Hares and the Raising of a Leveret by Simon Townsend...... a Feeding Behaviour in the Pearson Island Rock Wallaby lop Tee lee Tu Raye) oh Ae doe ste teh iG ca a cea ota Rye ee 38 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Report of Meetings............ 4] Cover illustration: The Opening in 1922 of the Great Ocean Road from Eastern View to Lorne. The cars (from left) are those of Captain Morley, Major McCormick, and Mr. C. J. Lane. Big Hill Creek is behind the cars. Note the log culvert Clarke’s Slip at Eastern View, Otway Coast, S.E. Australia By Edmund D. Gill*® and R. Clarke** The first section of the Great Ocean Road to be opened was that between Eastern View and Lorne in 1922 (PI. 1). Up ull that time, Eastern View was the end of the road, and the only house was the Clarke residence high on the west of Spout Creek. The original sett- ler was Mr. J. H. Hollingworth, who took up land there in 1881. Prior to 1922, a bridle track provided a supply route to Lorne from Eastern View, over which packhorses were used by three generations of the Clarke family, As Plate 2 shows, the track rose to the top of the ridge between Spout Creek and Point Castries. It then descended to Grassy Creek, climbing the opposite slope past ‘iluka’ at Cinema Point to the top of the ridge. This was followed to Big Hill Creek, after which the track remained in the vicinity of the shore till Lorne was reached. The bridle track was put through in 1910, and previous to that the only access to Grassy Creek was via the shore. The cutting of the Great Ocean Road began in 1919 at Cathedral Rock near Big Hill Creek, "CSIRO, Division of Applied Geomechanics. P.O, Box 54, Mount Waverley, Victoria. 3149, “Eastern View via Airey’s Inlet, Victoria, 3221. (Grandson of the pioneer setler, Mr. J, H Hollingworth, ) PLATE 2. Eastern View in 1922 atthe opening of the Great Ocean Road Note the slip urea, and rising over the hill the bridle track which was used before the road was built. In the sea below the slip area is the are of rocks marking the toe of the biggest slip known (see PI, 3), where ihe first camp was established. Abouta year later a camp was set up at Grassy Creek. A narrow track to estab- lish the grade was cut first, and then the road was excavated. Record Landslide A section of the easterly facing slope between Spout Creek and Point Cas- tries (PI, 2) is unstable. Fundamen- tally, this is because the area consists of siltstone, which has a shoreline back- wear rate 100% greater than that of the accompanying felspathic sandstone (greywacke). Since the sea came to its present level about 6000 years ago, the greywacke cliffs have retreated at an average rate of 0.9 cm/yr, and the siltstone at 1.8 cm/yr (Gill 1973). Point Castries and the Spout Creek area con- sist of greywacke, but between them is this weaker area of siltstone, which accounts for its instability. In 6000 years the shore at the slip has probably retreated 100 m, but at Point Castries only 50 m. The sea undercuts the toe of the siltstone slope, and the weather causes wet/dry decrepitation of the outcrops. The siltstone contains a high percentage of clay which makes it slipp- ery when wet. In addition, the beds dip seawards at a high angle (40°). The Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 presence of the soft siltstone explains why the hill slope and the shore are incurved, and the skyline dips (PI, 2). On the south side of Clarke's slip the contrast in the erodability of the siltstone and the greywacke is even more marked, because the greywacke is impregnated with red iron oxide. The reason for this will be given later. The well-developed joints in the rock also promote slipping. Many landslips have occurred on this slope, the latest being in 1974. The slips create a problem for the mainte- nance of the Great Ocean Road. The road itself has of course weakened the Slope by cutting into it, yet the largest slip by far that has occurred since Euro- pean settlement took place before the Ocean Road was formed, and before the land was cleared. This record land- slide occurred between 1881 and 1900, the period during which Mr. Holling- worth resided there: 1891 is a likely date. The day of the slip Mr. Hollingworth set out on foot to bring supplies from Lorne. On the return journey he reached the ridge top shown in Plate 2 and saw to his surprise that much of the slope face had slipped into the sea. It took a long time for the waves to wash away this massive quantity of rock and earth. The shore is sheltered from the direct effect of the main January/February PLATE 3. The slip area photographed inv. 1930 from the Ocean Road. showing the are of rocks murking the toe of the largest slip. The slip occurred at the end of the last century energy source of this coast, the south- west swell, but 1t receives the full force of the easterly storms. The siltstone gradually disintegrated and washed away, but the accompanying greywacke boulders defining the toe of the slip formed an are of rocks (Pl. 3) which has been erroneously reported as an Aboriginal fish trap. This stone arrangement can no longer be seen because the rocks were bulldozed to the beach with a view to protecting the slip area. Coastal Defence In 1949 the Country Roads Board protected the road in the slip area by building on the shore a double wall of piles with rubble fill 28 m long, plus a short stone wall at each end as revet- ments. This was effective, but in more recent years the waves have largely destroyed this defence. The classic means of coastal defence are beach seawalls and groynes, but these have some unsatisfactory characteristics, and better methods are being sought such as the submarine seawall, which reduces the energy of waves before they reach the shore. The CSIRO Divi- sion of Applied Geomechanics has developed an apparatus invented in England for measuring shoreline ero- sion—the Micro-erosion Meter. With this instrument, coastal erosion is now being monitored at a number of sites Ea: along the Otway coast, including Clarke’s Slip, This will define precisely where and at what rates wear 15 oOccur- ring on the shore. Boulder Colours Plute | Shows a great amount of rock spoil from road building that was lipped on to the shore during the construcuion of the Great Ocean Road, and more has been added since. In addition there are the natural shoreline boulders which all consist of greywacke because the siltstone breaks up before boulders can be formed. But there is a striking difference about the boulders at Clarke’s Slip. Besides the usual greenish grey (unweathered) and brown (weathered) boulders, there is a still greater number of dark red and purplish red boulders which are much heavier, The different colour and weight is due to iron oxide. Dr. E. R. Segnit of the CSIRO Division of Mineral Chemistry found that the iron originated from siderite (iron carbo- nate) deposited when the rocks were laid down. The ironstone boulders are heavier, and so tend to stay on the plat- form. Siderite nodules have been described from this coast (Gill 1977, Gill et al, 1977), but here the mineral occurs irregularly in the strata. As a result, the shore platlorm on the south side of the slip area is very irregular, PLATE 4, The Tertiary Rocks and Holocene shoreline terrace, looking cust from Spout Creek towards Fuirhaven Mr. J, Walsh of CSIRO Division of Applied Geomechanics prepared the photographic prints, and his effort to obtain reproducible prints from very old photographs js especially appreciated the iron-impregnated rocks standing up as rounded ridges and knobs protrud- ing above the general level. This pro- vides some protection for the slip area. The rough terrain prevented the bulldozer from pushing ashore the boulders from that area, but as such boulders help to disorganize the waves, they possibly do more good whére they are: On the Ocean Road east of Spout Creek, a cutting has revealed an emerged shore platform about 7 m above sea level (about 125,000 years old) which has on it both greywacke and ironstone boulders. Coal Seams At low tide east of Spout Creek coal seams appear, standing above the level of the sand, oblique to the shore (strike about 203°) and dipping seaward. Nearby Coalmine Creek gets its name from the fact that coal was mined there in 1902. Here the older Otway rocks end, and the Tertiary softer strata form the landscape and shore. The coal seams are in the lowest beds of the series (Paleocene), The coal beds at low tide used to stand much higher, so much so that on their shoreward side there was a pool used by local people for swimming. In the early days local residents exploited this coal for domestic purposes, collecting it in Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 sacks and wheelbarrows. Coal from this series has been worked commercially at Benwerrin, and is being worked at Anglesea. Edwards (1962) has described the occurrences, Dr. Isabel Cookson determined pollens from the Coalmine Creek coal (in Gill 1952) and showed that the coal was formed in a conifer forest swamp. Myrtle Beech (Nothofagus cunninghamii (Hook.) Oerst.) pollen was also plentiful, but as this tree needs well-drained country, it must have grown on the slopes of the surrounding hills. Shoreline Terrace The road from Spout Creek at Eastern View to Fairhaven runs along a low flat sandy terrace only 1-3 m above high sea level (Pl. 4). This formation has a dynamic equilibrium with the sea, being cut back by destructive waves, then restored by constructive waves and wind action. When the Ocean Road to Lorne was opened in 1922, the only bridge on this section of the road was at Moggs Creek (which has a soft floor), while Coalmine Creek and Spout Creek (which have a base of Otway rocks) were forded. When the tide was low enough, horse-drawn vehicles were often driven along the beach, as the tracks in old photographs show (PI, 2). This shoreline terrace has been built in the past 6000 years, and owes its pre- sence to two processes—some higher levels of the sea during this period, and the continual increase in sand volume due to erosion. The Tertiary rocks behind this ter- face are unstable, and large silcrete boulders from the top of the range now near the shore indicate a long slow movement seaward, When the sea retreated from cutting the 7 m platform near Spout Creek, the Tertiary rocks slumped forward to cover it, as cun be seen in the road cutting. When the sea came up again about 6000 years ago, the removal of the toe of the slope caused more slipping. As a result, all the soils on these deposits are juvenile. When during road improvements in December 1973 the toe of the slope was cut back east of Spout Creek, the Tertiary beds began slipping seawards again. The cutting east of Spout Creek presents a whole array of sediment types (clean sand, clayey sand, sandy clay, carbonaceous clay) that are the products of ancient slips. It would be an interesting (and valuable) study to work out the whole history of this instability, especially as more houses are being built on this formation. The first houses on these Tertiary sedi- ments were built in 1925. Further Reading The Otway Symposium in Volume 89 of the Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria is a useful compen- dium of information on this interesting region, REFERENCES Edwards, A. B., 1962. Notes on the geology of the Lorne District, Victoria. Proc. Ro Soe. Vietoria 75: 101-119 Gill, b, D., 1952, Range in me of the Australian Tertiary flora. dust. J. Sei. 15(2): 47-49 Gill, E. D., 1973. Rate and mode of retrogradation on rocky coasts in Victoria, Australia, and thei relationships to sea level changes, Boreas 2(3): 143-171. Gill, b. D., 1977, Evolution of the Otway coast, Victoria, Australia, from the Last Interghicial to the present. Proc. R. Soc. Victoria 89: 7-18. Gill, E, D., Segnit, E. R., and McNeill, N, H., 1977. Coneretions in the Otway Group sedi- ments, southeast Australia, Proc. R. Soc. Vie- foria 89: S1-55_ (Ed. Plate 1 is the cover illustration for this issue) HAVE YOU PAID YOUR SUBSCRIPTION FOR 1979? The new subscription rates for 1979 are printed on the back page of this issue. Please assist the Club by posting your sub. straight away to the Subscription Sect. Mr. F. Koth, 21 Smart St., Hawthorn 3122, Vic. January/February [had f Mammals and Birds of the Wallaby Creek Catchment, Victoria, with special reference to Species using Tree-holes. BY GRAEME J. AMBROSE* Introduction Mammals and birds encountered during a study in the Wallaby Creek Catchment of the Melbourne and Metropolitan Board of Works are listed in this article, The catchment is near Kinglake West, and is approximately sixty kilometres north of the city of Melbourne. Two sites were studied, both near the junction of MMBW roads four and eleven. Since mid-1975 observations have been made fortnightly in the vicinity of these areas, The study forms part of a larger research project investigating animals Which use tree-holes. Description of location The Wallaby Creek sites are on a plateau. Their elevation is approx- imately 686m. and the mean annual rainfall, (as measured from 1885), is 1219mm. (MMBW records, Wallaby Creek. Charles Curry, pers. comm.) Tall Open Forest is the most abun- dant habitat type. The forest contains a mixture of eucalypts: Mountain Ash Eucalyptus regnans, Mountain Grey Gum E. cypellocarpa and Messmate E. obliqua. The proportion of each species differs markedly between some areas. The understorey is variable in height and density. Its most common species are Hazel Pomaderris Pomaderris aspera, Silver Wattle Acacia dealbata, Blackwood A. melanoxylon, Prickly Moses, 4. Verticillata, Mountain Cor- rea Correa lawrenciana, Blanket-leaf Bedfordia salicina, Prickly Coprosma Coprosma_ billardieri, Musk OQlearia argophylla, Common Cassinia Cassinia aculeata, Christmas Bush Prostanthera lasianthos, Purple Mint-bush P. vvalifolia and Soft and Rough Treeferns Dicksonia antarctica and *Department of Zoology, La Trobe University, Bundoora, Victoria, 3083 8 Cyathea australis. Creepers, orchids and smaller ferns, especially bracken, are also numerous. History of the Area The forest is a patchwork of regrowth, mostly from severe fires which, according to MMBW fire records, occurred in 1905, 1926, and 1938-9. Large overmature trees rise above the rest of the forest, These may date back to 1730, whilst other mature stands could have originated in 1851 or during the 1890s. (Charles Curry, MMB\..,, pers. comm.) The intensities of the fires were different in different places. This led to the many kinds of regrowth which can be seen today. Thus, in one part of the study area a light burn has left a dense understorey and many old trees. In another part a heavy burn has resulted in the loss of most of the old trees and extensive bracken growth underneath. Fauna Many of the birds listed below move through the area when food is avail- able. For example, honeyeaters arrive to feed on flowering eucalypts or cor- reas. Others can be found in particular weather conditions. Black Cockatoos, for instance, appear most freqently in unsettled weather. Some species, such as the White-throated Needletail Hirun dapus caudacutus, only occur in the area seasonally. Other species are found there throughout the year. Small birds which eat insects are common, and are often found in mixed-species groups. These feeding parties move slowly through the area and can be easily located by listening for the massed calls of the birds. Some species are almost entirely restricted to ‘*frost-holes’’ and cleared areas along tracks. Flame and Scarlet Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Robins Petroica phoenicea and P. multicolor, Red-browed Firetails Emblema temporalis, and Australian Magpies Gymnorhina tibicen, are ex- amples of these animals. There seemd to be very few honeyeaters or larger possums and gliders in the area, although this is not the case in other areas of the catch- ment. By contrast, small mammals such as Stuart’s Antechinus Aniechinus stuartii, and Bush Rats Rattus fuscipes, occur in large numbers. Future of the catchment and its fauna The mountain forests of Mel- bourne’s catchments are in the unusual position of having been relatively undisturbed by man over a long period of time. At present 62,500 ha. of the catchments are being used solely for water harvesting, although these areas are potentially useful for timber pro- duction and other purposes (Land Conservation Council, 1975, p. 24). The MMBW has been conducting research on the effects of multiple use, particularly forestry, on water collec- tion in the catchments (ibid). In 1968 the government directed that the hydrology research being undertaken should aim to produce results by 1979. Decisions arising from these results will be used to determine management policy for Melbourne in the future (ibid). It is possible that this may result in some forestry activity in specified parts of catchments. There has already been an extensive commitment of Tall Open Forest out- side the catchments to forest opera- tions. (FORWOOD, 1975; Rawlinson, 1976). In view of this, and the impend- ing decision about catchment manage- ment, it is useful to know which animals use this type of forest. As there is no public access to this catchment lit- tle has been recorded about the animals found there. Species using tree-holes Special note is made on the list below January/February of species which use old hollow trees. Tree-holes are used by thirty-nine per cent of the species listed (Table One). Twenty-four per cent of the Species are dependent on tree-holes. They are used as roosting, breeding and foraging sites, and possibly also as shelters or refuges (Ambrose, unpublished data). The twenty-four species using hollows would probably be adversely affected by the initial removal of many old trees during felling. In addition, the short rotation time of the crop would not be sufficient to allow replacement of the tree-holes (Ambrose, in preparation), Acknowledgements Iam most grateful to the staff of the MMBW, particularly those at the fores- try Section at Mitcham and the Wallaby Creek catchment, for advice and generous assistance. Thanks are also due to Dr. Richard Zann, Dr. Ric How and Mr. Peter Rawlinson for their interest and advice, REFERENCES FORWOOD Conference (1975). Report of the Forestry and Wood-based Industries Develop- ment Conference. Australian Government Pub- lishing Service, Canberra; 1-94. Land Conservation Council (1975) Proposed Recommendations: Melbourne Study Area, Land Conservation Council, Melbourne, 101 pp. Rawlinson, P. A. (1976). Native Forests versus Pulpwood Industries. Victoria's Resources 18: 29-32. Species List The following abbreviations have been used in the species list: Status: U=uncommon, O=occasional, F=frequent, C=common, S=seasonal. Other: |=introduced, N=nomadic, B=breeding observed, RE=resident. The comments in the column headed “Use of Hollows’ applies only to observed behaviour in the study area. TABLE ONE Percentages of species using tree-holes. Class Number of Percentage species using tree-holes Aves 35 33 Mammalia 12 38 Total 67 39 9 Species Status Use of Hollows CLASS AVES Common Bronzewing Phaps chalcoptera uU Yellow-tailed Black Cockatoo Calyptorhynchus funereus C\N obligate Gang-gang Cockatoo Callocephalon fimbriatum C.N obligate Sulphur-crested Cockatoo Cacatua galerita F.N obligate Musk Lorikeet Glossopsitta concinna U.N obligate Australian King-Parrot Alisterus scapularis U,N obligate Crimson Rosella Platvcercus elegans B,C,N_ obligate Fan-tailed Cuckoo Cuculus pyrrhophanus U Southern Boobook Owl Ninox novaeseelandiae RE,O _ obligate Barn Owl Tyro alba RE,O obligate Tawny Frogmouth Podargus strigoides RE,O Australian Owlet-nightjar Aegotheles cristatus White-throated Needletail Hirundapus caudacutus Laughing Kookaburra Dacelo novaeguineae Superb Lyrebird Menura novaehollandiae Black-faced Cuckoo-shrike Coracina novaehollandiae White's Thrush Zoothera dauma Pink Robin Petroica rodinogaster B,RE,O obligate PINS B,F,RE obligate B,C,RE oO O,RE occasional U Flame Robin Perroica phoenicea B,O,RE occasional Scarlet Robin Perrvica multicolor Eastern Yellow Robin Eopsaltria australis Jacky Winter Microeca leucophaea Crested Shrike-tit Falcunculus Jrontatus Olive Whistler Pachycephala olivacea Golden Whistler Pachycephala pectoralis Rufous Whistler Pachycephala rufiventris Grey Shrike-thrush Colluricincla harmonica Rufous Fantail R/ipidura rufifrons Grey Fantail R/ypidura filliginosa Eastern Whipbird Psophodes olivaceus Superb Fairy-Wren Malurus cvaneus White-browed Serubwren Sericvarms frontalis Brown Thornbill Acanthiza wsilla uff-rumped Thornbill Acanthiza reguluides Yellow Thornbill Acanthiza nana 10 $,U occasional B,C,RE U O.N B,C,RE occasional B,O,N B,C,RE B,F,RE U,RE B,C.RE FRE F.RE CIRE infrequent Striated Thornbill Acanthiza lineata Varied (Orange-winged) Sitella Daphoenositta chrysoptera White-throated Treecreeper Climacteris leucophaea Red-browed Treecreeper Climacteris erythrops Red Wattlebird Anthochaera carunculata Yellow-faced Honeyeater Lichenostomus chrysops White-eared Honeyeater Lichenostomus leucotis White-plumed Honeyeater Lichenostomus penicillatus White-naped Honeyeater Melithreptus lunatus New Holland Honeyeater Phylidonyris novaehollandiae Eastern Spinebill Acanthorhynchus tenuirostris Spotted Pardalote Pardalotus punctatus Striated Pardalote Pardalotus striatus Silvereye Zosterops lateralis Red-browed Firetail Emblema temporalis Satin Bowerbird Ptilonorhynchus violaceus Australian (white-backed) Magpie Gymnorhina tibicen Pied Currawong Strepera graculina Grey Currawong Strepera versicolor Australian Raven Corvus coronoides CLASS MAMMALIA Black-tailed (Swamp) Wallaby Wallabia bicolor Brush-tailed Possum Trichosurus vulpecula Pigmy (Feather-tailed) Glider Acrobates pygmaeus Greater Glider Schoinobates volans Wombat Vombatus ursinus Long-nosed Bandicoot Perameles nasuta Brown Antechinus Antechinus stuartil Bush Rat Rartus fuscipes European House Mouse Mus musculus European Rabbit Oryctolagus cuniculus Unidentified bat species (at least one) Sambar deer Cervus unicolor C,RE B,C,RE obligate U obligate F\N O.N O,RE O,N O,N O,N F,N,RE occasional O,N obligate C\N 10) U 10) Oo O,RE O B,C,RE U,RE obligate U,RE _ obligate U,RE obligate C,RE occasional (fallen hollows) O,RE = (fallen hollows) Bere asus Ul ? El oi frequent Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Five Small Fungi ae from Rotting Logs and ark BY G. BEATON* AND G, WestTE * * Five small fungi new to Victoria and Australia are described and illustrated. They were collected from rotting wood and bark in native forests. Both Patellaria atrata (Hedwig) Fr. and Karschia stygia (B. & C.) Mass. have saucer-shaped brown to black fruiting bodies which are produced on the sur- face of dead wood, and are usually referred to as apothecia.t The disc- shaped fertile layer has club-shaped sporangia (asci) interspersed with sterile filaments which swell at the tips and form a cover over the asci. The remaining three fungi are cup fungi:— Lachnellula pulveracea (A. & S. ex Fr.) Dennis and Hyaloscypha sp. both have soft fleshy apothecia the margin and base of which are covered with hairs. Tonomidotis fulvotingens (B. & C.) Cash has fleshy to cartilaginous apothecia without distinctive hairs. It has a large black apothecium, up to 30 mm diameter, which changes from cup- shaped to leaf-like with maturity. These characteristics are all illustrated in the drawings, Figs 1-5. Many of these fungi are described from a single collection so we are pub- lishing these descriptions and drawings to encourage those interested to look more closely at rotting wood and bark where they may find further records or perhaps new species as yet undescribed, Overseas amateur mycologists contribute much to the observation and study of fungi. We would like to encourage this attitude. * Eildon, Victoria **School of Botany, University of Melbourne. +See glossary Vic.Nat. Vol. 95 No. 5 page 1&6. January/February Patellaria atrata (Hedwig) Fr. Syst. mycol. 2: 160 (1822). Synonymy: Lichen atratus Hedwig, Descript. Muse. Frond. 2: 61(1789). Lecani- dion australe Speg. An, Mus. Nac. Buenos Aires 23: 104 (1912). Description: Apothecia superficial, scattered; disk .75 mm diameter, black, flat or depressed; receptacle saucer shaped, black, smooth, sessile on a broad base, with a rounded margin ris- ing slightly above the level of the disk; ectal excipulum of widely branched, septate, pigmented hyphae with a few subglobose terminal cells, the outer layers obscured by a layer to 30 um thick of dense brown pigment, hyphae to 4 wm diameter; medullary excipulum a layer to 150 wm thick of densely interwoven, thick walled, hyaline or lightly pigmented hyphae to 8 wm diameter, arising directly from the substrate. Asci with 2 layered wall, (bituni- cate), clavate, thick walled in the upper part, 8-spored, negative reaction with iodine, 105-120 x 14-16 wm. Spores fusiform-clavate, hyaline, biseriate, becoming thick walled, the majority 7-septate with a few up to 9- septate, 30-42 x 7.5-10 wm. Paraphyses slender, septate, branched, tips slightly thicker, immersed in brown matrix, to 3 wm thick. On fallen wood debris in spring. Known in Victoria from one collection only. Agrees well with European material except in the smaller asci but here the agreement is very close with New Zealand and Argentine collections (Dennis, (1961)). Collection examined: Port Campbell National Park, Victoria, on uni- 1 pied ‘q ‘snosy “oO ‘onRuues Ayd NQLASIP SUIMOYS WUN|NAIOXA [B1IDq “Y ‘VIDUID Did JQ Ul Passo! sd YM sas uon UuMO. awsid anbedo jo Pw Jodsoosy “y °Xi1 ‘aeyddy |eseg ‘g ‘uonriu “4 So. . cag cS —/ rt 2 ; is athe. Te be 12 Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 “ploayjody January/February dentified wood, E. Finck (G. Beaton, 343), Sept. 1966. Karschia stvgia (B. & C.) Mass. Apothecia superficial, scattered; disk to .75 mm diameter, black, flat; recep- tacle saucer shaped, sessile on a broad base, smooth, dark brown or black, with a very thick margin rising slightly above the disk on dried specimens; ectal excipulum a pigmented, slightly irregular, textura prismatica lying at right angles to the surface, the outer layer of cells embedded in a dark brown pigment, cells to 16 x 8 wm; medullary excipulum a layer of interwoven hyphae in the subhymenial area above a layer 25 wm thick of thick walled hyphae lying parallel with the surface of the disk and merging with a thick walled textura angularis in the basal area. Asci with 2 layered wall (bitunicate), clavate, 8-spored, thick walled, apex stained dark blue with iodine, 55-65 x 9-13 wm. Spores ellipsoidal, biseriate, brown, ]-septate, 13-18 x 3.5-5.5 um, Paraphyses (filaments) cylindrical with slightly thickened tips embedded in a brown epithecial crust which adheres to the tips of separated filaments or paraphyses, longer than the asci, 2 ~m diameter, tips to 3.5 wm. On fallen sticks, twigs and dead Pyrenomycetes at almost any time of the year in moist conditions. The receptacle varies from brown to black in different collections, perhaps depending upon the substrate, other- wise it agrees fairly well with K. stygia. Collections examined: Mait’s Rest near Apollo Bay, Victoria, on bark and dead Pyrenomycete, G. Beaton 176, Dec. 1963; Learmonth Creek, Lower Glenelg, Victoria, on fallen stick, C. Beauglehole (G. Beaton 234), July, 1964; Kennedy’s Creek area, Victoria, on wood fragments, G. Beaton EO416, Sept, 1964. Lachnellula pulveracea (A. & S. ex Fr.) Dennis 14 Apothecia superficial, solitary or in swarms, often several apothecia arising from a common stem; disk to 1 mm diameter, depressed, greyish yellow to buttery yellow in soaked specimens; receptacle cup-shaped on a short, thick stalk with a dark brown base, dark brown but covered with a thick grey- white powder and with margin inrolled and totally covering the disk on dry specimens; base of the receptacle covered with upward-pointing, 1-4- celled obtuse hairs encrusted with a dark brown deposit, hairs to 25 x 3 wm; margin densely ringed with hyaline or faintly pigmented, finely granular, obtuse, septate hairs to 100 x 3 wm; ectal excipulum a layer to 30 xm thick of pigmented textura prismatica lying at an angle to the surface and with larger cells in the outer layers; medull- ary excipulum of hyaline, loosely inter- woven hyphae to 2 wm thick. Asci cylindrical-clavate, 8-spored, negative iodine reaction, 47-53 x 4-4.5 um. Spores ellipsoidal-fusiform, hyaline, biseriate, 5.5-7 x 1.5-2 wm. Paraphyses filiform, septate, obtuse, simple, same length as the asci, 1 wm thick. From late spring to midsummer on rotting wood in wet areas. Readily recognisable in the field by the grey- white powder, the blackish base to the stalk, the disk covered by marginal hairs on dry or exhausted specimens and, in Victorian collections at least, often several apothecia arising from a common Stalk. Collections examined: Melba Gully near Laver’s Hill, Victoria, on uni- dentified, rotting log, G. Beaton 51, Dec. 1962; Caveat Gully near Molesworth, Victoria on a dead musk (Olearia argophylla (Labill.) Benth.), G. Crichton, Sept. 1964; same place and date, on unidentified rotting log, G. Crichton (G. Beaton E0210), Hyaloscypha sp. Apothecia superficial, scattered; disk Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 “UIZIBLU P2|jOsUI YIM AIp UO pur PIDaylOde 3 yeseq pajuawiZid wosy BuIsiue sivey [BUISIeU poluswisig “y ‘avarviaajnd pjnjjauyoo7] “¢ “B14 ysasj OM] “q ‘Saodsoasy *q ‘saskydeied pur losy “D ‘s|l29 surey jpseq ous YM Wnyndioxa [2199 Sot ioe oF Poche iol January/February .75 mm diameter, pale straw coloured in dried specimens with no colour change when soaked, flat or contorted by the substrate; receptacle saucer shaped, sessile on a narrow central attachment, concolorous with disk, the thin margin and base sparsely covered with hyaline, mostly 2-celled hairs to 30x 3 wm, aculeate, obtuse, or in a few hairs, capitulate; ectal excipulum a slightly undulating, hyaline textura prismatica with cells to 15 x 4 4m and lying parallel with the surface; medull- ary excipulum of hyaline, interwoven hyphae becoming parallel with the sur- face of the disk in the marginal area and merging into a rather thick walled textura globulosa with cells to 7 um seated on a few strands of parallel hyphae in the basal area. Asci cylindrical-clavate, 8-spored, pore blued in Melzer’s reagent on dried specimens only, 40-55 x 5-8 yum. Spores ellipsoidal-fusiform, non- septate, hyaline, some slightly curved, with two minute oil drops, 7-10 x 2-2.5 pm. Paraphyses cylindrical, obtuse, sim- ple, non-septate, same length as asci, 2 jm diameter. The only known Victorian collection is from a rotting log in a watercourse in autumn. This fungus is fairly close to H. hyalina (Pers. ex Fr.) Boud. as described by Dennis (1949), but is pro- bably a distinct species. However, because of the scanty nature and poor condition of the only available collec- tion, we feel that it should not be given specific rank until further collections are available for examination. If the specimens examined are representa- tive, the species is noteworthy for the tather extreme variability in size and shape and in the scanty superficial and marginal hairs, cf, Dennis 1949. There is also some doubt about the colour of fresh specimens as the original collec- tion notes are lost. Collection examined: Melba Gully near Laver’s Hill, Victoria, on rotting January/February ee i watercourse, G. Beaton 74, Mar. 63. Jonomidotis fulvotingens (B. & C.) Cash Apothecia superficial, solitary or in groups, sometimes confluent at point of attachment to substrate; disk vary- ing greatly in size and shape, black, contorted, to 30 mm diameter; recepta- cle at first cup-shaped on a short stalk, becoming flattened, leaf-like and laterally attached at maturity, sessile or short stalked, black, rugulose, no definite marginal structure, thickness, including hymenium, less than 1 mm: ectal excipulum a layer of 80 wm thick of pigmented, thick walled textura globulosa with cells to 7 wm diameter: medullary excipulum of loosely inter- woven, lightly pigmented hyphae, both thick and thin walled and with scattered inflated cells, hyphae mostly 3.5 ~m diameter. Releasing copious purple- brown pigment in 242% KOH. Asci cylindrical-clavate, 8-spored, negative iodine reaction, 29-33 x 3.5- 4.5 wm. Spores narrowly ellipsoidal, a few curved, nonseptate, hyaline by transmitted light but light yellow in mass, irregularly biseriate, with several small oil drops, 4.5-6 x 1-1.5 wm. Paraphyses cylindrical, septate, some branched from lower third, slightly longer than the asci and with tips embedded in a purple-brown matrix that dissolves out in 244% KOH, 1 «m diameter. On the top of mossy logs in wet forest areas in late summer and early autumn, Of this fungus, Dennis stated ‘the colour in alkali is brown, not purple! That seems the only difference from Tonomidotis fulvotingens (B. & C.) Cash’, (pers. comm, 1963). The colour exudation in 2'% KOH is now a rich purple-brown; because of this and the general agreement indicated by Dennis we have assigned this fungus to /. fulvotingens temporarily. When a direct comparison can be made between the 17 Victorian collections and authentic material of /, fulvotingens it may be found desirable to name it as a new species. Collections examined: Quarry Glen, Turton’s Track, Otway Range, on fallen mossy log, K. & G. Beaton 62, Apr. 1964; Melba Gully near Laver’s Hill, Victoria, on fallen log in wet area, G. Beaton E0255, Feb. 1963. Acknowledgements The authors thank Dr H. J. Swart for a critical reading of the manuscript and Dr D. M. Calder, Chairman of the Botany School, University of Melbourne, for facilities provided. REFERENCES Butler, E. T. (1940). Studies in the Patellariaceae. Mycologia 32, 791-823. Dennis, R. W. G. (1949), Revision of the British Hyaloscyphaceae with notes on related Euro- pean species. Commonwealth Mycological Institute. Mycological Paper 32, 1-97. Dennis, R. W. G, (1961). Some inoperculate Dis- comycetes from New Zealand. Kew Bulletin /5, 293-320, Dennis, R. W. G. (1962). A reassessment of Belonidium Mont. & Dur. Persoonia 2, 171-192. Dennis, R. W. G. (1968). British Ascomycetes. Lehre, J. Cramer. Dharne, C. G. (1965). Taxonomic investigations tions on the discomycetous genus Lachnellula Karst. Phytopathologie Zeitschrift 33, 8-144. Durand, E. J. (1923), The genera Midotis, Jonomulous and Cordierites. Proceedings of the American Academy of Arts und Science 59, 3- 17 Fries, E, (1822). Patellaria, Systema mycologicum 17, 158-161 The Breeding Time and Growth Rate of Sepia apama. (Mollusca: Cephalopoda) BY K. N. BELL* Very little is known about the breea- ing times or growth rates of the cuttles found in Victorian waters. From July 1976 to July 1977 a large collection of beach stranded sepions of cuttles was made from Collendina, Ocean Grove, Vict. These were for a study to be undertaken on the physical variation of the sepions within the various species to be found in Victoria. Sepia apama is the most common and largest cuttle to be found in Victoria *Honorary Associate, Invertebrate Dept., National Museum of Victoria. January/February (Bell and Plant, 1977). A large number of juvenile sepions were collected (N=139). Juveniles of apama are those sepions less than 100 mm in length; this length is based upon the width/length ratio of the sepions which shows a marked change at /=100 mm. The percentage of juveniles in the fauna fluctuated even though specimens were present each month. There is a wide range in size each month but it was found that the average size of the sepions increased steadily month to month. Also the smallest size present increased steadily, as shown in the 19 28 Range (mm) pl Oo = / Size 1976 Pai et The monthly size range variations in juveniles of Sepia apama, with the number of juveniles present. figure. The growth rate can be estimated from both the smallest sepions and from the average (arithmetic mean) sizes. These estimates are 6 mm per month and 12 mm per month respectively. Considering the chance nature of the preservation and of the collecting these figures are in good agreement. If we assume an average growth rate of 10 mm/month it indicates that specimens take 10 to 12 months to reach adult size. The figure also shows quite clearly the abrupt change in size during December- January. This indicates that breeding i.e. hatching, takes place in November- December since it is known that cuttles grow rapidly when very small (Denton and Gilpin-Brown, 1961). The growth rates found in this study may be compared with those found by Choe (1963). In laboratory reared animals of Sepia esculenta and S. 20 subaculeata he found rates varying from 15 mm to 30 mm/month. These are much higher than that for apama but may be accounted for, in part, by the regular feeding in the laboratory and the subsequent less energy loss compared to the need to capture the food with the wild specimens. The largest specimen of apama col- lected had a length of 460 mm, indicat- ing an age of about 4 years at least. Whether animals begin breeding at age one year or later, or even breed for several seasons is not known and must await detailed field and laboratory studies. REFERENCES Bell, K. N. and Rhyllis J. Plant, 1977. Cuttle Bones on Victorian Beaches. Vic. Nat. 94(3): 115-118. Choe, S., 1963. Daily age markings on the Shell of Cuttlefishes. Nature, 197(4864): 306-307. Denton, E. J. and Gilpin-Brown, J. B., 1961. The Buoyancy of the Cuttlefish, Sepia officinalis (L.). J.mar. biol. Ass. ULK., 41: 319-342. Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Sites of Special Scientific Interest BY E. C.F. Birp* Parts of the landscape are of special interest to scientists, either for research or for educational purposes, and in recent years attempts have been made to delineate these areas and man- age them as reserves. Inventories of such ‘sites of special scientific interest’ have been compiled in various coun- tries by various organisations. In 1947, a list of such sites in England and Wales was compiled by a committee led by Dr. Julian Huxley and Professor A. G. Tansley, and this formed the basis for the extensive system of Nature Reserves now under the management of the British Nature Conservancy Council. In compiling that list, the committee was able to draw upon a great deal of scientific experience and published work, notably Tansley’s own study of the vegetation of the British Isles (1939). They considered the problem of identifying sites that were of special scientific interest, including biological, geological, and archaeological sites, acknowledging that most of the land- scape has features of general scientific interest. The list included representa- tive examples of features that were of wide occurrence in England and Wales, as well as sites with ‘populations, aggregates of species, individual species, and communities that are peculiar, rare, or unique’. Attempts have been made to draw up similar inventories in other coun- tries as a basis for developing or improving programmes of conserva- tion based on managed reserves. In Victoria the first attempt was that initi- ated by the National Parks Association in 1967 and published as Nature Con- servation in Victoria: a survey, by Judith Frankenberg in 1971. Soon afterwards, *University of Melbourne. January/February the Town and Country Planning Board sponsored a preliminary inventory of sites of scientific interest on the Vic- torian coastline, published as a broadsheet (Bird 1973), and as a sequel to this ran a project (co-ordinated by R. D. Spencer) which led to publication of reports on botanical (Barson and Calder 1976), zoological (Dorward 1976), archaeological (Coutts er al. 1976) and geological/geomorphologi- cal (Bird 1977) sites in the Victorian coastal region. In addition, the Town and Country Planning Board has initi- ated development of a master file of such sites, to be used as a basis for planning development and conserva- tion along the coast, prepared by Hansen (1978). It is hoped that these surveys can now be extended inland, eventually to cover the whole of the state of Victoria. Recognition and delimitation of sites of special scientific interest raise a num- ber of problems. The sites are recog- nised partly on the basis of scientific experience, notably where research has been carried out and the results pub- lished, and partly by means of specific surveys, in which individuals, groups, or organisations have sought to iden- tify such areas in terms of their “scientific perception’ of actual or potential value for research, education, and conservation. The sites vary in size from less than a hectare to many square kilometres. Some are within areas that have already been declared National Parks or Nature Reserves of various kinds; others are on Crown Land areas for which specific manage- ment plans can be developed; and others on privately owned land. Some have been studied in detail; others are known only at a reconnaissance level, and still await detailed study. In many 21 yjaqdwey og “Arg SHIN OML “Caled ARG madoyUuRIS “| Aid 22 Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 cases, much more survey and research work will be needed before a manage- ment plan can be drawn up and imple- mented to safeguard the perceived research, education, or conservation values. And where a site of special interest has been declared there is not only an obligation that planners and developers acknowledge it and permit its continued management for conser- vation purposes but also that the scien- lists who have shown enthusiasm for the area in fact use it for research, education, or conservation purposes. In addition to these general problems there are specific issues related to each kind of scientific site. Geological and geomorphological sites It is necessary to make a distinction between the general scientific interest of a geological outcrop (for example the Cretaceous outcrop of the Otway Ranges as shown on geological maps) and the special scientific interest of a geological exposure (for example a sec- tion in a sea cliff, quarry, or roadside cutting that shows rock types or struc- tures). Some geological sites are of special interest because they are unusual or even unique, while others are the best representative examples of features that occur more extensively. Exposures that indicate the strati- graphic relationships between geologi- cal formations are of special interest: for example, the cliffs near Stanhope Point (Plate 1), which show Pleistocene dune calcarenite, with kKarstic klints at the cliff crest, overlying earlier quartzose sands, which rest upon brown post— Miocene clays piped irregularly into the basal Port Campbell Limestone. Such a site provides evi- dence for discussion and analysis of the relationships between geological for- mations extending over a wide area, and is of obvious educational value. Geological formations are named with reference to selected type locations, usually where the rock type is displayed January/February most clearly in relation to other forma- tions, or where the outcrop has yielded fossils or other evidence indicating its geological age. Such type locations are necessarily sites of special scientific interest. They include the Whaler’s Bluff section at Portland, type location for the Whaler’s Bluff Formation, comprising clays and limestones of late Pliocene to early Pleistocene age, and the bluff at Jemmy’s Point, near Lakes Entrance, which has yielded an assem- blage of fossils that defines the early Pliocene Kalimnan stage for the Jemmy’s Point Formation (Douglas and Ferguson 1976), Also of special geological interest are examples of strongly-folded rock for- mations, as at Cape Liptrap (Plate 4); exposures of igneous intrusions, such as the volcanic neck on the foreshore near Cape Paterson: outcrops of fossiliferous rock, as at Fossil Beach, near Mornington; and such features as the ‘cannon-ball’ concretions in the Plate 3. Artillery Rocks, near Lorne, 23 Plate 4. Anticlinal fold, Cape Liptrap Cretaceous sandstones of the Otway coast, especially where they are weathering out as ‘mushroom rocks’ on the shore (Plate 3). One difficulty in the assessment of geological sites is the fact that many exposures are subject to change, either naturally (as a result of cliff recession or shore erosion) or as the outcome of man’s activities (continued working of a quarry section). In some cases it may be necessary to protect and preserve a section of special interest, but there is always the possibility that continued changes will bring to light more geological evidence, and perhaps ever belter sections. Another difficulty is that interest in geology is often aroused and sustained by the excitement of seeking and col- lecting specimens, especially of minerals and fossils. This can be damaging. The fossiliferous outcrop in the base of the Beaumaris cliffs has Plate 5 Liptrap Abrasion notch and shore platform, Cupe 24 been quarried oul as a deep enclave by fossil-hunters, and parts of the cliff near Cape Schanck and on Phillip Island have been blasted by gem hun- ters, It is necessary for excursion leaders and individuals to ensure that sites are not hammered or excavated irresponsibly. Specimens should not be collected unless they are to be put to scientific or educational use, for ex- ample in museums or teaching collec- tions. Many fossils are scarce and scientifically important, as are well- crystallized mineral specimens. They should at least be shown to profes- sional palaeontologists and mineralo- gists at the Geological Survey, the National Museum, or one of the Universities. In such ways, interested people may be able to contribute some- thing significant to geological science, as many have done in the past. Geomorphological sites of special in- terest include landforms that are partic- ularly clearly developed, especially in relation to geological formations. Such features as the raised beach at Two Mile Bay near Port Campbell (Plate 2) provide evidence of sequences of land- form evolution: in this case the bluff to the rear is a degraded Pleistocene sea cliff, a relic of the bluffs that must have extended along the whole of the Port Campbell coastline when the Holocene sea rose to its present level and rejuve- nated most of them as vertical receding Plate 6, Westernport Bay Mangrove trees, Chinaman Island, Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 cliffs. The Port Campbell coast has fine examples of stacks, natural arches, blowholes, and structural forms developed in the course of cliff reces- sion, and elsewhere there are various kinds of shore platforms, including those at Cape Liptrap, with undercut abrasion notches to the rear of benches cut across steeply-dipping hard mudstones (Plate 5), Depositional features are also of special interest, many of them subject to continuing natural changes that illustrate the way in which such features as spits, cuspate forelands, salt marsh terraces, and deltaic silt jetties form. Such sites are of particular value where the changes can be mapped and measured at regular intervals, so that a precise picture of modes of evolution can be built up, In most cases the appropriate man- agement for a geological or geomorphological site is to keep it free from artificial structures or the effects of development. Some documented sites have been lost as the result of such activities, for example the raised beach at Picnic Point, Sandringham, across which a road and ramp have been built, and the geological section at Oliver’s Hill, Frankston, which has been concealed by a sea wall, In recent years, proposed engineering works have threatened the few surviving cliff sectors on the Melbourne coast, nota- bly Red Bluff (type location for the Red Bluff Sand and the Black Rock Sandstone) and Black Rock Point (Bird etal. 1973), Itis hoped that designation of sites of special scientific interest will ensure that such losses do not occur. Botanical sites Sites of special botanical interest on the Victorian coast (Barson and Calder 1976) include typical remnants of vegetation thought to have previously been widespread, characteristic ex- amples of existing vegetation types, and plant communities that display unusual features, such as uncommon floristic associations or structural forms, rare species, or disjunct occur- rences. Sites which represent the limit of geographical distribution of a species or community, such as the southern- most mangroves in Corner Inlet, are also considered of special interest, as are sites where ecological relationships or community dynamics can be clearly demonstrated, As with dynamic geo- morphological sites (with which some of the botanical sites are associated) these are of more value if the changes are monitored and documented, Many such sites are in regular use for field teaching by university, college and school botany groups. Among the 106 botanical sites listed on the Victorian coast are the mangrove woodlands at the north of Chinaman Island near Warneet (Plate 6), the tidal flats of Anderson's Inlet Subject to the rapid spread of introduced. Spartina anglica (Plate 7), Plate 7. Spartina in Anderson's Inlet January/February Plute & Peneced coastal bushland, Seaford 25 and the bayside bushland at Seaford, where fencing has been introduced to aid regeneration after extensive damage by vehicles and trampling (Plate 8), Many interesting sites have been lost, but in some places restora- tion may be possible: for example, a wetland reserve analogous to the Woodwalton Fen Nature Reserve in the English Fenland could be estab- lished on a Suitable site within the similarly drained Koo-wee-rup swamp region, Zoological sites The listing of zoological sites has proved more difficult, partly because animals are less readily located and mapped than rock outcrops or plant communities, and partly because of the paucity of published or unpublished data on faunal distributions and habitat requirements. On the Victorian coast it was necessary for a team of zoologists from Monash University, led by Dr. Dorward, to carry out detailed surveys of selected sites to assess the significance of their fauna. Mammals were investigated by trapping, spot- lighting, and trace evidence; birds by sight, sound, and mist-netting; rep- tiles, amphibia, and invertebrates by observation and trace evidence; insects by ‘black light’ capture. It was found that animal species and communities of special scientific interest were mobile over relatively large areas, their essen- tial habitats being generally definable in terms of landform-vegetation associa- tions. It was expected that many of the zoological sites would fall within sites already listed on geological, geomorph- ological, or botanical grounds. This proved to be the case, but some 26 additional sites were identified by the zoologists, including such man-made or man-modified environments as the salt works behind Altona Bay and South Channel Fort in Port Phillip Bay (Dorward 1976). Mud Islands, in Port Phillip Bay, were listed as of nT Plate 9. Mud Islands, Port Phillip Bay. 26 Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 geomorphological, botanical and zoological interest (Plate 9), Archaeological sites Man has occupied south-eastern Australia for at least 40,000 years, and in the coastal fringe there is evidence of prolonged and intensive occupation and resource usage during the 6,000 years since the Holocene sea approached its present level. Middens consisting of marine or freshwater shells of edible species mixed with charcoal from fires, stone flakes and other artefacts occur extensively along the Victorian coustline, and there are many other surface sites, quarry sites, axe-grinding sites, scarred trees and stone structures which have been map- ped only ata reconnaissance level, and have received litthe detailed investiga. tion so far (Coutts ef al 1976), The attempt to decide which of these are of special scientific interest presents for- midable problems, since so much research has still to be carried out, but in a preliminary survey, Coutts er al (1976) were able to give data on 155 out of an estimated 1430 archaeological sites in the Victorian coastal region, The chief difficulties are natural ero- sion, especially of cliff-top and dune sites, and the impact of trampling, vehicles, excavation and construction works, Even though the aboriginal sites lack the ‘treasure trove’ attraction which resulted in the irresponsible excavation of many European archaeological sites, the damage has been extensive. In the Bridgewater Caves (Plate 10) for example, archaeological deposits have been van- dalised. Nevertheless, a scientific excavation is necessary in order to investigate and assess an archacological site, and a decision must then be taken whether to restore it for preservation us a landscape feature or to maintain an instructive cross-section for study, perhaps within a fenced enclosure or inside a building erected on the site, January/February Mate LO. Bridgewater Caves, West ol Porthind Delineation of boundaries Geological and geomorphological sites can usually be defined readily in terms of the extent of an exposure or a landform, Botanical sites are also well defined where they consist of a plant community that is distinetive on ait photographs (especially coloured air photographs), but where an unusual community of & fare species exist within a mosaic of vegetation types, delineation requires a detailed field survey, Difficulties also arise where vegetation shows transitions in floristic composition or structural form rather thun well-defined boundaries, and sur. veys of the proportion of a parueulat species or growth form may be neces- sary to define boundary criteria, This is often a problem with heathland sites, Where vegetation succession 1s proe pressing rapidly, sites may need to be defined in terms of the potential area within which the suceession can pro- ceed, the boundaries being geomorph: ological or pedological rather than botanical, Zoological sites present further probe lems. It may be possible to delimit them in terms of habitats defined by landforms, soils, water conditions of vegetation, but before this can be done it is necessary to establish the habitat requirements and migration patterns of an animal species or community, and especially the conditions necessary for a species to breed and maintain a viable 27 population. In general, sites of special zoological interest are larger in area than botanical sites, and it is often more appropriate to think in terms of encircling ‘buffer zones’ rather than linear boundaries. The pattern of archaeological sites is still more diffuse, as indeed are sites of special historical interest in the land- scape of Victoria. As the documenta- tion of sites of special scientific interest proceeds from localised and_ specific geological, geomorphological and botanical sites, which are generally well defined in area, through to the zones of zoological, archaeological and histori- cal interest, the concept broadens towards the kind of overall landscape planning and management envisaged by UNESCO and the International Union for the Conservation of Nature in the delineation of multi-purpose Biosphere Reserves (Bird & Barson 1977), It becomes a question of decid- ing which sites within the non-urban landscape of Victoria require special designation and management to meet the present and future needs of ihe scientific community. As the mapping of such sites extends inland from the coast, Victorian scientists will be expected to contribute further to the recognition, evaluation, management and use of our sites of special scientific interest. REFERENCES Barson, M.M. and Calder, D.M. (1976). Sites of special scientific interest in the Victorian coastal region (botanical) Town & Country Planning Board. Bird, E. C. F. (1977). Sites of special scientific interest in the Victorian coastal region (geological and geomorphological) Town & Country Plan- ning Board. Bird, E, C. P. and Barson, M. M. (1977), The recog- ninon and delineation of sites of special scientific interest, UNESCO Regional Workshop on Selec- uion of Biosphere Reserves. Bird, E. C. F., Cullen, P. W., and Rosengren, N. J. (1973), Conservation problems at Black Rock Point, Vier Nar, 90: 240-7, Coutts, P. J. F. etal. (1976), Sites of special serentific interest in the Victorian coastal region (archaeological) Town & Country Planning Board. Dorward, D. F. (1976). Sites of special scientific interest in the Victorian coastal region (zoological) Town & Country Planning Board. Douglas, J, G. and Ferguson, J. A. (eds.) (1976). Geology of Vietoria. Frankenberg, J. (1971). Nanire Conservation in Vie- forias @ survey. Hansen, L. (1978). Sites of special scientific interest in the Victorian coastal region (master file) Town & Country Planning Board, Huxley, JS. and Tansley, A. G. (1947). Conserva- tion of Nature in England and Wales, H.M.S.O. Publication Cmd. 7122, Tansley, A, G. (1939), The British Islands and their Vegetation. Greenhood plant flowers twice in a season Three years ago I had a clump of 13 Blunt Greenhoods Pterostylis curta, all seedlings from one plant, but Satin Bower-birds are fond of orchid tubers (and anything else edi- ble). When I discovered they were taking the tubers, only one plant remained and | protected it with wire. This year it flowered, not with one flower but two, as occasionally happens with many orchids. Unfortunately, my cover was not high enough to save the flowers which were nipped off. To my surprise another flowering stem grew up from the same rosette. By that time, as usual in the spring, the bower birds had left the garden to nest in the forest, so the second stem matured. 28 Again there were two flowers. It will be interesting to see whether the character re- appears next year or in any seedlings— though it has now (21 October 1978) been in flower for two weeks and has not been polli- nated, possibly because it is late and the pollinating insects are not about or possibly because of cold dull weather. The flowers die within a day or two of pollination though without it they may last for six weeks before closing. Jean Galbraith, Tyers Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Observations of the “White Fly” Trialeurodes vaporariorum and the predator wasp Eucarsia formosa BY M, BATES* OF FNCV Microscopy Group Since Mr. F, Morley brought a tomato leaf to a recent general meeting for identification of pupae cases on the undersurface, and his statement in the May/June issue of the Victorian Naturalist that the pupae and not the larvae had been parasitized, | have investigated the subject a little and re- port as follows:— My first observation of the pupae cases was on the underside of leaves of the hibiscus in March, 1975, then on the underside of leaves of beans, tomatoes, pumpkin and sow thistle, Some were black, and some nearly white. An ‘“‘infected’’ bean leaf was placed in a petri dish, and from the whitish pupae cases ‘‘white flies”’ emerged by splitting the cases longitudinally. Some time after the “‘flies’’ emerged, wasps emerged from the black cases by cutting a neat round hole toward one end of the longitudinal axis. The ‘‘flies’’ have four transparent wings, a yellow body and two red eyes, and are sap sucking (hemiptera). The white appearance is due to white wax deposits over the whole of the body and wings. The wasps have red eyes, black thorax, yellow abdomen and four fringed wings covered with short hairs, and are smaller than the ‘‘flies”’. From the C.S.LR.O. text ‘Insects of Australia’, page 424, the ‘‘flies’’ were identified as 7. vaporariorum Westwood (greenhouse ‘“‘white flies’’), and my enquiry from Burnley agricultural department determined the wasp as £. formosa Gahan. Both were imported to *13 Williamson Ave., Strathmore January/February Australia, T. vap, egys are shaped somewhat like a short sausage, and project at rt. angles to the under surface of the leaf, attached by a short pointed pedicle which penetrates the leaf and is fixed with an adhesive. They are 0.2 to 0.25 mm long and are yellowish when first laid, turning black in about two days. When an ege hatches, a flat green ovoid larva emerges from the end remote from the leaf surface, leaving the egg shell as a flat curved ribbon, and crawls about the leaf for two or three days before settling to feed alongside a leaf vein. ‘The larva moults after three to four days into the second instar nymph, which flattens out on the leaf and becomes even more transparent than the larva; the legs and antennae become vestigeal. These immobile stages are called ‘“*scales’’. Within three days the nymph moults into a third instar (0.5 mm) slightly larger than the foregoing stage. Within a further three to four days the nymph moults again, This stage is at first whitish green and closely set to the leaf surface, but, as it matures, it is lifted from the leaf surface by sub- marginal wax rods which eventually form a striated palisade, Unlike the other stages, this pupa now has five to eight pairs of prominent dorsal wax hairs and shorter marginal processes At 70-80°F (21-27°C) the adult normally emerges in about six days. The complete life cycle therefore occupies three weeks at 70°F (21°C) or four weeks at 60°F (15°C).””! “The adult female lives for 30 to 40 days and once settled for feeding, the rostrum is inserted into the leaf 29 through a stoma or between epidermal cells. The path of the stylets is inter- cellular, and although some parenchyma cells are pierced, sap 1s drawn from the phloem of the vascular bundles. The reproductive rate Is affected by the nutrient state of the host; the better the plant host is fed, the faster the white ‘‘flies’’ reproduce.” Under favourable condi- tions females lay between 150 and 500 eggs at an average rate of more than 25 per day. ‘‘The incubation period of the eggs varies from 30 days at 46°F (8°C) to 4 days at 86°F (30°C).°* ““A small chalcid wasp £. formosa is known to parasitize the scales of T. vap. The male, which occurs only rarely, develops where the Encarsia egg ts laid hyperparasitically in an Eucarsia larva and is readily distinguished by the dark-brown abdomen. £. formosa is an active insect and feeds on the honeydew produced by the host, Experiments have shown that the adults, which normally live 28 days, survive only four to five days in the absence of honeydew. The ovipositing female walks rapidly over the leaf surface seeking host scales with her antennae. Once located, the female mounts the scale and thrusts her ovipositor inside, The tip is moved about within the host tissues, in search of other Eucarsia eggs, which may have been laid previously. It is unusual to find a parasitized scale con- taining more than one Eucarsia egg, though as many as nine have been found where the parasites were very numerous, A yellowish exudation, which hardens within a few hours to a deep-brown or black pellet, emerges from each oviposition puncture. All inactive, nymphal instar of the white “fly”? are subject to attack, and are either killed and turn brown, or are parasitized and turn black. Each female parasite lays between 50- 100 eggs (0.08 mm long) in the seden- 30 tary scale stages of Trialeurodes but never in the pupa. The incubation period is four days. The white, limbless parasite larva rapidly consumes its host, and after about 8 days, the host scale turns black. After 10 days the adult emerges through a circular open- ing cut in the dorsal surface of the host scale x: < At 65°F (18°C) the fecundity of the host is ten times that of the parasite while the rate of development is equal, but at 80°F (27°C), the fecundity of the parasite increases to parity with its host, and in addition, the rate of development of the parasite becomes twice as fast as the white “‘fly’’.’”* A different bulletin reports of &. for- mosa that ‘‘The female settles usually on the underside of a leaf, and walks over it, touching the scales with her antennae. Having selected a scale in a suitable stage of development, she thrusts her ovipositor into the dorsal surface of the scale, holding her body in a nearly vertical position. The exact spot at which the ovipositor pierces the scale appears to be slightly anterior to, and to the left or right of the oper- culum... Examination of a large num- ber of white ‘‘fly’’ scales in various stages of development showed that the parasite oviposits in the white ‘“‘fly” scale at a period shortly after the third ecdysis. At this stage, the fourth in the white “fly” life cycle the scale is still flat, and the building up of wax cover- ing in a vertical plane has not begun. This latter process is not interfered with by actual oviposition of the parasite, but is prevented if the parasite egg hatches before it has begun.’”* “The fact that this E. formosa is habitually parthenogenetic is an enor- mous advantage in rearing the parasite for economic purposes.’”® This year I have noticed a black mould growing over many of the pupae cases on pumpkin leaves, apparently atmospheric conditions were suitable Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 for its development, and an English publication states that “‘The glasshouse white-fly seriously disfigures the host plant when black moulds Cladosporium spp. grow on the honeydew excreted by the adult and nymphs ... Adults pro- duce about 10 droplets per hour, pupae 25 per hour and larvae 8 per hour. Assuming that a female lays 120 eggs, the amount of honeydew produced by her progeny during their development would cover 20 tomato leaves.’”’ The terms ‘‘nymph” and ‘‘larva”’ appear to be used synonomously in the above articles. I believe what is meant by pupae (see above*) is the fourth instar which becomes the pupa after it increases in thickness. Acknowledgements I am deeply indebted to Phillip Hicks and others at the Department of Agriculture, Division of Plant Indus- tries, Burnley Gardens, for so willingly providing access to this information. REFERENCES 1. Fussey, Reid & Hesling The Pests of Protected Cultivation, Biology and Control of Glasshouse & Mushroom Pests p. 87/88. ibid p. 87, . ibid p. 87. ibid p. 90/91, . Bulletin of Entomological Research Vol. XVII, 1926-27 Important Parasite of Greenhouse White- fly p. 303. 6, ibid p, 303. 7. Fussey, Reid & Hesling, op.cit, p. 88/89. MABwh Flanged Dumb-bell— Found Simpson, Victoria, August 15, 1978 Fossicking in a disused sand pit adjacent to the junction of Boulevarde Road with the Simpson-Princetown Road on Tuesday, August 15, 1978, about noon-I noticed a small vase-shaped object lying about two- thirds of the way down the side of the heap of grey-black sand. On further observation it appeared to be a dark glassy fragment. When it was viewed closely a flanged dumb-bell australite broken at either end, was revealed. Washed in water to remove sand clinging to it, the australite was found to be very well preserved, to have thickish regular flanges on its under side, to be quite shiny, and to possess distinctive flow lines on its top surface. January/February The australite, when discovered, was lying with the flanged underside buried in hard sand. Unfortunately, it appears that the heap in which it was located was man-made, being one of a number of heaps apparently shovelled aside, probably by a front-end loader when the sand pit was in use. The night preceding the find there had been heavy rain which, together with pre- vailing wet weather during August, probably helped uncover this unusual specimen, Other fragments of australites are known to have been obtained from the sand pits, as well as the general area surrounding. Including a gravel-sized piece dislodged from it during washing, the weight of the australite is 7.33 grams. In length it measures 5 centimetres, being 10 millimetres wide at its narrowest, and 17 millimetres at its broadest dimension. A photograph of the specimen is attached. H. V. Feehan 31 Survey of Fishes in Wyperfeld National Park and Lake Werrimbean BY G. J. Apps*, J. P, BEUMER**, AND G. N. BACKHOUSE*** Introduction Records of the distributions of many species of fishes in Victorian inland waters are fragmentary or undocu- mented. Within National Parks in par- ticular little is known of fish distribu- tions (Frankenberg 1971). No records of fishes from the Wyperfeld National Park are available although the flora and terrestrial fauna are well known (Campbell 1899; French 1901; Hobson 1963; Jacobs 1968). This Park is the largest (139,760 ha) of Victoria’s National Parks, and in 1975, the lake system in the Park filled for the first time since 1956. These lakes fill when floodwaters from the Wimmera River reach Outlet Creek after filling Lakes Hindmarsh and Albacutya. Outlet *Lot 4, Collie Road, Gembrook, Vic. 3783. **Freshwater Fisheries Section, Fisheries and Wildlife Division, Arthur Rylah Institute of Environmental Research, Brown St., Heidelberg, Vic. 3084. ***Snob’s Creek Freshwater Fisheries Research Station and Hatchery, Private Bag 20, Alex- andra, Vic. 3714. Table 1. Survey methods at sampling localities. Creek flows through the Park connect- ing a series of swamps and lakes before flowing northwards to the Wirrengren Plain. Filling of the lakes provided a unique opportunity to record the fishes and their distribution after the flooding. The Freshwater Fisheries Section of the Fisheries and Wildlife Division with the co-operation of the National Parks Service therefore undertook a survey of the fishes pre- sent in the Wyperfeld Park lakes and the neighbouring Lake Werrimbean during 28-31 March, 1977. Methods We surveyed two localities, Black Flat and Lake Brambruck (also known as Lake Brambrook) within the Park, and one, Lake Werrimbean, situated south of the Park. Several different netting techniques were employed (Table 1) in an attempt to sample fishes of different species and different sizes. All nets, except the Seine net, were set overnight. After Locality Survey methods Date Species taken” Black Seine net (30 m x 1.8 m x 10 mm mesh) 28,111.77 S, G, M A Mech nets (66 m— 125 mm, 100 mm, 90 mm, 28.41.17 . (4) and 50 mm mesh) Drum nets (300 mm diameter x 450 mm x 6mm) 31.iii.77 G (20) Hee tte! Seine net (as above) 29.i11.77 8, G Mesh nets (66 m — 125 mm, 100 mm, 9O mm, 29.44.77 T (6) 75 mm (2), and 64 mm) Lee Mesh nets Werrimbean (4) (66 m — 100 mm, 90 mm (2), and 30.111.77 R, T 75 mm) * S, smelt; G, big-headed gudgeon; M, mosquitofish; T, tench; R, redfin. 32 Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Table 2. Length and weight ranges of the two larger species recorded, —— eee Locality Species No. T.L.range Wt. range (mm ) (g) Le SS 4 oe ee ee ee een Black Flat Tench 10 Lake Tench 3 brampruck Lake Tench 2 Werrimvean Redfin 13 270~380 360-900 340~ 360 600-7 30 330-370 550-7 20 130-340 110-650 —_—_—_—_—_ eee OO ees capture, each species was identified but only the tench, Tinca tinca (Linnaeus, 1758), and the redfin, Perca fluviatilis Linnaeus, 1758, were measured (total length to the nearest 10 mm) and weighed (to the nearest 10 g). Results Five species of fishes were recorded during the surveys: tench, redfin, Australian smelt, Retropinna semoni (Weber, 1895), big-headed gudgeon, Philypnodon grandiceps (Krefft, 1864), and mosquito-fish, Gambusia affinis (Baird & Girard, 1853). Of these, smelt (50-75 mm), gudgeon (40-75 mm) and mosquito-fish (30-50 mm) were com- mon and may be regarded as forage fishes. Tench were more abundant in Black Flat than in Lake Brambruck although at both localities 62% of the specimens measured 340-360 mm (Table 2). In Lake Werrimbean, redfin were most abundant and 69% of all specimens measured 220-250 mm: tench had a similar size range to those at the other two localities. Discussion In Victorian inland waters, approx- imately 25% of all recorded species of fishes are exotic to the Australian fish fauna (Barnham 1978; Tunbridge and Rogan 1976). In the Wimmera River system there are 15 fish species of which seven, mosquito-fish, tench, redfin, brown trout (Salmo trutta Lin- January/February naeus, 1758), rainbow trout (Salmo gairdneri Richardson, 1836), Crucian carp (Carassius carassius (Linnaeus, 1758)), and common (European) carp (Cyprinus carpio Linnaeus, 1758), are exotic. Fishes, other than smelt and big-headed gudgeon, native to the system are the river blackfish (Gadopsis marmoratus Richardson, 1848), pigmy perch (Nannoperca australis Gunther, 1861) and the ornate mountain galaxiid (Galaxias olidus Gunther, 1866). Three other native species, golden perch (Plectroplites ambiguus (Richardson, 1845)), freshwater catfish (Tandanus tandanus Mitchell, 1838), and Murray cod (Maccullochella peeli (Mitchell, 1838)), have also been introduced to the Wimmera system. Of the four species recorded in the Wyperfeld Park, both tench and mos- quito-fish are extremely tolerant of high temperatures and low oxygen levels (Lake 1967). These tolerances afford these two exotic species distinct ecological advantages over many native fishes. Both tench and mosquito-fish have been present in Australia for at least 60 years. Mosquito-fish were introduced in the late 1920s (Whitley, 1951) and their spread was accelerated during the Second World War years in the belief that this species would con- trol mosquitoes by eating their larvae (Lake 1971). Many species of native 33 forage fishes, e.g. the sunfish or rain- bowfish (Nematocentris fluviatilis (Castelnau, 1878)), have an equally voracious appetite for mosquito and other aquatic insect larvae and pupae. Tench and redfin were both introduced into Australia as angling and food fishes. The only other fish species also known from Lake Albacutya is the Crucian carp, Carassius carassius, but this was not recorded during the survey. The low overall number of species recorded in this survey (five out of a possible 15 species present in the entire system) reflects the ability of these species to withstand the existing harsh conditions and extreme fluctuations in the water regime which is at present intermittent. As Glover and Sim (1978) have indicated, floodwaters are the principal means of recolonisation and dispersal by fishes although certain species have the capacity, through physiological and/or behavioural adap- tations, to tolerate the wide fluctuations existing in areas such as those surveyed in the Wimmera River. Acknowledgements We would like to thank John Miller (Acting Ranger-in-Charge) and his staff for assistance. The co-operation of the National Parks Service in permit- ting the survey (Permit No. 767/41) is also acknowledged. Thanks are also extended to Darwin Evans for editorial assistance. REFERENCES Barnhan, C, A, (1978). A Guide to Freshwater Fish of Victoria (Govt. Printer, Melbourne). Campbell, A, (1899). Field notes from the Lower Wimmera. Victorian Nat. 16: 121-130. Frankenberg, J. (1971), Nature Conservation in Victoria (Victorian National Parks Association) (Halstead Press, Sydney). French, C, (1901). A naturalist in the Mallee. Vie- torian Nat, 18: 8-14. Glover, C. J, M. and Sim, T. C. (1978). Studies on Central Australian Fishes: A progress report. South Aust. Nat. 52: 35-44, Hobson, H. R, (1963). Birds at Wyperfeld, Vie- torian Nat. 79: 295, 357, Jacobs, V. (1968). Wyperfeld revisited (September 1967). Victorian Nat. 85: 280-289. Lake, J, S. (1967), Freshwater fish of the Murray- Darling River system: the native and introduced fish species. N.S. W. Srate Fish. Res. Bull. 7: 1-48. Lake, J. S. (1971). Freshwater Fishes and Rivers of Australia (Nelson Press, Melbourne). Tunbridge, B. T. and Rogan, P. L. (1976). A Guide to the Inland Angling Waters of Victoria (Govt, Printer, Melbourne), Whitley, G. P. (1951). Introduced fishes. Parts I and Il. Aust, Mus. Mag. 10: 198-200; 234-268. —_—_—_———— Have you any of these copies of the Victorian Naturalist that you do not need to retain and can offer them back to the Club, they are needed for future demands for complete volumes of the Victorian Naturalist, Vol 90 No.1 Vol. 94 No.2 & No.4 Vol. 95 No.1] & No.2. Please post to Sales Officer Mr. D. E. McInnes. AUSTRALIAN NATURAL HISTORY MEDALLION FUND Amount on hand invested October 1978 ..................... $789.00 Nuke Me BJ LOcktis7y yore h ee. Total 34 3.00 Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 On Hares and the Raising of a Leveret BY SIMON TOWNSEND* The Hare Lepus europaeus was thriv- ing in Victoria by 1862 (Rolls 1969:250) after-a number of attempts at acclimatization. Today most areas of Suitable habitat, that is extensive pastures, croplands and open country generally have populations of varying densities. Seebeck (1977:169) states that the Hare frequents the outer suburbs of Melbourne. | have per- sonally noted it in larger less disturbed grassed areas and in and around Melbourne and many country centres as well, apart from the more agri- cultural areas with which one associates this species. The effect of the introduction of the Hare on the Australian environment has possibly been underemphasized. This is likely due to the spectacular spread of the Rabbit Oryctolagus cuniculus only a very short time after the Hare was successfully acclimatized, While Troughton (1967:263) went so far as to say the Hare was of “‘little zoological importance in Australia’’, Frith (1973:150) considered the Hare to be generally detrimental to agri- cultural interests. It is interesting to note a sentiment of tolerance evinced by Rolls (1969:299) which I have encountered in local peoples from Inglewood in north central Victoria to Heyfield in Gippsland. The Hare is of definite value to sports- men who shoot them where and when possible, hence submissions by the Vic- torian Field and Game Association to have the species declared legal game rather than vermin and so instituting a degree of protection few exotic animals in this state possess. (C. R. Townsend, *13 Parkstone Ave., Pascoe Vale Sth. 18 October 1978. January/February pers. com.) However agriculturalists and others suffering from competition with the Hare are not likely to countenance such a move and shooting and poisoning incorporated in general vermin control are likely to continue. Naturalists who are not native mammal purists and enjoy watching wildlife whatever its origins enjoy Hares wherever they occur (Rolls 1969:276). However, there is a general dearth of information in the popular literature on Hares, their habits and life histories in Australia. Therefore the unexpected acquisition of a leveret aged, | estimated, between 3-5 days, left me in a quandary as to how to raise it. On 12 March 1978 | was present on Phillip Island, Victoria, to watch the last motor race to be held on the historic Racing Track there, At the beginning of the first event of the day, opposite the starting point where I had stationed myself, what appeared to be a rat broke cover as the vintage cars racing that day roared to life past its “form” in rank trackside grass. Numerous clumsy spec- tators attempted to grab the little bundle of fur so I stepped in and claimed it for myself for closer inspection. The num- ber of people present made it impossible to release the young male leveret as it proved to be, near the place where its mother had left it, so 1 determined to keep it. Despite some limited previous zookeeping experience I had not raised infant mammals before, so a suitable milk formula had to be devised, Rather unoriginally I tried a mixture of 50-50 evaporated milk with a multivitamin supplement added, (this is similar to Formula 2, minus egg yolk, in Wheeler 1976:17). Fed with a small syringe about every 5-6 hours it took, after a little prelimin- 35 ary dribbling, about 2 cc. at a sitting. 1 based the feeding time table on vague references to the young of Hares being ‘oveusionally’’ visited by the doe (Luneborg 1971:142, Harrison Mathews 1968:145, Stephen 1971:53) and when the leveret would condescend to eal. Having housed it in a wicker basket with a hinged lid and suitable soft interior | did not consider any artificial heating necessury or desirable since in the natural state the leveret is purported to be alone entirely, save for feeding. Therefore any heating other than its own might not have been to tts advantage. No urine or faeces were passed till the evening of 14 March, two days after cap- ture. The former was dark and almost viscous, the latter like a series of tiny dried “currants” about 2 mm across. By 16 March the leveret was defaecat- ing and urinating regularly, and continu- ing to feed to the same time table. The milk intake was increased by 50% to about 3-4 cc. 4 times daily. It cleaned its face and front paws after feeding in the manner of a domestic cat at this stage, and scratched enthusiastically at the hand feeding should it move when it was eating. After a meal it would proceed to investigate its surroundings very thoroughly. I noted urine was passed immediatley after feeding whilst faeces appeared about every 20-30 minutes, Vegetation in the form of apple peel and fresh green grass were included in the diet from the first, but only from 25 March did the leveret take any great interest in vegetable food. By the 4 April at an estimated 28 days of age the leveret when banished to a permanent outdoor existence was urinaling only over specific conspicuous objects such as a pen on the floor or over the edge of a table. I felt this suggested that urine at even such an early stage could play a part in providing for a sort of territory, at least recognizable to other Hares. The faeces were the size, and also the consistency, of half a dried pea. It 36 showed little interest in milk offered after some initial excitement at its appearance, and ate only vegetable mat- ter. Commercial rabbit pellets were refused, while certain plants were eaten for preference, in particular Dandelion Taraxacum officinale, sprouting Black Nightshade Solanum nigrum and Milk Thistle Silphum marianum (Parsons 1973:46, 84, 251). A suburban garden in Melbourne does not of course, offer a great variety of ‘‘wild’’ plant food so any bias dis- played above probably does not reflect substantially on the Hares food preferences in the wild. Subsisting primarily on lawn grasses and with the advent of increasingly wet weather in May and June the Hare became more wild as it grew, avoiding interaction with people and becoming entirely nocturnal. Refection, the ingestion of faecal pellets as part of the standard Lagamorph digestion, was regularly observed to take place in the half light of early morning or dusk. This usually occurred at the same spot, an area of bare concrete beneath an old chair, where an uninterrupted view of the surrounds might be had. It was interesting to note the pellet taken directly from the anus to the mouth and that a certain amount of licking of that area seemed to occur before and after the act. At the time of writing however in October 1978, the increasing photo- period with the lengthening days has resulted in a ‘‘March Hare’’, The characteristic ‘“‘*mad”’ running, jump- ing, and general lack of shyness which Hares adopt in the spring is legend, and my eight months old Hare is no excep- tion, engaging in lengthy circular runs over the same 30-40 metres of beaten Hare trail possibly 7 or 8 times before breaking into a mad gallop and chasing birds out of the yard or even running at a dog or cat or person who enters the garden while it is doing so. This is often Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 in the middle and not necessarily in the early or later part of the day. | find it hard to determine the survival value of such a Strategy yet it must be assumed that if the maxim ‘‘form serves func- lion in nature”’ is to be accepted then it does have a positive contribution to the survival of the Hare as a species. Dur- ing this period | suspect predation, by large raptores particularly, in wild adult hares, would increase manifold. REPERENCES CITED Prith, H. J., (1973). Wildlife Conservation Harrison, Mathews L. (1968). British Mammals Lyneborg, L. (1971), Mammals in Colour Parsons, W. T., (1973). Noxious Weeds of Vie- torial Rolls, E, C,, (1969), They All Ran Wild, Seebeck, J. H., (1977). Mammals in. the Melbourne Metropolitan Area, Victorian Naturalist, 94:165-171, Stephen, D., (1971), Watching Wildlife Troughton, E., (1977). Furred Animals of Australia Wheeler, J,, (1976), The Care of Sick, Injured and Orphaned Native Birds and Animals COMBINED WEEKEND 10—12 MARCH, 1979 The FNCV are hosts to the country clubs at the Combined Weekend of the Victorian Field Naturalist Club Association to be held on Labour Day Weekend, Saturday, 10 March to Monday, 12 March. This Associa- tion was formed several years ago to enable all Victorian Clubs to meet together and communicate on matters of mutual interest, Previous gatherings have been held in coun- try centres and proved most satisfactory and sumulating. This is a busy time of the year in Melbourne but we hope as many members as possible will assist in making the weekend ad great success. Details of the programme are in the FNCV Diary of Coming Events in this issue. Many of the country members will be camping at Crystal Brook Caravan Park in Warrandyte Road, if anyone wishes to camp with them. Alfred Baker— Honorary Member General Meeting, 13 December, 1978 At the meeting of the club held in Sep- tember 1938, Mr. Alfred Baker was elected a member. His interest was Geology. Mr. Baker eventually decided to form a group to be known as the Geological Discussion Group to meet once a month. He put a notice in the Naturalist for April 1946 stat- ing the aims of the Group which were to include study of all forms of rocks and their structure, weathering, fossils and geological maps, combined with field work. He will always be remembered as the orig- inator of the discussion groups of the club, where members formed many lasting January/February friendships. Mr, Baker was criticised at the lime us it was fell his operations could frag- ment the club, but this did not prove to be the case. He was Secretary of the Geology group ull 1960. About this time Mr, Baker accepted a position at the Geology School, University of Melbourne where he remuined until his retirement. After service on the council he took office as President of the Club 1953-54. Contributions to the Naturalist were not many, bul on uspects of geology were carefully chosen and researched. During later years Mr, Baker was not active in club matters. Roy Dodds. Report From Western Victoria FNCA A. C. Beauglehole Publishing Fund: Neil Macfarlane (Mid-Murray) reported that the Trustees had made $1000 available to assist with publication of the first of the reports (on the Mallee Study Area), Utah had donated $450 towards the cost of print- ing maps. La Trobe University Press was to carry out the printing and the Minisiry of Conservation was assisting with the printing of the multi-colored maps. Cost of printing 500 copies would be about $850. The price was likely lo be ubout $4 posted. Mr, Cliff Beauglehole thanked members and donors for their support. He said he could not go ahead with publication until the LCC Mallee Study recommendations were passed by Parliament, hopefully later this year. 37 Feeding Behaviour in the Pearson Island Rock Wallaby BY P, E. HORNSBY* Introduction During field studies of the yellow footed rock wallaby, xanthapus, it Was apparent that, although the animals appeared to have a home range, they did not seem to spend comparable amounts of time each day in feeding. Since these obser- vations were made during the hottest months of the year, there was a possibility that, during periods of really hot weather, there was a marked reduc- ion in body metabolism, including feeding activity, Ealey (1967) sug- gested that the euro, Macropus robustus, makes increasing use of “shade provided by rocky outcrops, us the summer becomes hotter and drier”. He goes on to show how much more equable are the resting rock ledges and caves used by euros. P. xanthopus lives in a hot dry region where water is particularly scarce, and so similar quiescent behaviour. at extreme times would clearly be advan- lageous, Ultimately it was decided that an investigation of such feeding behaviour would be easier using a small colony of four Pearson Island rock wallabies, P. penicillata pearsoni, that Was more readily available. They were housed in the open, in an enclosure that had been previously grazed out, Hence they were unable to forage for natural vegetation, and were therefore totally dependent upon food supplied to them. They were fed daily with standard amounts of food, includ- ing bread and peanut butter, bush biscuits, fresh carrots, flaked oats and lucerne pellets, plus lucerne straw. On the whole, the wallabies are crepuscu- lar or nocturnal feeders, so new sup- Department of Psychology University of Adelaide 38 Petrogale plies were given, and records liken, during the late afternoon and early eve- ning. Figure | shows a female P. p. pearsoni at the food site. In addition to the records of daily food consumption, note was also taken of the rainfall, and the maximum and minimum temperatures. Records were made Over two periods Ist September to the 10th October—the ‘‘spring”’ period, and 2nd-24th January as the “summer” period. The animals were weighed at the termination of the experiment and the weights were:— 7.71 ke (male); 5.78 kg (female); 4.65 kg (female); 4.54 kg (female). Results The results are shown pictorially in Figures 2 and 3, Figure 2 shows the relationship between total consump- tion and the previous day’s maximum temperature, and Figure 3 shows the relationship with the same day’s minimum temperature; these being the two intervals appropriate to the animals’ nighttime activities. Two features emerge from these results, Firstly, during the spring, there is no correlation between the amount of food consumed and either of the two temperature criteria. Similarly, during the summer, there is no relationship between the amount of food consumed and the same day’s minimum tem- perature, whereas there is a significant negative correlation between the amount of food consumed and the pre- vious day’s maximum temperature. Thus in the last instance, the hotter the weather during the daytime, the less the wallabies consume that night. The relationship between the umount consumed and rainfall was also examined, both during the spring, and during the summer, During the spring Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 FIG.2. TOTAL CONSUMPTION AND THE PREVIOUS DAYS MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE 40 SPRING 40) SUMMER e e 35 e e 35 ee e e e ry an Pik) e Lae e * e N e e e e © 30 e ae 8 ° 30 ® e e” e = Cig e e (e) i 25 © f a e e ee : s ° =| g a ee ® QO 90 20 ce ts) rk 16 15 e es r-0. 009 (N.S) rt 0.520 (Sig at ) o/-— , , ; ! o-/¥/-— 0 15 20 25 380 35 0 20 5 10 j 10 TEMPERATURE (eg) FIG. 3. TOTAL CONSUMPTION AND THE SAME DAY'S MINIMUM TEMPERAT URE 407 SPRING 40) SUMMER e ° 35 e ee. 35 e e AP ® Bile e $e ad , : e ny 30 Pg) ae if 30 J eee Ne 3 z ° i be e S 25 ° 25 A e a 6 bd , e 5 ee e 6 20 20 | * oO e | 15 a ° a r-0016 (NS) [ 4-0 267 (NS) || eee a! n eee! of eel 255! , : ; %% 5 10 15 20 i) ha 10 15 20 25 10 TEMPERATURE ('¢) January/February 39 Fig. |, Wallaby feeding no relationships were found, During the summer, a significant amount of rain (>.25 mm) occurred only once, when a fall of 4.1 mm was recorded, The results indicated that the amount of food consumed for that day was significantly higher than for the dry days (Z = 9.94; p<0.01%). However, since this consumption occurred following a day when a low maximum temperature had been recorded, the consumption would therefore be expected to be high. Hence, this rela- tionship between rainfall and = con- sumption could well be spurious. The other feature concerns the average consumption at the different times of the year. Here, the mean over- all spring consumption, 873.4 g., is significantly greater than the mean overall summer consumption, 704.4 g. Discussion In the first place, the spring results show no significant relationships be- tween feeding activity (measured by daily overall consumption) and the daily minimum temperature, the pre- vious day’s maximum temperature, or rainfall. It would seem then that feed- 40 ing activity is quite independent of these considerations during the springume. On the other hand, the significant negative correlations, between overall consumption and the previous day’s maximum shows that the wallabies’ subsequent nocturnal behaviour is systematically affected by the day’s maximum temperature. Furthermere, the absence of a significant correlation with the contiguous nocturnal minimum temperature indicates that the earlier effect is ongoing, and is more important as a behavioural deter- minant, The final comparison, between over- all consumption during the spring and summer, indicates that the wallabies show another negative relationship, eating less, on average, in the hotter summer weather than in the com- paratively cooler spring. Acknowledgements I would like to thank Dr. M. E., Christian for permitting data to be recorded on wallabies in her care. | am indebted to Miss Bree for daily check- ing the temperature readings, and both Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Miss Bree and Miss Brownlee were of great assistance im the preparation of the daily food requirements, Field Naturalists Reports of PNG General Meeting Monday, 11 December, 1978. Speaker for the evening was Dr. John Nelson of the Zoology Depart- ment, Monash University. Dr, Nelson spoke of several aspects of his work with various Australian animals, Perhaps his most fascinating accounts and photos were about Queensland's flying foxes, They are the largest of the bats with a wing-span to five feet, Dr, Nelson showed a peaceful airephoto of a forest inhabited by flying foxes and the result of a gun-shot—hundreds, thousands of the strange mammals in the air, Normally they take to the air only at sunset to go out feeding. As well as for flight, the wings can be used when resting for protection from rain or to retain body warmth as the slides illustrated, And we saw the creatures “walking”? on the ground, swimming, climbing tree trunks, proclaiming their territories (one frond of a palm per family), nursing the young, and mak- ing fight gestures. We became used to looking at the animals up-side-down! Exhibits. Some lively specimens ol Euglena were under a microscope, These single-celled, cigar-shaped organisms are fairly abundant in ponds and swim by a lashing movement of the single flagellum. But they contain chloroplasts, characteristic of green plants, so there’s a constant debate= are they plants or animals? Among the active swimmers were some immobile round discs—a resting or developing stage, January/February REPEL RENCES Laley, bo Ul M, (1967) Eeolopy of the eure, Vacropus robustus (Gould), in northwestern Nustrali. The environment and changes i eure and sheep populations CSIRO Wild, Res, 12.9 4 Club of Victoria 'Y Activities Other exhibits included a preserved key-hole limpet complete with animal, silk-worm cocoons and some parden- grown native plants Insect larvae in grass-trees. A mem ber reported masses of maggot-like lat vae at the leat-base of Namrhorrhoea species and they seemed to be feeding on the inner fibre of the trunk, Another member said that grass-trees are a haven for the young of many insects and lor spiders with their webs The leaves are rarely chewed Library. From (his meeting onwards, library users are asked to record thei borrowings in the large book instead of the paper slips, Combined weekend. This year, the FNCV will be host to the annual gathering of Vietorian Field Naturalist Clubs over the Lubour Duy Weekend, Saturdays«Monday, 10-12 Mareh, This is also Moomba weekend and our General Meeting ts usually transferred from Monday to Wednesday, But this year our March General Meeting will be part of this combined FNC weekend und will be held on Saturday, lO Mareh at the Uniting Church Hall, The Avenue, Blackburn, Dr, Willis will be the speaker See page 2 for details of excursions, etc, during this weekend Honorary Membership to Mr, Colin F. Lewis was awarded this evening, During the early part of his 40 years membership, Mr, Lewis became interested in orchids and the cultiva ion of native plants, and when he 44 moved to Dandenong in 1946 he was able to attend FNCV meetings. He soon became a Council Member, was secretary to the Natural History Medal- lion Committee for some years and was FNCV President in 1950. Mr. Lewis now enjoys retirement at Rosebud. Extraordinary General Meeting Monday, 8th. January, 1979 It was moved by Mr. Gillespie and seconded by Mr. Curliss that “The Black Rock Field Naturalists be elected an affiliated society to the FNCV”’ This motion was car- ried by acclamation. General Meeting Monday, 8 January, 1979. The President, Dr. Brian Smith, welcomed the 47 members and visitors. A particular welcome was made to Ms. Sharon Harwell of Canada. The evening was a Members Night and the following people gave talks, illustrated by colour slides:- Mr. Alan Morrison spoke on Bark Patterns of Australian trees. Mr. Dick Morrison showed a large series of slides of various Fungi from the FNCV Kinglake Property. Mr. Bill Archer gave a well illustrated talk on some of the Flora and Fauna of Quail Island, Westernport Bay. Miss Wendy Clarke gave a general talk on Victorian Mammals and some activities of the Mammal Survey Group. Dr. Brian Smith showed slides on Culture of Artificial Pearls and on Culture Techniques of Edible 42 Oysters. Special thanks were expressed to Mrs. Margaret Corrick for organis- ing and introducing the speakers. Exhibits included a specimen of the Swamp Antechinus, Antechinus minimus, and a specimen of red coral from Whitsunday Passage. Nature Notes: Mr. Peter Kelly spoke briefly on a recent trip to Mt. Cobbler and Mt. Speculation where a number of dingoes were heard and a Greater Glider seen. New Editor. Next issue will be produced under the aegis of Mr. Rob Wallace. Mr. Wallace is a senior lecturer in Environ- mental Studies at the State College Rusden. We hope he will have satisfac- tion in this “‘spare time’’ undertaking. We are very grateful to our retiring editor Mr. Reuben Kent who has guided this journal through two years of continuing growth. Editor ‘‘The Vic- torian Naturalist’ is a very demanding job and leaves little time for the other activities that are sought by such an active naturalist. Thank you Reuben Kent, Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 (Continued from page 2) Will members going on the Saturday and Monday private car excursions let the Excursion See., Miss Allender, know if they have a spare seat and would be willing to take a member without transport. Note: These meetings and excursions will replace the General Meeting of the Club for March at the National Herbarium and also the monthly excursion for March. Easter. 13-17 April. Members are invited to join the camp out organised by the Hawthorn Junior FNC on the shores of Lake Meran near Kerang. These camps are normally attended by a number of adults as well as juniors and this should be an interesting area, Full details are not available at the time of printing but can be obtained later from the President of the Hawthorn Juniors, Ms Roslyn St. Clair (Tel: 509 2621 home) or FNCV Excursion Sec. Miss Allender (527 2749 home). , GROUP MEETINGS All FNCV members are invited to attend any Group Meeting; no extra payment, Atthe National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra at 8.00 p.m, First Wednesday in the Month—Geology Group Wednesday, 7 February. “Holiday reminiscences.” Wednesday, 7 March. ‘Historical and technical aspects of jade.” Third Wednesday in the Month— Microscopy Group Wednesday, 21 February. ‘‘An Introduction to the Microscope.” Note: [t is proposed that an exhibition will be mounted of historical microscopes at the Reu- nion of Field Naturalists Clubs of Victoria on March 10-11. Second Thursday in the Month—Botany Group Thursday, 8 February. ‘Topics on the History of Australian Botany.” Mrs, Ducker. Thursday, 8 March, “*Red Wilderness: talk on the North-West corner of Victoria.” Mark Gotch. Thursday, 12 April. Short talks by members. At the Conference Room, The Museum, Melbourne at 8.00 p.m. Good parking area—enter from Latrobe Street. First Monday in the Month—Marine Biology and Entomology Group Monday, 5 February. **Members Holiday Observations.” Monday, 5 March. “Octopus, Squid and Cuttlefish: Fact & fiction” by Dr. Brian Smith, Monday, 2 April. ‘“‘Water Beetles’ by Mr. Paul Genery. At the Arthur Rylah Institute, Brown St., Heidelberg at 8.00 p.m. First Thursday in the Month—Mammal Survey Group _ Thursday, 1 March. Annual General Meeting. Thursday, 5 April. GROUP EXCURSIONS All FNCV members are invited to attend Group Excursions Botany Group Saturday, 24 March. Thomson River, via Noojee, to find native fruit. Saturday, 5 May. Please note change of date. Fungi, Mt. Cannibal via North Garfield, with the Native Plants Preservation Society. Day Group—Third Thursday in the month ; : Thursday, 15 March. Polly Woodside Maritime Museum. Meet at S.W. side of Spencer St. Bridge at 11.30, There will be a charge of 60c. to the Museum. Afternoon tea Is available on board. Thursday, 19 April. Train outing to Diamond Creek, Train leaves Princes Bridge at 10.50, Arr. Diamond Creek at 11.51. Thursday, 17 May. Hedgley Deane Gardens. Geology Group ; Excursions of the Geology Group will be announced at Group Meeting. Mammal Survey Group February 17—18. Upper Rubicon—Whisbey Creek. March 10—12, Cape Schanck. April. Easter 13—16. to be decided. January/February 43 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Established 1880 OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists Patron: His Excellency the Honorable Sir HENRY WINNEKE, K.C.M.G., O.B_E.. Q.C Key Office-Bearers 1977-1978 President: Dr. BRIAN SMITH, 8 Hunsford Avenue, North Clayton, 3168 (S60 8358) Secretary: Miss WENDY CLARK, 27 Rangeview Grove, North Balwyn, 3104 (859 8091) Correspondence to: FNCV, Nationa! Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004. Treasurer: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Subscription-Secretary: Mr. F. J. KOTH, 21 Smart Street, Hawthorn, 3122. Editor: Mr. R. WALLACE, c/- State College of Victoria—Rusden, Blackburn Road, North Clayton, 3168, 544 8544, Librarian: Mr. J. MARTINDALE, c/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004 Excursion Secretary: Miss M. ALLENDER, 19 Hawthorn Avenue, Caulfield, 3161 (527 2749) Book Sales Officer: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Archives Officer: Mr. B,. CALLANAN, 29 Reynards Street, Coburg, 3058 (36 0587) Group Secretaries Botany: Mr. CAMERON McCONCHIE, 158 Warrandyte Road, Ringwood, 3134 (870 9986) Day Group: Miss D. M. BELL, 17 Tower Street, Mont Albert, 3127 (89 2850) Geology: Mr. T. SAULT, c/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004 Mammal Survey: Mr. MICHAEL HOWES, 10 Palmer Street, Fitzroy, 3065 Microscopical: Mr. M. H. MEYER, 36 Milroy Street, East Brighton (96 3268) Entomology and Marine Biology: c/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004 FNCV Kinglake Nature Reserve: McMahons Road, Kinglake. Bookings and keys: Mr, DICK MORRISON, 788 Elgar Road, Doncaster (848 9148) MEMBERSHIP Membership of the F.N.C.V. is open to any person interested in natural history. The Victorian Naturalistis distributed free to all members, the club’s reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. Subscription rates for 1979 Metropolitan z Are th sis rs Ervetsay Pr eeaneda ‘ ' $12.00 Joint Metropolitan al 16a 0. | as peaks eee b 4 $14.50 Country Members and Retired Persons. -..........-.0... 2.00. 0005 : ; $10.00 Joint Country and Joint Retired i aa . ts L J H ou : $12.00 Junior ‘tert Pete der ee eT eee he Side ocnsieibeles Abe ion $2.50 Subscription to Victorian Naturalist... Truro salveaeewls (ees: Ae : i bank $10,00 Overseas Subscription to Victorian Naturalist - : % : pons re $12,00 Individual Journals Sete hads it ease 541 ORs 1 : $1.75 All subscnptions should be made payabie to the Field Naturalist Club of Victoria and posted to the Subscription Secretary, @) JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY. LTD., WEST MELBOURNE FNCV DIARY OF COMING EVENTS GENERAL MEETINGS ; At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra Monday, 9 April, 8.00 p.m. Special Study Meeting on Sherbrooke Forest. Speakers from the Geology, Mammal Survey and Botany Groups. Members are encouraged to bring along relevant exhibits, Monday, 14 May, 8.00 p.m. Annual General Meeting Election of Office-Bearers. Presidential Address: Dr. Brian J. Smith Subject: Australian Land Snails. Monday, 11 June, 8.00 p.m, Special study meeting on Estuarine Flora and Fauna. Speakers from Geology, Botany, Marine Biology groups and a talk on birds. New Members— March General Meeting Ordinary: Miss A. Ledin, 3/13 Tyndall St., Surrey Hills. Mr. Stephen Charman, 17 Illawarra Cres., Nth. Bayswater 3153. Fauna & flora. Mr. David Scotts, 2 Brine St., Mt. Waverley 3149. Mr. Herman Reeders, 27 Mavho St., Bentleigh 3204. Birds, reptiles, plants. Mrs. Patricia Edwards, 4 Goble St., Laverton 3028. Mr, Christopher Uhl, | Gwenda Ave., Blackburn. Mr. Ralph Koch, 6 Calvin Cres., Doncaster East 3109, Mr. Robert Howard, 407 Canning St., Carlton 3054. Miss Pamela Gawith, 105 Malvern Rd., Toorak Geology. Mr. & Mrs. E. Southcombe, 4 Peary St., Belmont 3216. Mrs. Win Crosby, 419 Auburn Rd., Hawthorn 3122. General interest. Mrs. Marjorie Wilson, 4 Chatham Rd., Canterbury. General interest. Ms. Fiona Ferwerda, 10 Monomeith Ave., Canterbury 3126. Country: Mr. Peter Thomas, 63 Shortland St,, Wentworth Falls, N.S.W. 2782. Joint: Mrs. J. O’Brien & Mr. T. O'Brien, 4 Mary Ave., Highett 3190. Mr. R. Palmer, ‘‘Kyeamba Dowis’’?, RBM 532B, Wagga Wagga, NSW 2650. FENCV EXCURSIONS 27—29 April. The W.V.F.N.C.A. are having a campout this weekend at Halls Gap and members of the FNCV are invited to join in. There will be an excursion Saturday morning Starting from Halls Gap Hall at 9.30 a.m., an afternoon excursion to Delleys Dell leaving the hall at 1.30 p.m. Saturday evening there is a meeting at the hall at 7.30 p.m. Which will include Launching a Book. Bring your own cup for supper. Sunday, 9.30 a.m., leave via Serra Road for paintings in the Victoria Range finishing with farewells after lunch. Any members accepting this invitation are responsible for making their Own arrangements for transport and accommodation. Saturday, 5 May. Mt. Cannibal. On this occasion the Club is joining the excursion arranged by the Native Plants Preservation Society with Dr. J. H. Willis in attendance. As this is a Saturday, the coach will leave from Batman Ave. at 9 a.m. Bring a picnic meal and a snack. Fare: $5, Sunday, 3 June. Geology and river terraces of the Maribyrnong River Valley. Leader: Mr. D. McInnes. Leave from Batman Ave. 9.30 a.m. Fare: $5. This is the first Sunday in the month and it is proposed to hold excursions on the first Sunday instead on the third Sunday for a trial period. Monday, 27 August—Thursday, 6 September. Broken Hill, At time of writing, this trip is still in the planning stage but the party will probably stay one night at Mildura on the way up and spend two nights en route on the return journey. The Barrier Field Naturalist Club are working out an itinerary for the week at Broken Hill which should include Mootwingee and Kinchega National Park. Cost for this excursion is expected to be $300 at this stage. Bookings should be made with the excursion secretary accom- panied by $30 deposit. (Continued on page 79) 46 Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 The Victorian Naturalist Volume 96, Number 2 March/April, 1979 Editor: Robert L. Wallis Editorial Committee: Susan Beattie, Margaret Corrick, Reuben Kent, Alison Oates, Brian Smith Distribution and Conservation of the Australian Fur Seal in Tasmania La eee Act Ny nels Maran MPa RE rie Fly. Veta aa ih rravilicade ete rirer oe 48 |aRo fod eM RACRN Se GAB A ere ee at Rc ONE ne Rae ae 53 Further Data on Activity Patterns of Small Mammals sac OWN Nd nical sjalgcyate hl Soa BREIL CY ON Sen When fice ane areas era ever 54 The Family Gnathiidae (Crustacea Isopoda). A New Victorian Species by Wallace F. Seed ...............5. 56 Notes on Gold Coast Butterflies ints be INGA SUNT aoe 6a Me Bsr Poker mye cett eet hoe et erate areca 62 The Origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora HUAI OSE AMAT oiten semen a eMule Sie braree, eT tare Tar tad ver tse day 63 Aquatic Plants: New Victorian Records Prva Bieler ASU eta ner scmiey Riser ayichia Outtake wey echt 67 PING VY —IREDOTES Ol ACUVINIES nis tre Crt saris ho eel itans-we a tenet 4 al FNCVA—Report of the annual gathering.................+0005 72 CON AFIT ATIC AIO POMMLOL UOT S ia secter ech tot tree at creer yes see tie 74 Cover illustration: Reid Rocks Nature Reserve. Photo: R. Warneke. Distribution and Conservation of the Australian Fur Seal in Tasmania BY R. J. PEARSE* Introduction The Australian fur seal, Arctoce- Phalus pusillus doriferus inhabits the coast and waters of south-eastern Australia. Its range extends from Seal Rocks (32°28'S, 152°33'E) off the north coast of New South Wales, through Bass Strait and around the Tasmanian coastline. The southernmost extent of its distribution on land is Pedra Branca (43°52'S, 146°58'E), about 25 kilometres south of the Tasmanian mainland. The species is a colonial breeder, on rocky offshore islands. Two other species of seal are occa- sionally recorded from Tasmanian waters, These are the leopard seal, Hydrurga leptonyx, a regularly occurring vagrant from the Antarctic region dur- ing spring, and the elephant seal, Mirounga leonina, an occasional vagrant from the subantarctic region. Macquarie Island (54°30'S, 158°S5'E) is also part of Tasmania but because its fauna is associated with the subantarctic region, it will not be included in this report. Under Tasmanian legislation prior to 1975, seals came under the provisions of a series of Fisheries Acts, beginning with The Fisheries Act, 1889. This leg- islation provided for the operation of a commercial sealing industry by making provisions for sealing grounds to be defined, and licences to be issued for the taking of seals. However, as far as | have been able to establish no special sealing grounds were ever proclaimed, In 1975, the Wildlife Regulations under the National Parks and Wildlife Act 1970 were amended to include all kinds of seals on the schedule of wholly * National Parks and Wildlife Service, Tasmania, 48 protected wildlife. The effect of this action was to transfer the responsibility for the management of seals from the Sea Fisheries Branch of the Depart- ment of Agriculture to the National Parks and Wildlife Service, When the Service assumed respon- sibility for seals, there was very little current information available on the status of the Australian fur seal in Tasmania. Therefore, as a first step towards conserving the species, a survey of the State’s offshore islands and rocks was carried out to determine its distribution and abundance. Survey Methods The survey was conducted in two parts. Firstly, lighthouse keepers, fishermen and other persons likely to be able to provide information were contacted. On the basis of this informa- tion an aerial survey was planned to cover most of the islands and rocks adjacent to the Tasmanian coastline and Bass Strait. As the Tasmanian- Victorian state border runs along lati- tude 39°12'S, approximately seven kilometres south of Wilsons Promon- tory, most of the rocks and islands in Bass Strait are part of Tasmania. The survey was carried out on the 7th April, 1975 in southern Tasmania and on the 12th and 13th April, 1975 in Bass Strait. Flights were made in two light aircraft, a Britten Norman Islander and a Cessna 172. When a potential site was located, the aircraft was flown at low speed and altitude across the site while observers looked for seals. The actual altitude varied according to wind speed, direction and ground relief. If seals were observed, an estimate of numbers was made and photographs Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 DISTRIBUTION OF AUSTRALIAN F SITES IN BaIOHNN ia aS, BP ca = }witsons : PROMONTORY < “T NORTH EAST ISLET WEST MONCOEUR tHogarisGeg sn} Bass ISLAND WRIGHT Asis & 4g ROCK JUDGMENT x ) ROCKS KiNG : 1SLAND BASS PYRAMID ; TENTH ISLAND aA ILE PHOQUES {| EAST =)\ A Yi MIDS AD Ata PYRAMIDS: pe oy CAPE PILLAR @ MEWSTONE MONUMENT s PEDRA BRANCA MAATSUYKER & ISLAND GROUP Fig. 1. Distribution of Australian Fur Seal sites in Tasmanian waters. taken so that a more accurate count could be obtained later. Unfortunately, on the day flying was carried out in southern Tasmania, a strong wind was blowing and it was not possible to fly low across some sites. Consequently, some rocks and islands could not be satisfactorily checked. For these sites, recent counts by observers in boats are given. The survey covered all except two sections of Tasmanian coastal waters— King Island and the west coast between Cape Grim and Port Davey. These areas were not surveyed because there were no reports of seal colonies from them. It is considered that the survey located all the important breeding sites as well as most of the other sites used by seals in Tasmania. Plate 1. West Moncoeur Nature Reserve, Photo: N.P.W.S. March/April 49 Plate 2. Judgment Rocks Nature Reserve. Photo: R. Warneke. Plate 3. Moriarty Rocks Nature Reserve. Photo: R. Warneke. 50 Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Results Australian fur seals were found at the sites listed below. Each area is described and the approximate number of seals observed is given. The impor- tant breeding sites are indicated. BASS STRAIT North-East Islet, 39°12'S, 147°01'E Small granite rock, 20 metres high with rock platforms. 40 seals. West Moncoeur Island 39°14'S, 146°30'E Long, narrow, granite rock, 97 metres high consisting of two islets, each with rock platforms and outlying rocks. 500 seals. An important breed- ing site, Judgment Rocks 39°30'S, 147°08’E Large sloping granite rock 32 metres high capped by a small plateau. 1500 seals. An important breeding site. Wright Rock 39°36'S, 147°32'E Sloping rock platform topped by a conical shaped rock, 38 metres high, granite. 200 seals. Bass Pyramid 39°50'S, 147°14'E Steep sided granite rock 74 metres tall, sea caves and a small rock plat- form. 150 seals. Moriarty Rocks 40°35'S, 148°17'E Two low-lying, flat, sedimentary rocks, 7 metres tall, dissected by gut- ters and rock pools. 750 seals. An important breeding site. Tenth Island 40°57'S, 146°59'E Elongated sedimentary rock with a central ridge, 9 metres high. 600 seals. An important breeding site. Reid Rocks 40°15’S, 144°10’E A large basalt platform 12 metres high, deeply dissected and in places divided by narrow gutters. 1500 seals. An important breeding site. SOUTHERN TASMANIA Ile des Phoques 42°25'S, 148°10'E Small granite island 50 metres high, plateau covered with vegetation sur- rounded by cliffs with deep sea caves. 10-20 seals sighted in caves by Hogan Group March/April observer in boat. Hippolyte Rocks 43°08'S, 148°02’E Granite rock 28 metres tall with small platform. 15-20 seals sighted by observer in boat. The Monument, Cape Hauy 43°09'S, 148°00'E Small dolorite rock. 5 seals sighted by observer in boat. Cape Pillar 43°14'S, 148°00'E Rock platform at base of 277 metre high dolorite cliff. 10-20 seals sighted by observer in boat. Cape Raoul 43°15'S, 147°48'E Rock platform at base of 180 metre high dolorite cliff, 10-20 seals sighted by observer in boat. Little Betsey Island 43°04'S, 147°29'E Small rock. 5 seals sighted by observer in boat. Pedra Branca 43°52'S, 146°58'E Quartzite rock 52 metres high with steep sides, surrounded by extensive rock platforms. 100 seals. Mewstone 43°44'S, 146°22'E Large granite rock, 134 metres high with steep sides and small sloping ledge at sea level. 25 seals counted by observer in boat. Needle Rocks, Maatsuyker Group 43°39'S 146°22'E Four large and many small quartzite rocks, highest approximately 80 metres. Most seals occur on rock closest to Maatsuyker Island. Observer on Maatsuyker Island counted up to 900 seals in a series of counts in Janu- ary 1975. An important breeding site. Round Top Island, Flat Top Island, Maatsuyker Group 43°39'S, 146°22'E Two large quartzite rocks approxi- mately 100 metres high with sea caves and ledges. Observer in boat counted 150 seals on the two islands, in Decem- ber 1977. East Pyramids 43°25'S, 145°56'E Steep sided quartzite rock 60 metres high with extensive rock platform. Approximately 200 seals counted on platform by observer in boat. 51 Discussion The survey showed the Australian fur seal to be numerous in Tasmanian waters. Approximately 6500 seals were counted and six major breeding sites identified, West Moncoeur Island, Judgment Rocks, Moriarty Rocks, Tenth Island and Reid Rocks in Bass Strait and Needle Rocks in the South. The peak of the breeding season 1s in early December when maximum numbers of seals are found at the breeding sites. With the exception of the Needles, all breeding site counts were made outside the breeding season and numbers would have been well below the peak in each case (Warneke pers. comm.). Breeding may take place at other sites, for example there are uncon- firmed reports of pups being seen at Cape Pillar. In addition many other sites along the Tasmanian coastline, may be hauling grounds where seals rest between feeding trips. Protection of the Species Legislation alone does not protect a species unless either its intentions are faithfully observed by the community, or the government has the resources to rigidly enforce them. The latter is not possible because of the isolated loca- tions of the sites occupied by seals and the small numbers of wildlife officers available to police them. Protection however has the support of the com- munity. The only threat comes from the occasional fisherman who shoots seals which are interfering with his fishing or who shoots at seals lying on rocks. The former action is justified and is provided for by the National Parks and Wildlife Act whereby the Director may issue a permit to a fisherman to shoot seals which are directly interfering with his fishing operations, The latter is not and should be prevented. Detection and prosecu- tion of offenders is difficult, but not 52 impossible. To date three fishermen have been successfully prosecuted for shooting at seals at one site, as a result of information received from a lighthouse keeper. Protection of the Habitat Fur seals are colonial breeders and the key areas of habitat to protect are the breeding sites, As a result of the survey the following sites have been proclaimed nature reserves: North- East Islet, West Moncoeur Island, Judgment Rocks, Wright Rock, Bass Pyramid, Moriarty Rocks, Tenth Island, Reid Rocks, Ile des Phoques, Hippolyte. Pedra Branca, Mewstone, Flat Top and Round Top Islands, Needle Rocks, and East Pyramids, were all proclaimed reserves, as part of the Southwest National Park. Management The Australian fur seal population in Tasmania is large, has a wide distribu- tion and its breeding habitat is pro- tected. Apart from the occasional seal interfering with fishing operations, there is no conflict between man and seals. Therefore, there is no need for management at present. The species needs to be kept under surveillance so that any influences adversely affecting the future of the population can be detected and, if possible, countered. In the case of fur seals this is not an easy task, because of the isolated locations of most of the sites. However, as the number of National Parks and Wildlife Service field staff increases, and staff become better equipped, more frequent inspec- tions will be made. Acknowledgements Greg Middleton of the Tasmanian National Parks and Wildlife Service and Bob Warneke of the Victorian Fisheries and Wildlife Division also Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 took part in the aerial survey. Rob White was the pilot for most of the survey. Nigel Brothers provided in- formation on the seals at the Monu- ment, Cape Pillar, Cape Raoul, the Mewstone, Round Top and Flat Top Islands and the Needles, Alan Hewer on Little Betsey Island, Frank Morley on the East Pyramids and John Burgess on the Ile des Phoques, Bob Warneke and David Rounsevell criticised drafts of the manuscript. Editor’s note: Plate 4 is the cover photo in this issue, Book Review ‘*Botanists of the Eucalypts”’ By Norman Hall; vi + 160 pages. Price $7.50. C.S.I.R.O. The author has been intimately associated with eucalypts for many years in his work with the Australian Timber and Forestry Bureau. He has researched the histories of all people associated taxonomically with the genus Eucalyptus: collectors of type material, authors of descriptions, persons for whom a species has been named. The book contains short biographies of well over 300 people, some necessarily rather frag- mentary because to resolve all problems would have meant an indefinite delay of publication. The biographies are in alphabetical order, while an alphabetical list of the species allows easy cross-referencing. The biographical notes are very readable, and supported by references to the sources from which they were drawn. Attention has also been given to the spelling of names, not always easy because of several variants in the sources, and to the definite distinction between synonyms among the botanists. As to synonyms of the species, no distinction has been made between current and obsolete names. Despite the care in prepara- tion, there are printing errors not immedi- ately obvious, e.g. Huegel’s first Name Anselm is spelled Anselme; Schlechter’s Freidrich instead of Friedrich; under Wakefield, £. dixsonii is spelled dixsoni; and in the majority of cases the accent is missing in french names (Aime, Rene). The absence of E. cosmophylla F.v.M. was noticed, but no check on completeness was made for this review. It may be the only missing species. This is a scholarly work of great value to the historian, and a pleasant book to browse through and occasionally have recourse to for the not so specialised botanist. A. W. Thies Australian Natural History Medallion Fund Amount on hand invested November 1978 Donald History and Natural History Society Native Plants Preservation Society Total December 1978 $797.00 5.00 10.00 $812.00 An apology, these two donations were received early in the year but were not acknowledged in the Victorian Naturalist, WHY RAISE SUBSCRIPTIONS FOR 1979? The total cost of publishing Victorian Naturalist for 1978 was $11,788.00. The total amount of Subscriptions received for 1978 including Current, Arrears and Sup- porting was $9,515.00 The difference of $2273.00 is the answer to the Question. March/April The Treasurer FNCV 53 Further Data on Activity Patterns of Small Mammals By J. C. WARDEN AND R. L. WALLIS* Introduction In a recent paper Braithwaite (1977) presented data on numbers of daytime and nightime captures of several species of small mammals from various localities in Victoria. The aim of the study was to determine whether activity patterns of small mammals could be related to their diet. In Europe it appears that insectivorous and omnivorous mammals are mainly noc- turnal whilst the herbivores have a more even diel rhythm. Braithwaite found the herbivorous Rass lutreolus and Pseudomys shortridgei to be active both day and night whilst R. fuscipes was almost totally nocturnal. The insectivorous Antechinus stuartil, Isoodon obesulus and Mus musculus were often caught during the day, but more often at night. This paper presents further data on activity patterns of small mammals trapped at Powelltown and inciudes species for which Braithwaite had low capture rates, Materials and Methods Trapping was conducted at Sumner Spur, near Powelltown, 76 kilometres east of Melbourne—an area under the control of the Forest Commission of Victoria used mainly for Eucalyptus reg- nans regeneration. Elliot traps (10 x 10 x 33 cm) baited with peanut butter, rolled oats and honey were either set in trap lines running east-west along the contours of a very steep northfacing hill (Warden, 1977), alongside the airstrip in windrow vegetation (as in Brunner, Wallis and Voutier, 1977) or on a trapping grid (one trap per site, 64 * Department of Environmental Studies, Rusden State College, Cluyton. 3168 54 sites 10 metres apart from one another). The study area is described in Warden (1977) and Brunner et. al. (1977), Traps were checked and reset close to dusk and dawn. Trapping occurred from January 1977 through to August 1978, but was less frequent during winter due to difficulties of access. Results and Discussion Table 1 lists the nightime and daytime capture rates of the seven species. The 2880 ‘*evening”’ traps are reduced to an effective 529 to enable a Chi-squared comparison to be made. This test indicates a highly significant departure from an even diel rhythm exists for R. fuscipes (P<0.01) whilst a significant difference exists for M. musculus (P<0.05). Chi-squared for the Antechinus spp. are not significant whilst there are inadequate data for the other three species. The nocturnal nature of R. fuscipes confirms previous studies on this species (Warneke, 1964; Kenner, 1972; Braithwaite, 1973 and 1977) and agrees with the suggestion that omnivorous small mammals are mainly nocturnal. A similar situation exists for the mainly insectivorous Mus musculus. The data for the insectivorous A. stuartii are varied, depending on the trapping location. Thus 14 of the 15 daytime captures for this species occur- red on the trapping grid where it was also the most frequently trapped small mammal. When data for each of the three sites are considered separately, a highly significant departure from an even diel rhythm (P<0,01) exists on the grid and a significant departure (P<0.05) for the airstrip. It thus Vic.Nat. Vol, 96 TABLE 1 Trapping data at Powelltown ] Evening Evening” Day Number of traps set 2880 529 $29 Significance Rattus fuscipes 317 58 20 H83 R. ratnus 2 | 0 _ R. lutreolts 9 2 0) = Mastacomys fiscus 20 4 0 — Mus musculus 54 10 0 S Antechinus stuartii 117 21 15 ~ A, swainsonii Pee 5 16 — * Reduced from 2880 to 529 to enable Chi-squared comparison. H.S.—highly significant (P<0.01) S.—significant (P<0.05). appears A. sivarti/ is active during the daytime (Table 1 data) but that it is more frequently captured during the night. This is in accord with Braithwaite (1977) and Wood (1970). There exist a number of factors which can influence activity patterns in A. stwartii: the den- sity of R. fuscipes (Braithwaite, 1973), season (Wood, 1970) and perhaps habitat. A, swainsoni/ appears to have an even diel rhythm and is considerably more active during the day than A. stuwartii. Such a difference in activity is probably important in reducing competition be- tween the two species. Acknowledgements We wish to thank the many people who assisted in the field, in particular H. Brunner, G. Beaver and G. Turner. The data for Table 1 was partly taken from studies by P. Voutier and D. Lloyd. REFERENCES Braithwaite, R. W. (1973), An ecological study of Antechinus stuartii (Marsupialia; Dasyuridae). M.Sc, thesis, Zoology Dept., Univ. Qld. Braithwaite, R. W, (1977), Preliminary observa- lions on the activity patterns of Rarrs /utreolus and other Victorian small mammals, Mictorian Nat, 94: 216-218. Brunner, H., Wallis, R, L. and Voutier, P. F, (1977), Locating and trapping the broad-toothed rat (Mastacomys fuscus Thomas) at Powelltown Victorian Nat. 94; 207-210. Kenner, A. N. (1972). Aspects of the behavioural ecology of three sympathetic species of small mammals, Antechinus swainsonii, Antechinus star and Rattus fuscipes. B.Sc.(ilons.) thesis. Zoology Dept., Monash Univ, Warden, J. C. (1977), A small mammal survey near Powelltown, Biology 308 project report, Rusden State College. Warneke, R. M. (1964). Life history and ecology of the Australian bush rat, Rattus assimilis (Gould), in exotic pine plantations. M.Sc. thesis, Univ. Melb, Wood, D. H. (1970). An ecological study of Antechinus stuart’ (Marsupialia) in a south-east Queensland rain forest, Aust/, Zool, 18: 185-207, AUSTRALIAN NATURAL HISTORY MEDALLION The present secretary to the Australian Natural History Medallion Commit- tee, Mrs. Margaret Corrick, will retire in May after five years in the position. The Secretary is appointed by the Council of the Field Naturalists’ Club of Victoria; they would be pleased to hear from anyone willing to fill the position, The Com- mittee meets only once every two years; secretarial duties are not onerous and can be carried out almost entirely from the home. The Medallion Award is well tegarded and Council is anxious that the organization of it should not be jeopar- dized through lack of a secretary. Further details may be obtained from Mrs. Cor- rick, Tel. 857 9937. March/April 55 The Family Gnathiidae (Crustacea: Isopoda). A New Victorian Species BY WALLACE F, SEED* Gnathiids are related to slaters, marine pill bugs, fish lice, sea centipedes and various other isopod crustaceans that are more or less familiar to naturalists who spend some time near the sea, However, they are small and cryptic, and consequently litthke known to people who have not studied the isopods in some detail. Some Features of Gnathiid Structure and Biology Members of the various sub-groups of the Isopoda are all sufficiently different from one another to be readily distinguished. Gnathiids, how- ever, are more different (which is easier to do than being ‘“‘more equal’’), and it was proposed by Monod (1922) that they should be placed all by them- selves in a separate group of Isopoda called Decempedes. The reason for this proposal is that gnathiids have only five pairs of legs, whereas normai adults of the other isopod groups have seven pairs of legs and are grouped together as the Quatuordecempedes, It has recently been proposed (Hurley & Jansen 1977) that these two major sub- divisions should be called suborders and the subdivisions of the Quatuor- decempedes should be called infraor- ders, which I think is likely to be accepted by taxonomists. What has happened to the gnathiids’ other two pairs of legs? Their absence (as legs) exemplifies two phenomena well Known to zoologists. The front pair has been converted into gnatho- pods (supplementary mouthparts) in the juveniles, and in the adults they have become structures called * Dept. of Applied Biology, Royal Melbourne Institute of Technology, G.P.O. Box 2476V, Melbourne 3001, Victoria, Australia, 56 pylopods, which are often plate-like and probably are used as ventillating organs. The segment from which the pylopods originate (the second thoracic segment of the embryo) is always at least partly fused to the head. The first segment is fused with the head in all isopods. Incorporation of thoracic seg- ments and their appendages into the head of an animal is called cephaliza- lion. (The decapod crustaceans provide an even better example, with their three pairs of maxillipedes which are used as feeding appendages.) The complete absence of what would be the sixth pair of legs (seventh in other isopods) can be regarded as an example of paedomorphosis, a phenomenon in which juvenile charac- ters—absent at maturity in most other species of the group—are retained in the adult. In most species of the Quatuordecempedes the young have only six pairs of legs when they emerge from the brood pouch, and the seventh pair usually appears at the first moult, which occurs soon afterwards, Not only do the hind legs not develop in the gnathiids, but also the last thoracic seg- ment is much reduced, and looks as though it is a part of the abdomen (‘tail’). Species of this family illustrate also the phenomenon of polymorphism, the males and females and juveniles of each species being superficially quite different. This led to difficulties in the early classification of the group around 150 years ago, which were not resolved until 1880, The polymorphism is well shown by the new species described below. Many gnathiid species live, as adults, in tubes made by their own burrowing or by other animals, so the hind end of Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 the male may be left protected by the tube while the front end emerges to deal with potential invaders or preda- tors, to feed, or for any other purpose. It is possibly for this reason that they have developed a heavily-chitinized or indurated set of sclerites surrounding the head and anterior segments, a more-lightly sclerotized posterior region (pleon), and a very thin integu- ment over the middle region (posterior thorax), A similar adaptation is seen in the aquatic larval stages of the insect order Trichoptera—caddis flies—whjch live in tubes under similar conditions. This may be regarded as an example of con- vergent evolution, which is the ten- dency for unrelated animals, living in a similar way, to develop similar adapta- tions to that way of life. Female gnathiids (at least in the species described below) are fairly uniformly chitinized when mature, but in juveniles—as in males—only the coxal plates (representing the proximal leg-joints) are thickened in the posterior thoracic region. However, the juveniles are not tubicolous. My field- naturalist readers will no doubt enjoy thinking of ways to account for these different adaptations within the one species. Life History Juveniles in this family are micro- predators on the surface of fishes, or in their gill chambers or pharynx. Their mouthparts are adapted for piercing and sucking, by which means they feed until ready to moult. Apparently they then leave their host, digest the food with which they are distended, moult, and find a new host on which to start their new instar (growth stage). The full life history of most species of gnathiid is not yet known, but in one European species, Gnathia maxillaris, there are three instars, after which the juvenile metamorphoses into either a male or female (Mouchet 1928). In March/April another European species, Paragnathia formica, each male commonly has a harem of ten or more females (Pierre & Théodoridés 1948) but the species described here has not been found in sity with more than two females: one older and gravid, or post-partum, and the other recently metamorphosed or even still in the late juvenile state. Australian Gnathiidae and the New Species This is only the eighth Australian species of the family to be described (others await description). The pre- viously-described species are, in chronological order, Elaphognathia ferox (Haswell), 1884, Gnathia latidens (Beddard), 1886, G. mulieraria Hale, 1924, G. pustulosa Hale, 1924, G. calamitosa Monod, 1926, G. calmani Monod, 1926, and G. halei Cals, 1973. The paper of Cals includes a key to all of these species. A monograph by Monod (1926) describes the morph- ology, biology and systematics of the Gnathiidae. Monod’s first contribution to the crustacean literature appeared in 1922; his most recent contributions were six papers in 1976. The new Victorian species was first noticed by Mr. A. G. Willis, of the Department of Zoology, University of Melbourne, who found a single juvenile at Shoreham in 1954. the specific epithet records Mr. Willis’s dis- covery of the species. Three years later that specimen became the basis of my final-year project as a student in that department, a project which led ultimately to a broader interest in marine isopods. Only juveniles were found in the course of that project—almost fifty of them—and adults were not discovered until 1960, at Airey’s Inlet. They were in the tubes of what proved to be a new species of polychaete worm— Rhamphobrachium sp. tubes which penetrated into the dune limestone of 57 the reef and were surrounded at the surface by an encrusting calcareous alga. Specimens have since been found in and among the tubes of Galeolaria caespitosa. As the adults were first found at Airey’s Inlet I have designated it as the type locality and used a series of speci- mens collected there as a basis for the description, Taxonomy Genus Gnathia Leach, 1813 Isopoda with the characteristics of the Decempedes. Males are dis- tinguished from other genera of the suborder by having the third joint of the pylopod minute or absent, and the basal joint lamelliform, with the outer border much shorter than the inner; mandibles taper broadly to an edge medially, to a single point distally. Gnathia agwillisi, new species Diagnosis Adult male Gnathia of Monod’s section | (Transversae); tuberculate to con- ically-spinose dorsally and laterally on the head, and on the tergitgs of seg- ments I-IV (I and II fused to the head); tergite V tuberculate-spinosa only on the antero-lateral regions of the two indurated parts, and with an anterior constriction (caesura). Third pereio- pods (on segment V) have conspicu- ous, strongly-calcified tubercles on the basis, and lesser ones on succeeding joints. The pleon is as wide as the casura, and about one-third wider than the length of its first five segments. Telsonic segment and telson together longer than the rest of the pleon; telson large, an ovoid plate, subtruncate behind, forming with the uropods a tailfan about as wide as the head. All setae of the tailfan are simple. 58 Mandibles of the simplest typical form, Third article of pylopod obscure, indicated only by a notch on the median edge. Preocular lobes tubercu- late-spinose and conspicuously calcified. Tergites of the fourth and fifth pereional somites with a median division. Penes barely discernible; appendix masculina not developed. Legs typically held as shown in Fig. 1d. Median length of holotype, to tip of mandibles: 5 mm. Mature female Two large pairs of oostegites cover the ventral surface of the pereion; a small pair is associated with the pylopods. Pereional tergites are distinct on all free segments, those of VI and VII each with an obscure median anterior projection, which matches a posterior notch in the preceding tergite, and a pair of long, thin apodemes extending forward from the anterior edge. Pleon about as wide as the length of its first five segments. Telson a large, subquadrate plate, forming with the uropods a tailfan about as wide as the head. All setae of the tailfan are simple. Median length of paratype: 7.5 mm. Praniza larva From the second instar onwards there is a dense pelage of long, fine hairs along the leading edge of the antennae, longest on the peduncle. The pleon is very strongly developed and about as wide as the first free segment of the pereion. Tailfan, including setae, is more than twice as wide as pleon; anterior edge of uropods is recurved dorsally. The setae of the telson are simple, and so are the outer setae of Vic.Nat. Vol, 96 “4 ee : Neca Zz a 59000 2% Dow ae 9 te Mang) Fig. 1. Gnathia agwillisi n. sp. a: post-partum female; b: last-instar juvenile (praniza); c: adult male, with “pelage”’ omitted; d: adult male, showing characteristic position of the legs, and most of the long hairs. Each scale line represents 1 mm. March/April 59 Fig. 2. Gnathia agwillisi, larval mouthparts from the right side, a: gnathopod, b: mandible; ¢: maxillule, d: maxilla; e: maxillipede. Antennule and antenna, dorsal view—f; female, g: male, h: late larva. 60 Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Fig. 3. Gnathia agwillisi, a: lett pylopod of male, b: left maxillipede of male; c: left pylopod and associated oostegite of female; d: left maxillipede of female. the uropodal endopods; the remainder are pectinate. Median paratype larva: 4.8 mm. Type Material Types are lodged in the National Museum of Victoria. Holotype male NMV No. J184 and six paratypes (2 males, 2 females and 2 larvae) plus 3 paratype slides of appendages. NMV No. J185, collected by W. Seed, Janu- ary, 1960. Type Locality Airey’s Inlet, Victoria. March/April length of Distribution Victorian coast, from Westernport to Cape Otway. Adults found in tubes of Rhamphobrachium and Galeolaria, and may occur interstitially in Galeolaria colonies. Larvae are found in almost any material from littoral or infra-lit- toral fringe; larval host(s) unknown. Acknowledgement lam grateful to my colleagues, Brian Leonard and Geoff Westcott, for their critical reading of the draft of this paper. 61 REFERENCES Beddurd, F. E., }886.—Report on the lsopada col- lected by H.M.S. Challenger during the years (873-76, Part Ul. Challenger Reports, Zool. V7 (48), 1-178, pl. 1-25 Cals, P.. 1973.—Sur une espéce nouvelle de Guattia & Australes Gnatina halter (Crustaces, Isopodes), Bull, Mus. Mist. nat, Paris, sér 3, LIS, Zool, 89, 295-305 Hale, He M., 1924.—Notes on Australian Crustacea. No. IL Trams, R. Soe. S. Aust. 48, 2-6, |. 1-2 Huswell. W. A., 1884.—A revision of the Austra- lian Isopoda, Proc, Linn, Soe, No OS. Wales 9, LO01-15, pL 50-53 Hurley, D, E. & Jansen, K, P., 1977.—The marine fauna of New Zealand: Family Sphaeromatidae (Crustacea Isopoda: Flabellifera), Mem. NZ. oceanver, Inst, 63, 1-84, pl. 1-11, Monod, Th,, 1926.—Les Gnathitdae. Essai monographique (Morphologic, Biologie, Systématique), Mem. Sov. Sei, nat. phys. Marac 13, 1-668, 1 pl. Mouchet, 8., 1928,—Note sur le cycle évolutif des Gnathiidae, Bull, Sue. cool. Fr. 53, 392-400, Pierre, F. & Théodoridés, J., 1947.—La cohabita- ion de Dichiratrictus pubescens, de Bledius spee- tabilis et Paragnathia formica dans le Schorre, a Pestuuire de la Penzé (Pinistere). Bull, Soe. zeal, Fr, 71, 151-56 Notes on Gold Coast Butterflies The vear 1978 commenced with a seareity of usually common species no doubt due to the prolonged dry spell over the preceding months. The usual **Wet Season” was poor and brief, some 25 inches of rain being recorded in March followed again by dry conditions which have prevailed with excep- lion of some intermittent light showers up to the present time, December, 1978. Common species such as the blue Triangle (Graphium sarpedon choredon (Feld.)) and pale green Triangle (Graphium eurypylus lycaon (Westw.)) have been very scarce. During April and May the large Orchard Swallow Tail (Papilio aegeus aegeus (Don.)) was very common, much more so than usual. Other normally common species were nol in evidence. In late August very large numbers of the Pea Blue Lampides boeticus (L.) occurred for about 2 weeks. These were followed by almost equal numbers of the small Com- mon Grass Blue (Ziceeria ons labradus (Godt.)) and such numbers have persisted up till the time of writing (Dec, 1978). The months of September-November produced great numbers of the Meadow Argus (Precis villida calybe (Godt.)), a species usually plen- tiful during those months but much more so this season. The Blue Spotted Painted Lady (Vanessa cardul kershawi (MeCoy)) neyer seen abundantly on the Gold Coast was, and sull is, present in quantity. Immediately following these was a great flight of the Common Caper While Anaphaeis java teulonia (Fub)). the largest numbers of this migratory butterfly that | have ever observed on the coast. Every year during November normal flights do oceur, but last only a few days (not a month as is the case of this year’s flight). The author captured 2 pairs just for record and to his amazement one of these four (4) specimens was a “Gynandromorph” i.e. a specimen with 62 male wing pattern on the right side of the wings and female on the left side! 1 believe that the chances of obtaining such rare specimens is about one in two million! As is usual in early November the Che- quered Swallow Tail (Papilio demoleus sthenelus (Macl.)) was completely absent, not a single specimen being seen. Another interesting butterfly, the Big Greasy (Cressida cressida cressida (Fab.)) has been, and is more plentiful than usual, The Blue Tiger (Danaus hamata hamata (Macl.)) has been and is much commoner than usual for this time of year. The appearance too of the Red Eyed Skipper (Chaetocneme beata (Hew.)) which flies at dusk and is not often seen was noted flying at Orange blossoms, at Limes Lwo specimens being seen at one time. Common pierid butterflies such as the Lemon Migrant (Caropsilia pomona pomona (Fab.)); the Common Albatross (Appias paulina ega (Boisd.)), and the ever abundant Common Grass Yellow (Eurema hecabe phoebus (Butl.)) have all been really scarce this season. During September-October many examples of the beautiful Richmond Birdwing (Ornithoptera priamus richmondius (Gray)) were noted in the garden at flowers of Bougainvillea, Buddleyia, etc., at times 6 or 7 specimens being seen at once. This fine butterfly is normally seen singly or rarely in pairs. Many of the usually common Skippers belonging to the genera 7oxidia, Ocybadistes, Arrhenes, and others normally to be seen everywhere have all been scarce; the only exception perhaps being the large and beautiful Symmomus Skipper (7rapezires symmomus symmomus (Hubn.)) which has been quite common practically throughout the year, especially so during August- October. _ Should we get good rains during the cam- ing months it will be interesting to see if we get a return to the normal occurrence of Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Species usual to cach month. Lastly the appearance of the Capaneus Papilio But- terfly (Papilio fuscus capaneus (Westw.)) this month has been of note because this pretty and large swallow tail is rare in southern Queensland but very common from Bun- daberg northwards. | hope that these notes may be of interest to Lepidopterists for pur- poses of recording appearance of butterfly Species and the special record of the Gynandromorph of the Caper White But- terfly, BY ALEX. N. BURNS Fig. 1, Caper white butterfly Anaphaeis java reutonia (Fab), Upper leti—male. Upper right— femule, Lower—gynandromorph, Photo—G, Thacefto, The Origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora Part 2—Latin, Greek and Miscellaneous (Continued from page 235 in the previous volume) BY JAMES A. BAINES Pilularia. Lat pilula, a globule, a pill; alluding to the pill-shaped fruits (globular Sporocarps). Our species, P. novae- hallandiae, Austral Pillwort, is one of many plants with this specific epithet, given when New Holland was the accepted name of Au- Stralia; the name even survives in some ver- nacular names, e.g. New Holland Daisy, New Holland Mouse, and New Holland Honeyeater, The genus is in family Mar- sileaceae. Pimelea. Gk pimele, fat (with short i and long final e, justifying the accent on third syllable recommended by Smith & Stearn, who give the reason for the naming as rich- ness of oil). J. M. Black places the accent on the second syllable, as is usual in Australia, where the i is pronounced as in pie rather than as in Pimm in defiance of the Gk origi- nal; Black gives ‘fleshy cotyledons’ as the probable reason for the naming, Victoria has 23 species of this mainly Australian genus, which extends to Timor and New Zealand. All our species are known as diffe- rent kinds of rice-flower, although P. axi- March/April flora, Tough Rice-flower, is better known as Bootlace Bush. The genus is in family Thymelaeaceae, which takes its name from Thymelaea, a synonym of Daphne. P. physodes is Western Australia’s beautiful Qualup Bell. “Pinus. The classical Lat name for pines, particularly P. pinea, Stone or Nut Pine. *P. radiata (syn, P. insignis), Monterey Pine, is the Californian pine now the mainstay of our softwood plantations, from which wind-blown seed causes invasions of nearby eucalypt forests, as happens also with *P. nigra var. maritima, Corsican Pine. Our other ‘escapee’ species is “P. pinaster, Cluster Pine, from windbreaks in southern Victorian maritime situa- tions. The genus gives its name to family Pinaceae. (Our native ‘pines’, Callitris, belong to family Cupressaceae. ) Pittosporum. Gk pitta, pitch, resin; spora, seed; in allusion to the sticky, 63 resinous coating of the seeds. Victoria has 4 species, one of which, P. bicolor, is known by the Aboriginal name Banyalla, and another, P. phillyreoides, Weeping Pittosporum, is still occa- sionally called in the S.A. inland as Native Willow, because of the pendent, willow-like leaves. The genus gives its name to family Pittosporaceae. (De Candolle used the spelling phylliraeoides, later corrected to con- form with Phillyrea, the oleaceous genus the species resembles, ) Plagianthus. Gk plagios, oblique, slanting; anthos, flower, alluding to some peculiarity in the species first described (the species called Ribbon- wood has flowers with asymmetrical petals). Of the 6 taxa in our flora for- merly in this genus, 3 are now in Law- rencia, 2 in Selenothamnus, and | in Gynatrix. Plagiobothrys. Gk plagios, oblique; bothros, a pit or trench; alluding to the sunken ureole or scar on the nutlet. Our introduced species is *P. canescens, Valley Popeorn Flower, and our 2 native Species are known respectively as Hairy Forget-me-not and White Rochelia (after another boraginaceous genus, but F. Mueller classified P. plurisepalus in Maccoya). Plantago. Lat name applied to more than one species of this genus, but in particular to “P. major, Greater Plan- lain, one of our 4 naturalized species, which has broad flat leaves close to the ground, hence the name from Lat planta, sole of the foot (ef, plantigrade animals). The word plantain came through French from plantaginem, the accusative case of plantago; it is also used as the common name for Musa paradisiaca, and for its fruit, related to M. sapientum, Banana, eaten by the tro- pical birds called Plantain-eaters, Musophaga; the broad flat leaves would prompt the giving of the same name. Another of our introduced species, *P. 64 coronopus, Buck’s-horn Plantain, is a highly efficient weed most difficult to eradicate from lawns, while *P. lan- ceolata, Ribwort Plantain, is called Lamb’s-tongue in N.S.W. Victoria has also 6 native species of this genus, which gives its name to family Plan- taginaceae, Platylobium. Gk platys, flat; lobes, pod; from the shape of the seed-pods, hence also the common name of flat- peas for our 4 species, the specific epithets of 3 of them, obmusangulum, wriangulare and alternifolium being based on the form or arrangement of the leaves, and of the fourth, for- mosum, on the beauty of the flowers. They belong to family Papilionaceae. Platysace. Gk platys, flat; sakos, a shield (or perhaps sakkos, a sack); referring to the fruit. Our 3 species were formerly classified in Trachymene, which remains a valid genus for 4 other species in our flora. Both genera are in family Umbelliferae, and both are called by their generic names in the vernacular since they lack any other common name. Plectranthus. Gk plektron, a cock’s spur, a thing to strike with (cf. plectron for playing stringed instruments); anthos, flower; alluding to the spurred or gibbous base of the corolla. Our species, P. parviflorus, Cockspur Flower, is one of only 3 Australian species (although it is also found in Hawaii), The genus is in family Labiatae (Lamiaceae). Pleurosorus. Gk pleura, side, soros, a heap (hence Lat sorus, a group of spores); alluding to the position of the sori along the sides of the veins. Our sole species, P. rutifolius, Blanket Fern, was al first classified in Grammits. The genus belongs to family Aspleniaceae. Poa. The classical Gk name for grass, especially as fodder, making par- ticularly appropriate the alternative family name Poaceae for the grasses Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 (Gramineae comes from Lat gramen, genitive graminis, grass). Victoria has 7 native and 4 introduced species. P. fax, Scaly Meadow-grass, named by J. HH, Willis and A. B. Court in 1956 (syn. P, lepida F. Muell.), must surely be the Shortest botanical name of all, and could facetiously be termed a ‘jaw- mender’. Fax is Lat for torch (cf. Ger- man Fackel for this article). Most of the species are known as kinds of meadow-grass or poa, bul P. australis is Tussock Grass, Podocarpus. Gk pous, podos, a foot: karpos, fruit; referring to the swollen Structure under the fruit, Victoria has only | of Australia’s 7 species, P. law- rencei, Mountain Plum Pine, the specific epithet being named by Hooker after Robert William Lawrence (1807- 1833), the noted collector in Tasmania; he also named the genus Lawrencia and. Correa lawrenciana in his honour. The genus Podocarpus is strongly repre- sented in N.Z., with timber trees such as Totara, Matai, Kahikatea and Miro, and gives its name to family Podocar- paceae, Podolepis. Gk pous, podos, a foot; lepis, a scale; alluding to the stalks or ‘claws’ of the inner involucral bracts. Victoria has 7 species of this Australian endemic genus, for which the generic name has to serve as part of the ver- nacular. The stress recommended by Black on the second syllable is in accor- dance with Gk practice, but the third syllable is often accented in Victoria. P. jaceoides, Showy Podolepis, has a specific epithet meaning ‘like Jacea’, a superseded genus of Compositae now in Centaurea. Podolepis is in the Inuleae tribe of the same family. Podosperma. Gk podos, foot; sperma, seed; alluding to the short stalks of the achenes. Our sole species, P. angustifolium, Sticky Longheads, would be Podotheca (= foot-seedbox) angustifolia if Hj. Eichler’s proposal for conservation were accepted because of March/April confusion with Podospermum (see note by J. H. Willis, Vol. Il, pp. 719-720), Both genera are in Compositae, the lat- ter being now a synonym of Scorzonera, *Polycarpon. A plant-name used by the Gk physician Hippocrates, who used the neuter form, from polys, many, kKarpos, fruit; ie. rich in fruit. *P. tetraphyllum has a vernacular name, Four-leaf Allseed, that is a literal translation of the scientific name. It is in family Caryophyllaceae. Polygala. Lat form of Gk polygalon (from Gk polys, much; gala, milk); the ancients believed that animals eating some of these plants produced more milk, Victoria has 2 introduced species and | native, all known as kinds of milkwort. Our native species, Dwarf Milkwort, is also indigenous to Japan, as its name, P. japonica, indicates. The genus gives its name to family Polygalaceae, Polygonum. From the Gk name, polygonon, from polys, many, and either gonos, offspring, seed, as the plants have numerous seeds, or gony, Knee-joint, in allusion to the swollen joints of the stems (ef, polygon, many corners), Victoria has 7 native species and 5 introduced, most of them known as kinds of knotweed (from the stem- joints), but *P. convolvulus is Black Bindweed, *P. persicaria, Redleg or Redshank (from the reddish stems), and P. hydropiper, Water-pepper. The family is Polygonaceae, named from this type genus. Polyphlebium. Gk polys, many; phleps, genitive phlebos, vein, blood vessel (cf. phlebitis); because the pin- nae are prominently veined, with veins branching within the lobes. Our species, from 1810-1938 classified in Trichomanes, is P. venosum, Veined Bristle-fern, the specific epithet also meaning veined, It is in family Hymenophyllaceae. 65 Polypodium. Gk name polypodion, from polys, many; podion, little foot, because the rhizomes of some species are much branched and spread widely, Formerly a very comprehensive genus, with many species quite unrelated to P, vulgare L. Victorian ferns previously classified in it are now in’ Pyrrosia, Microsorium (both in) Polypodiacae), Grammitis, Ctenopteris (both in Gram- mitidaceae), Cysropreris (Athyriaceae), Rumohra (Aspidiaceae), Anogramma (Adiantaceae), Cyclosorus (Thelyp- teridaceae), Blechnum (Blechnaceae) and //ypolepis (Dennstaedtiaceae), The name Polypody survives in com- mon names of several species, *Polypogon. Gk polys, many; pogon, beard; alluding to the bristly panicle, Our 2 species are *P. maritimus, Coast Beard-grass, and *P. monspeliensis, Annual Beard-grass (Rabbit-foot Grass in U.S.A.), the specific epithet of which means from Montpellier, chief town of Languedoc, Southern France, with a university noted for its medical school and a great botanical garden founded in 1593. Polypompholyx. Gk polys, many; pompholyx, a bubble (from pomphos, blister); alluding to the small bladders. Victoria has | of the 2 species of this endemic Australian genus, P. fenella, Pink Bladderwort, sharing the latter part of the common name_ with Uiricularia, to which genus it is very close, in family Lentibulariaceae. Polystichum. Gk polys, many, stichos, a row; alluding to the many rows of sori. Victoria has 2 native species, both known as kinds of shield- fern. The genus belongs to family Aspidiaceae, Pomaderris. Gk poma, a lid or cover; derris, a skin, fur, hair-cloth; alluding to the membranous valve by which the fruitlets of many species open. The vowel 0 in poma was long in Greek, but it is often pronounced short in the 66 generic name; just as Lat pomum, apple-like fruit, had a long o that is short in the French for apple, pomme (though retained in the botanical word pome). There are 45 species, confined to Australia (41 endemics) and N.Z., which has 4 endemic ssp. and 3 shared with Australia. Victoria has 31 species, of which 13 were named by N. A. Wakefield, former editor of ‘Victorian Naturalist’. All are known as different kinds of pomaderris in the vernacular, although P. aspera, Hazel Pomaderris, was known simply as Hazel in the col- onial days—it was thought to be P. apetala, which is in W. Vic., Tas. (including King Island), where it is Dogwood, and N.Z., where it is known by the Maori name of Tainui, The genus is in family Rhamnaceae. Pomax. Gk poma, a lid or leather covering; named by Solander in allu- sion to the lid of the compound fruit (cf. Opercularia from the operculum). Our species, P. wmbellata, is mono- typic, although originally described by Gaertner as an Opercularia, both genera being in family Rubiaceae. Pomax, short and simple, is suitably used as a common name in this ins- tance. Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Aquatic Plants: New Victorian Records BY HELEN | Two species of aquatic flowering plants, not previously recorded as existing in the wild within Vietoria, are here reported for the State Najas marina b., a submerped aquatic plant, is the most distinctive of the “‘water nymphs” or Na/ay species because of the strongly-toothed, so- called spiny or prickly, nature of the stems and foliage The leaves (Fig, ta) are opposite to clustered along the slender stems, Each leaf is usually 2 to 6 em long, more o1 less linear, up to 12 of 15 times as long as broad, and partly stemechisping at the base. Each leaf margin bears up to 15 (sometimes more) coarse, soft, spine-upped teeth, thereby rendering the leaves deeply and conspicuously serrate or sawetoothed, One to several similar teeth usually occur on the midrib on the dorsal leaf surface while teeth may also be scattered along the stems. N. marina is widespread in tropical and warm temperate parts of the world including Australia (see Aston 1973 260-261), Until last year its known dis- tribution extended no closer to Vietoria than the Myall Lakes (north ol Newcastle) and Griffith. districts of New South Wales, except for one more-southerly record from Sydney (Manly) which is almost certainly from drift material (S. Jacobs, pers, comm Feb, 1979), Coastal occurrences as fat south as Myall Lakes are long-stand- ing, but the inland oceurrences near Griffith appear recent, Sainty (1973; 25-26) reports that since 1965 the species has spread throughout the lakes at Lake Wyangan, Griffith, growing, vigorously in mid-summer when water * Senior Botunist, National Herbarium of Vietoria, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 4141 March/April ASTON* temperatures are consistently above 20°C and forming large masses just below the water surface, Th thrives in slightly brackish water and oceurs in water up lo three metres deep On December 7, 1978, Andrew Cot rick and Ken Bode of the Wildlife Research Seetion of the Pisheries and Wildlife Division, located the first known occurrence ol Najas marina within Victoria and collected voucher material (MEL 541709710) whieh is now lodped wt the National Herbarium of Vietori, The occurrence (37° 44. 7'S Lat, 14° 00.5'F long.) is in Bast Gipps land at Swan Lake, northeeast of Sydenham Inlet, where plints formed lingled patehes up to tl metre in diameter in a small bay (40 x LOO metres) at the western end of the lake At this site the water was 40 cm deep over a very deep (2 metres) sott mud substrate, Water sampled nearby was brackish, with a salinity of 5.4 parts per thousand The lack of previous Vietoriun records of this species, in spite of extensive aquatic pliant sampling: sinee 1963, suppests that iis presence at Swan Lake is both recent and isolated, | would very much appreciate mborma tion on, and eolleetions trom, any other populations located in this State Pontederia cordata L., 4 native of North America, is an aquatic or bog plant sometimes planted as an ora. mental in garden ponds, Mor Vietoru there is an 1893) colleetion (MEI 529393) by Matthews from the Gram plins area (he field libel reads “Waterhole, Grampians’ and also bears another poorly-decipherable word which could be Stawell’) whieh is apparently from cultivated material as it was annotated as such by the Government Botanist of the day, Per 67 Fig. la. Najas marina, portion showing one whole leaf and the base of another attached to the stem, X 2. From MEL 541710. Fig. 1b, Pontederia cordata, leaf blade indicating some of the many, fine, semi-parallel nerves, and showing the lack of cross-veins, X 0.5. From MEL 541707. dinand Mueller, who would almost cer- tainly have received it and any relevant comments direct from the collector. Another collection (MEL 542143) shows that the species was cultivated in the Melbourne Botanic Gardens in January 1906. P. cordata has been reported as naturalized and spreading in a few restricted waters in New South Wales and Queensland (See Aston 1973: 270) and it is now known to be established and possibly naturalized in at least one location in Victoria. This is in the Grampians in a backwash of the Mackenzie River outlet of Wartook Reservoir, from where it was collected in April 1968 by A. C. Beauglehole 68 (ACB 25079: MEL 541707-708) with the comment ‘‘Probably planted there; seems to be spreading’. The sugges- tion of deliberate planting is probably correct as the site is close to a popular picnic area. A collection (F. Swindley 144: MEL 542142) gathered in March 1960 from Koo-wee-rup, approximately 65 km south-east of Melbourne, has no further details but may represent another site where the species is locally established in Victoria. Pontederia cordata is a rooted, emergent perennial with erect leaves arising from the plant base. The leaf blades (Fig. 1b) are up to 20 cm long by Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 10 cm broad, entire, lanceolate to ovate to heart-shaped, and have numerous, very fine, closely-placed (less than 1 mm apart), semi-parallel nerves which follow the curvature of the blade from base to apex; there are no visible cross- veins. Although this species has been long- present in cultivation in Victoria the scarcity of records showing real or possible naturalization indicates that P. cordata is unlikely to become an aggressive spreader or a weed problem in this State. Nevertheless, information on and collections from any occur- rences would be appreciated. REFERENCES Aston, H. 1, (1973). Aquatic Plants of Australia. Melbourne University Press Sainty, G, R. (1973). Aquatic Plants. Identification Guide. Water Conservation and Irrigation Com- mission, Sydney. Aboriginal Engraving from Sutherland Creek, Maude, Victoria. BY PAUL BOLGER* During the course of geological map- ping in the Maude area, a small engrav- ing was found on a floater of siliceous sandstone exposed on the east bank of Sutherland Creek (Fig, 1), The sandstone comprises the Sutherland Creek Sand Member of the Maude Formation and is of Late Oligocene age. The engraving has been examined by Mr. D. Witter of the Victorian Archaeological Survey and Mr. S. Shannon of the Western Australian Museum who agree that it is authentic Aboriginal rock art. The site is now on file at the Victoria Archaeological Survey. No other engravings have yet been found at this site, but there is abundant evidence of occupation in the immedi- ate area. On the low hills on the east side of Sutherland Creek there are Aboriginal quarries in silicified Suther- land Creek Sand, and exposed in the alluvium of the creek bank there are several in situ flakes and a small hearth. West of Sutherland Creek there is evi- dence of a microlithic workshop area. * Geological Survey of Victoria, 107 Russell Street, Melbourne March/April The engraving (see Fig. 2) comprises two deeply inscribed complete circles each surrounded on the bottom (with respect to Fig. 2) by finer, shallower semi-circles which join in the centre of the figure to form a median line. The Ting on the left is 8.5 cm in outside diameter and the right hand ring is 10 cm across. There is a small isolated circle 4 cm in diameter to the right of the main figure. The large engraving on the left is well preserved with deep, well defined lines. The inner circles are approximately 5 mm deep. The figures have been abraded rather than pecked into the sandstone, The rock has pro- bably been covered for some time by a mantle of soil which has inhibited weathering and enabled good preserva- tion of part of the engraving. This is the first recorded occurrence of Aboriginal rock art from this part of Victoria. Its age is uncertain but it may have similarities to Tasmanian engrav- ings (Sims, 1977) or to the ‘‘Cleland Hills Type’? Art which is found over much of Australia (Dix, 1977). The abundance of artefacts from the Sutherland Creek locality indicate that 69 ip Ballan x Ballarat as / aia pra q Ped Boauhus Marsh cue ¢ Be ya ( . reig 1Z, om ‘ *Sheooks FP Anakie eoqovoew sh Lethbridge 5 kilometres a Ss | Fig. 1. Locality map. Geelong this area was one of intense Aboriginal activity. REFERENCES Acknowledgements Dix, W.C., 1977: Facial Representations in Pilbara The author wishes to thank Mr. D. Rock Engravings, in Form in Indigenous Art (ed Witter and Mr. S. Shannon for examin- erie P. J. Ucko) Prehistory and Material Culture Series No. 13. Australian Institute of Aboriginal ing the engraving in the field and to “Amen aS Duckworth and Co. Ltd : : : : ondon pp. 277-285. Mr. Witter for his assistance In the pre- sims, P. C., 1977: Variations in Tasmanian Petro paration of the manuscript. glyphs, ibid., pp. 429-438. 70 Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Fig. 2. Engraving. Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Reports of FNCV Activities General Meeting, Monday, 12 February, 1979 Mr. Ron Miller, President of the Archaeological Society of Victoria spoke upon “‘Historical Archaeology in Victoria.”’ Historical archaeology can be de- scribed as the archaeological investiga- tion of sites for which there is already documentation of another kind, for ex- ample photographs or written descrip- tions, and can be used to ascertain whether the other documents truly reflect the situation that prevailed at the time they were written. To illustrate the methods and scope of Historical Archaeology, Mr. Miller showed some transparencies of sites being studied in Australia, including Port Essington, in the Northern Ter- ritory and Irrawang near Newcastle. Victorian sites included the Cement March/April Works at Fossil Beach, Mornington and a pioneer homestead at Rowville in the Dandenong Valley Park. He finished his talk by pointing out the need for some form of legislation to protect historical relics from vandalism caused by antique collectors, demoli- tion for new buildings and sheer van- dalism. Exhibits included the rarely seen flower of Wolffia under the microscope. A transparency of the flower, taken by Mr. Dick Morrison, complemented the exhibit. Other exhibits included oak leaves showing the effects of oak leaf- miners, a collection of products pro- duced from native plant parts, and, some specimens of Nardoo, The nar- doos involved the comment, from Dr. J. Roshharnet, that the nardoo was once common on roadside verges near Laverton. 71 Victorian Field Naturalists Clubs Association Report of the annual gathering held at Melbourne 10-12 March 1979 This year the FNCV was host club and headquarters for the weekend at the Wellesley Hall in Blackburn, about ten miles east of Melbourne city. Most members from the country stayed at Crystal Brook caravan park ubout a mile north of Blackburn. Geology and Melbourne views On Saturday afternoon, 10 March, Mr. Dan Melnnes led a convoy of cars from Blackburn to quarries at Auburn. There he spoke about the bedrock of Melbourne. Then followed a drive along Gardiners Creek via the Eastern Freeway to Como Park where we heard about the lava flows down Yarra valley which blocked Gardiners Creek. A drive along the Boulevard revealed pleasant aspects of the Yarra, and good views of Melbourne were obtained from Studley Park, Here were shown intrusive dykes and, at Dights Falls, the lava flows from the north which blocked the Yarra and formed extensive river flats around Templestowe, After returning to Blackburn many mem- bers stayed at the Hall for their evening meal and FNCV supplied hot drinks. There was a display of Amy Fuller’s wildflower paintings owned by FNCV, and wildflower and other natural history paintings by Ruth Anderson. Some of the latter were for sale. And there were many natural history books for sale at reduced prices. VENCA Annual General Meeting President Mr. Albert Perry opened the meeting at 7.00 pm on Saturday. Only eight clubs were represented, The absence of so many clubs caused the question to be raised of the suitability of the Labour Day weekend. But any long weekend has disadvantages and it was agreed to continue with this one. Mr. Jack Wheeler was elected as the Association’s representative to the Natural History Medallion genera! committee, Mr. R. Moors sent his resignation from Council. Mr. Alex Fisher also tended his resignation aS secretary-treasurer and Mr. Perry wished to resign from the presidency but both wish to continue on Council, 72 Dr. Willis on the Dandenongs At 8.00 pm FNCY President Dr. Brian Smith took the chair. He welcomed all Asso- ciation members and introduced Dr. J. H. Willis as speaker for the evening on *‘Plants of the Dandenongs”’. Dr, Willis defined the Dandenongs as the area covered by acidic volcanic rocks and talked of some of the 400 different Austra- lian plants that occur there. As always, Dr. Willis enthralled us with his wonderful com- ments and splendid slides. After thanking the speaker and explaining excursion plans for Sunday and Monday, Dr. Smith closed the meeting and supper wus served, Most people left soon after ten o'clock, Lyrebirds and Ferns A chartered bus arrived at Blackburn about 10.00 am on Sunday. Already it con- tained several Melbourne members and was then filled with country members, while some Melbourne and country people followed in their cars. Our destination was the picnic area in Sherbrooke Forest near Sherbrooke Lodge Road. Mr. Roy Wheeler led us along the fire-break and into the forest to seek lyrebirds, and he provided each of us with a roneoed list of birds we might see. The party was rather large for effective bird work and the birds were sensibly inactive in such warm weather, However, several people saw lyrebirds although not displaying, and a good number of other birds were observed. Sherbrooke Forest itself is something to see, with its pure stand of superb mountain ash. Combined with the lower layer of blackwoods and silver wattles down to the ferns and herbaceous ground level, the Forest has an air of remarkable lushness. Bul the picnic area was among introduced pines! After lunch the bus took us to Begleys Bridge, a trail of private cars dutifully following. Here Miss Madge Lester led us on a fern-identifying exercise, We followed down Sassafras Creek for about a mile to O’Donahue’s picnic area, crossing the creek several times by small bridges. Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Each of us was supplied with roneoed pages with descriptions and drawings of five very different ferns that would be seen over and over again, When looking at a fern, we were asked to refer to our leaflets and see if it filled one of the descriptions, noting size, situation, sori and stalk. If it didn’t fit, we could ask one of the leaders. The area was thick with ferns. We learned to recognise the five described and saw several other kinds as well. One group of members was elated at finding and firmly identifying a slender tree-fern, a rarity in the Dandenongs. The bus was waiting for us at O*’Donahue’s so we collected our packs and had a snack. Due to the warm weather and many stops, the mile walk had taken longer than expected, so the bus took us straight back to Blackburn. Again, several members stayed at the Hall for their evening meal. As well as the attrac- tions of the previous evening, the FNCV Microscopy Group had set up a display of 48 microscopes, historical and modern, with various objects to be viewed under them. VFNCA Council Meeting Open Discussions, Microscopy About 7.00 pm Mr. Perry opened the Council meeting. An important outcome was that both he and Mr. Fisher were per- suaded to remain in their respective offices until the next Council meeting in August. At 7.30 Mr. Perry threw open the meeting for reports and general discussion. Mr. Jack Brooks reported on the Mt Worth Reserve with maps showing the areas added and those we hope will be added. Mr. Jack Wheeler spoke of the develop- ments at Ocean Grove Reserve and the suc- cess of his book ‘‘The care of sick, injured and orphaned native birds and animals’. There was a lively discussion about the excess population of animals and birds in national parks and their overflow to farm lands, but nothing was resolved. Mr. Paul Genery gave a talk on the history and use of microscopes, followed by a movie showing various life forms under a microscope. Mr. Alan Morrison showed slides of the barks of different trees. The evening ended with another good supper. March/April Gold On Monday at 9.30 am we met at Crystal Brook caravan park where bellbirds were calling continually. They were outmatched by lan Morrison’s recording of lyrebird calls, Mr. lan Morrison led the convoy of cars to the Pound Bend tunnel near Warrandyte. The tunnel is about 100 yards long and cuts through a sort of peninsula carved meander; it was made in 1870 to divert the Yarra water so as to work the alluvial gold from the Yarra bed. £8000 of gold were taken but the venture was too costly and the Yarra now continues along its previous meander. Mr. Morrison led us to the gold memorial at Anderson Creek which records the first gold found near Melbourne in 1851. Then we went to Jumping Creek Reserve for lunch, The party began to break up as country members set off for their long journeys home, We all agreed it had been a very enjoyable weekend. FNCV Council expresses its thanks to Miss Marie Allender and her organising committee, the ladies who did so much for supper etc, and the excursion leaders. M.J.L. 73 FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA Report by Executive Council The members of the Executive Council submit herewith balance sheet as at 31 December 1978 and income and expenditure account for the year ended on that date, and report as follows:— iE Nm The Net Loss of the Club for the year ended 31 December 1978 was $125 which, deducted from the Surplus brought forward at | January 1978 of $9,612, together with a transfer of $156 from Club Improvement Account, resulted in a Surplus to be carried forward to next year of $9,643. . The members of the Executive Council took reasonable steps to ascertain, before the income and expenditure account and balance sheet were made out, that all known bad debts were written off and adequate provision was made for doubtful debts, _ The members of the Executive Council took reasonable steps, before the income and expenditure account and balance sheet were made out, to ascertain thal the current assets, other than debtors, were shown in the account- ing records of the company at a value equal to or below the value that would be expected to be realised in the ordinary course of business. . At the date of this report, the members of the Executive Council are not aware of any circum- stances which would render the values attributable to the current assets in the accounts misleading. . No charge on the assets has arisen, since the end of the financial year to the date of this re- port, to secure the liabilities of another person. No contingent liability has arisen since the end of the financial year to the date of this report. _No contingent or other liability has become enforceable or is likely to become enforceable within the period of twelve months after the end of the financial year which in the opinion of the members of the Executive Council will or may affect the ability of the Club to meet its obligations as and when they fall due, . At the date of this report the members of the Executive Council are not aware of any circum- stances not otherwise dealt with in the report or 74 10. Be 12. accounts which would render any amount stated in the accounts misleading. The results of the Club’s operations during the financial year, in the opinion of the members of the Executive Council, were not affected by any item transaction or event of a material and unusual nature. Since 31 December 1978, and to the date of this report, in the opinion of the members of the Executive Council, no item transaction or event of a material and unusual nature has occurred, which would affect substantially the results of the Club’s operations for the next succeeding financial year. No member of the Executive council, since the end of the previous financial year, has received or become entitled to receive a benefit by reason of a contract made by the Club with the member or with a firm of which he is a member or with a company in which he has a substantial financial interest. The principal activities and objects of the Club are to stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian Fauna and Flora. No significant change in the nature of those activities occurred during that period. The names of the members of the Executive Council in office at the date of this report are as follows: — Dr. B. Smith Mrs. M. Corrick Miss M. Allender Miss M. Lester Miss W. Clark Mr. A. Deverell Mr, M, Howes Mr. G. Love Mr. B. McGregor Mr. J. Martindale Mr. T, Sault Mr. A. Thies This Report is made in accordance with a resolu- tion of the Executive Council dated 27th day of March 1979. B. SMITH, President D. McINNES, Treasurer Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 O8s‘Z1$ 818 LSO'€ SP9'8$ esl 8br Oz I, 060° I ZLb 00! ssl 8S Ov SEC 8918 000°7 evil 88L 11S 99 OTE O18 96S °6$ Rene deh chcas sureties Sees eee 4d JO} snjding sajes Yoog uo jyo1g Jo JoJsueI], —junosdy jUuaWaAoIdWy qniD wooy uunasnpy pue Aleiqry ‘|[eH Jo way Pink (J 9I0N) UONPIouNWAaY SIOo}IpNy boo ata! a sie SOURISISSY [BIII[D 32 BuldAyT, sama (S8$ pun Woy S919] U] SS2]) sosuadxq uoljepoyy Aioisipy [einen ae iS soyey—sosusdxy ayeiZury Be AD are nee res suonruog pure suondiosqns ‘soaq uonRiysy Rt er AS PN sasuadxg [eiauan adelOIS JOJ WOOY jo judy tas Vie eee AIQUONRIS 2? BUNUL, oie 4 irae ee quoydajay, o8r1s0g —sosuddxg SUIyIOM greet SEI De Sar nee tat tac! (€ 210N) AInseoly a et ae JURID 8/6, —ISNIL wei3u] —s]URIQ—SssaT jeuoupy PE th US ie ee Se Zuiyoiedsoq Ws RY Abeer or ere set Zunensnt|y PSS leurs, es cree ie cere ees Zunulig —SI[PINJBNY UPLIOIIA ainjipusdxy LI6°T1$ O8S‘7I$ OST, IL‘ TSH'7$ brl Bee 001 $00°1 6 psi 181 OP bbl LOE$ p6S'8$ (SOL'T) a 667'018 Be, =r S1S‘6S LS8 816, S9P'8s LL61 1v9.K 10} SSO] * sajeg Yoog uo 101g We ee Oe Mie ee fa ee awiosuy Aupung ee ASA SHS XOPU] JOYINY ISIPRIMIRNY UPIIO}II A —IO1g 19) tht tttteseeess puny diysiaquiay 2j14 60L 0 ysodaq eninw jeuoneN Ch, 9» mativaies Aoe3a7] JONeM “WW ‘O—Spuog Ts Sr pee te Age 8o7T 148M ‘W—spuog 061 spuog yI[PoMUOWWOD 86 PRA MER dt eae: junossy yueg Cho Ett ht gtet er trae eees pung Aaeiqry —Ppoalaooy 18910] U] Sag ee D8 rhe _ASTTRIMVN URLIOIDIA,,—BUISMIOApy AACE a Fas Sen; Soe _ASHRIMEN URLIOIIA,, JO safes TEL PE ee aes gunsoddng OL treet bores a ates yuowin5 OZ7§ ere tht eect esheets wees siRauy —paalacoy suondiosqns awoouy 8L61 YAHWAOUG If GHANA AVAA AOA AUNLIGNAdXY GNV AWOONI JO LNAWALVLS LINNOOOV TVYANAD VIMOLOIA JO €NTO SLSITVUNLVYN GTA LI6-71$ IZL'T 6l1 68 00S‘ I$ 8b 19s S6 bor 90¢$ T8768 €0l £668 9tC$ LL61 75 March/April £6£ 6S =i seaoe aye[Bury “WYesy “D ploiey “7 ** YSNOIOGAIR “SAJasay YdssoD —pury a ke YO usm ssaT ZIsi9g ete juawdinby pure dinqiuin. Areiqiy }SO09 JB SJASSY paXxly Tage ad xapuy 19afqnsg IslPeINeN URLIOIIA — usw Ardaig pe tO breae ae aor syOog JaMO}.4 FR ie cot ard OM MO ere et a]Rs 10} sHoog peat gs ga 1afo1g sdodsOINI | EF eye oan ee tye ee saapeq —1S09 18 puP}] UO S¥I01S caer e tet" te sioiqoq Aipuns en as * 4809 12 Spuog YIROMUOLUWOD, Se ty Oe pee ** yurg 1B ysRa Sjassy JUolIny) SLUSSV It 9S9°9$ O17 8$ c0¢ ILI ces I 197 6h lhl 000°7 p87 7$ LL6l SOR as os ll Sete AdeBOT JOXBAA WD 2181S 99F' I 002 0s Kaeo] XOUY “| PISA 002 QUE’ Renae ae 1UNODW ILD SLOW “J ‘d 00€ LUCE: "eee erage AoeBa7] YSU “WW 1e1Sy LITS SEER 0 0=—s GS junosdy JUsWeAoIdWy qn[D 9S0°r OOD thet esti es Afceameaaeic puny oos eerie et pun, uolsinoxgq Areuaqued yd puny wotsinoxq IZ8'l Or0'8I puny uoneoyqng LIUSI €£0'S is, hl oo puny 3ulpling 119° s}uno0dIy Y Spung [elveds TS16$ the 6S0°L$ SEIT) rat heen dae 2ourape ul pred ea sqng xapuy 19afqng isipeimieN URIIOIOI A, NOCt. “hae (¢ NON) Puey UI syURIDH Ainsealy 00S*r cols Sakon pury ul UPID ISNIy WeIBU] “yY “W 81 97% tee ee ssoupar Aupuns £96'I Ovo te « | ha ueeuee aourape ul pred suondiosqng SLS$ Sarptpiqery] juorn) SALLITIAVIT LL61 8L6l ‘YAAWaAOAC T€ LV LAWHS AONVIVA VIMOLOIA JO €N'TD SLSITVANALYN CTH ‘8LO1/TI/1 E18 aunipuadxa jsuiese paidde usaq 10U peYy QOO'P$ Buljyeiol syuRIs Inq *paAtedal udaq dAPY 6/1/8161 PUP BL/LLOI “LL/9L6I JOJ SURI Ainseal] akg “¢ “pounds aan -noaxq ay] JO Joquiaw! Aue 0} qn{D ayi Aq pled ajom s}USWN]OWWY ON “7 “QN{D 241 01 SadIA -19S Nay) Jo jadsaJ Ul SIOUPNY 3y) Aq Paatedal asam s}yeuaq 19410 ON “A[UO SAdIAJAS BUNIPNY 0} S2IP[91 OZ[$ JO UONPJOUNWAY SIOUpPNY “| “SaoK Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 76 Spl OL$ 9787 0r0'8I £€0'S 006°LZ £569 eS. 6LI'€ 6L9'1 00S 000°1$ OF0'8I$ 16L ses £97 6P c08'z 009°€1$ ef 00L‘I OE ‘ES 000°01 0019 00S 007 TT 001$ fh A 8 feat BG SIOUPIID AIpuNs ssaT yueg 1 yseg ice Sere hes dye puny uoisinoxy Aieuajuagj—UaeWUIIAODH uPITPISNYy Wisely 5 te Reh aay Blas tee toh spuog S3UIARS JUSWIUI9AOD uRIPISNYy puny uoisinoxy a aa a 7 ak JOUpsg AIpuns ssa7 "* yurg 1B Yysep * s10}qaq Aipuns s8uouapuerqg oy) jo splig “+++ KIOJUOWOI UOS|IAA SIOMOYPIIM rip ait PIUPLUSB] PUP PIIOJOIA JO SUJA4 — S09 1P SYD01g YOog Deisce ee FHM: PERN Gee EE ms 1S09 1e spuog SBuUlARS JUSWIUJdAODH uPITPIISNYy puny suoneoqng yurg 1B yse wyrrer ¢ 1S09 18 SaInjuaqaq — "pT Ppursy Ree Sabie re WY Neges a bt TsOane spuog SBUIARS JUDWUJOAODH uPIRISNY puny duipying ee Fire eae isodaq — 4191905 Burpying jquouruieg [enn [PuONPN sainjuaqaq ‘pi epursy Fee ch Ne Mo sonjuaqeq MAWW spuog S8UIARS JUDWIUJOAOD uUPI[eLISNY past te spuog JUdLUUJOAOD UPI jS09 1B Spung Jo }UoWSAAUT 9SL*19$ SPL‘OLs 1781 1781S 1c8 000°1$ LIES iaaal €9E 91S 991 919 Re £796 =. p79'€ (S71) 009° LIS = é 9sI ae 7196S 17 nates ose’ 1s , OST Las * al ESAS ozs 000°8 007 ‘ TST 00L'S 06 00S. 006 OL L6L‘S OOT$ (ax6 ees : O19 L6L‘9$ 0z Sak Phe ASG gaat Jed JO} (SSOT) Snding atinnhe = puny PleIOM “OM pun sauupW 4d —juewdinby jo aseyoing JO} spun wosy sioysursy pun, JUaWaAoIdWy qn Wos JoysuRIT, 8/1/11 aourleg yunoddy sniding pee tres aie yUNOdY IID Ydjey apap tebe eer n eee ee puny yooloig oyR[sury te fake pun, uolyepopy AsOIsIF] [PINIeNY oe ee ee puny diysioquiayy jt] 4D Sine Sea hal raei ernie oer UOXIG] AA] 21eISA WS ES pun Jol “A a 8 HA “7 pun, [POWs] Pleyoxe AA “VW “N REND NAN ptbat a fee a juno20y Joye a epee ie Cael * junosdy yoog JOMOLy * unosdy 19ef01g BdoOdsoOIDI 1+ Aaah’ Ska pun, souupy “qd Fi are puny PlPOM ‘D PETIA eis tee wyjOYsIyD *§ “Y 9eISy 9SL*19$ 7916S OST 091 091 617 £76 8$ S80 S$ sel 90s 00b 002 8¢7 zs Sir ose's giz 86b LLS 0z 77 March/April FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA BUILDING FUND Amount of Fund at 31 December 1977 NE ee Ae wists! Interest on Investments and Bank Account : dr: 4 ‘t a is © betadc ta hl nliadeat es Amount of Fund at 31 December 1978 £3 rept debs _ $5,033 Amount of Fund at 31 December 1977 As tide ack id hie s $15,117 Interest on Investment and Bank Account........ 000.02 eens = if $1,150 Surplus (Loss) for the year from— Ferns of Victoria and Tasmania Ee cae ee cattrars ra baes peereemeenoes 156 Amount of Accoumt at'31 December 1978 s.0 66 cnc cade cea athe els aps tebe utrias > 6 ieee’ $4,778 EXCURSION FUND Amount of Fund at 31 December 1977. ; He ee vie ee $1,821 s0SS — Donation Ocean Grove Reserve... : rest re hie e see ae eee 100 1,721 Add— Interest Received on Investment . Fo baa «, Colghaih ae ete LL Ea $616 Surplus on Tours ee Fatt havior doh ts nae Phe tae 489 1,105 Amount of Fund at 31 Decainbet 1978 19 A GSE 5 er a eee $2,826 Statement by the Members of the Executive Council In the opinion of the members of the Executive Council of the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VIC- TORIA, the accompanying Balance Sheet is drawn up so as to give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Club as at 31 December 1978, and the accompanying Statement of Income and Expenditure is drawn up so as to give a true and fair view of the Loss of the Club for the year ended 31 December 1978. Signed in accordance with a resolution of the Executive Council on 27th March 1979, B. Smith President D. E. McInnes Treasurer Statement by the Principal Accounting Officer 1, Daniel E. McInnes, being the officer in charge of the preparation of the accompanying accounts of the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VIC ‘TORIA for the year ended 31 December 1978 state that, to the best of my knowledge and belief, such accounts give a true and fair view of the matters required by Section 162 of the Companies Act 1961, to be dealt with in the accounts. Signed at Melbourne on the 27th di ay of March 1979, D. E. McInnes Auditors’ Report to the Members of the Field Naturalists Club of Victoria In our opinion— (a) The attached balance sheet and income and expenditure account are properly drawn up in accordance with ae provisions of the Companies Act, 1961 of Victoria as amended and so as to give a true and fair view of:- (i) the state of affairs of the Club at 31 December 1978 and of the results of the Club for the year ended on that date; and (ii) the other matters required by Section 162 of that Act to be dealt with in the accounts. (b) The accounting records and other records, and the registers required by that Act to be kept by the Club have been properly kept in accordance with the provisions of that Act. DANBY BLAND PROVAN & CO. Chartered Accountants Richmond R. M, BLAND 28 March 1979 Partner 78 Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 (Continued from page 46) GROUP MEETINGS AILENCV members ure invited to attend any Group Meetings no extra payment At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra at 8.00 p.m First Wednesday in the Month—Geology Group Wednesday, 4 April; Wednesday, 2 May; Wednesday, 6 June Third Wednesday in the Month— Microscopy Group Wednesday, 18 April; Wednesday, 16 May; Wednesday, 20 June Second Thursday in the Month— Botany Group Thursday, 10 May, Flower Hlustrations” Elizabeth Cochrane, Thursday, 14 June, “Smut Pungi, Ergots, Sooty Moulds.’ Arthur Paul. R.M.LT, Thursday, 12 July, ““Thems White Fella’s Plants: some comments on the need for botanical understanding and management of the rural countryside of Australia.” Professor Chambers, Melbourne University At the Conference Room, The Museum, Melbourne at 8.00 p.m Good parking area—enter from La Trobe Street, First Monday in the Month—Marine Biology and Entomology Group Monday, 2 April. “Water Beetles’ by Mr, Paul Genery, Monday, 7 May. ‘Fish from Seaside Rock Pools” by Mr. Dan McInnes. Monday, 4 June, “Insects and the Seasons” by Mr. Peter Corwardine, Monday, 2 July. “tHydroids and Jellyfish’? by Mr. Harry Bishop. At the Arthur Rylah Institute, Brown St., Heidelberg at 8,00 p.m, First Thursday in the Month—Mammal Survey Group. Thursday, 5 Aprily Thursday, 3 May, Thursday, 7 June, GROUP EXCURSIONS All FNCV members are invited to attend Group Excursions Botany Group Saturday, 26 May. Bacchus Marsh. Saturday, 30 June, Lake Falls, Warburton, Saturday, 28 July. Heathlands, Mornington Peninsula Day Group—Third Thursday in the Month Thursday, 19 April. Train outing to Diamond Creek, Train leaves Princes Bridge at 10,50 We meet in the last carriage; arrive Diamond Creek at 11,51. Thursday, 17 May. Hedgley Deane Gardens, Meet at Central Park Tram ‘Terminus ent Burke & Wattletree Roads at 11.30, Thursday, 21 June. Channel 2, Rippontea. Geology Group Excursions of the Geology Group will be announced at Group Meeting Mammal Survey Group April, (Easter) 13-16. To be decided, March/April 79 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Established 1880 OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists Patron His Excellency the Honorable Sir HENRY WINNEKE, K.C.M.G,, O.B.E.. OC. Key Office-Bearers 1977-1978 President: Dr. BRIAN SMITH, 8 Hunsford Avenue, North Clayton, 3168 (560 8358) Secretary: Miss WENDY CLARK, 27 Rangeview Grove, North Balwyn, 3104 (859 8091) Correspondence to: FNCV, National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004. Treasurer: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Subscription-Secretary: Mr. F. J. KOTH. 71 Smart Street, Hawthorn, 3122. Editor: Mr. R. WALLIS, c/- State College of Victoria—Rusden, Blackburn Road, North Clayton, 3168, 544 8544, Librarian: Mr. J, MARTINDALE, c/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004 Excursion Secretary; Miss M. ALLENDER, 19 Hawthorn Avenue, Caulfield, 3161 (S27 2749) Book Sales Officer: Mr. D, E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Archives Officer: Mr. B. CALLANAN, 29 Reynards Street, Coburg, 3058 (36 0587) Group Secretaries Botany: Mt. CAMERON McCONCHIE, 158 Warrandyte Road, Ringwood, 3134 (870 9986) Day Group: Miss D. M. BELL, 17 Tower Street, Mont Albert, 3127 (89 2850) Geology: Mr. T. SAULT, c/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004° Mammal Survey: Mr. MICHAEL HOWES, 10 Palmer Street, Fitzroy, 3065 Microscopical: Mr. M. H. MEYER, 36 Milroy Street, East Brighton (96 3268) Entomology and Marine Biology: c/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004 FNC¥ Kinglake Nature Reserve: McMahons Road, Kinglake. Bookings and keys: Mr. DICK MORRISON, 788 Elgar Road, Doncaster (848 9148) MEMBERSHIP Membership of the F.N.C.V. is open to any person interested in natural history. The Victorian Naturalistis distributed free to all members, the club’s reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. Subscription rates for 1979 Metropolitan ................,... . tr, Bon wt : ; SWE Sted Bde $12.00 Joint Metropolitan ,........ 2 deal - ard . . Tae tad. S456 Country Members and Retired Persons......_._- ‘ - Pancha : $1000 Joint Country and Joint Retired. . i : 4 ey A AP eee $12.00 SUE ies ata cake ty ct eee pee Fee eee, Se : see ee Nd $2.50 Subscription to Victorian Naturalist... : . ra eT eee $10.00 Overseas Subscription to Victorian Naturalist ‘ ; eh ee ase $12,00 Individual Journals. ...,....,,.. : nels, ose ag ae aa beh Lied te DES TET ane $1.75 All subscriptions should be made payable to the Field Naturalist Club of Victoriaand posted to the Subscription Secretary. @ JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY. LTD., WEST MELBOURNE he victorian ~ naturalist FNCV DIARY OF COMING EVENTS GENERAL MEETINGS At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra Monday, 11 June, 8.00 p.m. ; Special study meeting on Estuarine Flora and Fauna. Speakers from Geology, Botany and Marine Biology groups and the Bird Observers Club. Monday, 9 July, 8.00 p.m. The effects of forestry practices and policy on native fauna. Speakers: Mr. R. Lyon and Mr. M. Macfarlane. Monday, 13 August, 8.00 p.m. Film night (final arrangements still to be made). Subject: South-West Tasmania. Speaker: To be announced. New Members— May General Meeting Ordinary Meeting: Mr. Peter Kelly, 22 First Ave., East Kew, 3101, Mr. Robert Lorenzon, 24 Thackeray St., Elwood. Miss Eve Almond, 44 Hardy Terrace, East Ivanhoe (Native Plants) Miss Pauline Horton, 419C Lygon St., East Brunswick, 3056. Mr. Ken Hamilton, 10 Ellendale St., North Balwyn 3104, Mrs. lvy Harding, 15 Bryson St., Canterbury 3126. Joint: Mr. Jeff Yugovic & Miss Sue McIntyre, 89 Talbot Cres. Kooyong, 3144. Mr. Michael Richards & Ms. E, Richards, 1 Erskine St., Armadale, 3143, FNCV EXCURSIONS Sunday, 1 July. Botanic Gardens at 2 p.m. This will not be an official excursion but the Botanic Gardens are preparing brochures for a winter walk and members might like to do this as a group, meeting together by the Herbarium at 2 p.m. Sunday, 15 July. Annual Boneseed Pulling Day at Studley Park. We have concentrated on small areas each year and the results so far are very encouraging so please come along and lend a hand. Meet at the second picnic ground along the Boulevard, just past Molesworth Street opposite the Kew Psychiatric Hospital at 10 a.m. Members can join in later if unable to be there by 10 a.m. Those going by bus will be met at stop No. 28, Studley Park Road at 10 a.m, and 11 a.m, Sunday, 5 August. Werribee Park and Board of Works Farm at Werribee. The party will go to Werribee Park in the morning, lunch there then reach the Farm at 1.30 p.m. for a guided tour. The coach will leave Batman Ave. at 9.30 a.m, Fare: $5, bring one meal. There is an entrance fee to Werribee Park of $2 adults, 50 cents students and pensioners in addition to the fare. We propose to cross by the Westgate Bridge on one way of the journey. Saturday, 25 August-Thursday, 6 September. Broken Hill. The party will leave from Flin- ders Street outside the Gas and Fuel Corporation at 8.15 a.m. for Mildura where accom- modation has been booked at the Mildura Park Motel for Saturday and Sunday nights. Monday we travel to Broken Hill where we stay at the Royal Exchange Hotel until Tues- day morning, 4th September with day trips to Mootwingee, Kinchega National Park, Menindee Lukes, and other places in the vicinity including mines. The Barrier F.N.C. are helping prepare the itinerary for this period, Tuesday we return to Mildura, Wednesday go on to Swan Hill and arrive back in Melbourne on Thursday, 6 September. All accommoda- tion is on a dinner, bed and breakfast rate and the total cost including bus will be $330 for the thirteen days on present prices, Bookings should be made with the Excursion Secretary accompanied by $30 deposit, the balance to be paid by the end of July. Take a picnic lunch for Saturday and Sunday. Sunday, 2 September. Members are reminded that this will be an open day at the Kinglake property and would be a pleasant excursion for those not going to Broken Hill. A member of the club will be in attendance from 10 a.m, and will organise walks if desired. Private transport is required. Preliminary Notice. Sunday, 13 January—Sunday, 20 January, 1980. Flinders Island. Details of this excursion will be given later. (Continued on page 119) 82 Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 The Victorian Naturalist Volume 96, Number 3 May/June, 1979 Editor: Robert L, Wallis Editorial Committee; Susan Beattie, Margaret Corrick, Reuben Kent, Alison Oates, Brian Smith Mating and Other Aspects of Behaviour in Wild Striped Possums by S. Van Dyck , RA Lordosis in the Northern Blue-Eye Pseudomiueil sienatus (Gunther, 1867) by J, P, Beumer RG Observations on Parturition, Litter Size, and Poetal Development at Birth in the Chocolate Wattled Bat, Chalinolobus morio (Vespertilionidae) by R, A, Young 90 Naturalists of Yesteryear ; 94 Frogs Preyed on by Ants? by Margaret Davies, M, J, Tyler and A, A, Martin Q7 An Examination of the Reptile Mauna at Wyperfield National Park using Pitfall Trapping by P, B, Mather 98 Two Introduced Snail Records for Melbourne by Brian J, Smith 102 Book Reviews 105 The Origin of Generic Names of the Vietoriuan Flora by James A, Baines , , 107 Reports of FNCV Activities 114 Cover Hlustration: Adult female striped possum collected at Gordonvale, north-east Old Photo: S. Breeden (Q,Muas,) May/June 63 Mating and other aspects of behaviour in wild striped possums. BY S. VAN DycK* In 1937 A. L. Rand, after observing a captive striped possum over a period of about two months, reached this sad, abrupt conclusion. ‘It was a quiet, rather stupid creature, nocturnal in habits’ (Rand 1937 p.7). Such a misrepresentation of the disposition of striped possums was probably a reflction of the animal’s captivity—in a cage of ©... wire bird-drying trays ...” (p.1) with Rand banging and tapping on the cage top *... which caused the animal to shrink,’ (p.2). Of all possums Dactylopsila trivirgata is probably the most spectacular; not only in its striking black and white appearance but also in its behaviour in the wild. Although uncommon, it is widely distributed in and around vineforested areas from Mt. Spee (nr. Townsville) to the tip of Cape York Peninsula, During recent trips to Cape York Peninsula a number of observa- uions and captures of this species were made, These were at the following localities: Black Mountain (near Kuranda), Steene’s Shack (25 km N. Coen), Attack Creek (45 km N. Coen) and Buthen Buthen (13° 23'S 143° 27' E). Although primarily vineforest animals, striped possums often feed from trees in the adjacent dry wood- lands. One specimen from Buthen Buthen was caught whilst eating in a 3 m Acacia, 400 m from the vineforest edge. The most outstanding feature of striped possums is their agility, Their progress along horizontal branches is characterised by a peculiar deliberate ‘rowing’ motion, as each lanky limb is swung stiffly out and forward. This * Queensland Museum 84 nevertheless results in an extremely lithe gait. The movements of Striped Possums are so fast and unpredictably staccato that if it was not for their ten- dency to be so noisy, their continued observation would be difficult. Breeden and Breeden (1970 p.103) described the possum thus ‘But the Striped Possum is not still for a moment; he leaps and sprints along branches paus- ing briefly to nibble at a fruit here, a leaf there.’ When the rustling, snorting and scratching sounds which accom- pany the possum’s movements cease, the animal’s position can usually be traced by the noises of its slurping and chewing or from the shower of dis- carded food scraps that falls from its perch, From 1] pm to 12 midnight, 18 August 1978 observations were made of those activities surrounding and including the mating of striped possums living in the semi-deciduous mesophyll vineforest which grows along Attack Ck, Cape York Peninsula. Most observations during this time centred around the activities of two males chasing one another over an area of approximately | ha, while a female remained motionless, clinging to a nearby vertical tree trunk. In the course of their pursuits, when each male eventually reached the outer end of the limb along which it was rushing, it either leapt toward a neighbouring tree, hurling itself into leafy branches, or, after a lateral swaggering of the body, leapt from the branch to an over- hanging vine on the next tree. Such long-distance leaps were marked by exact precision, Mating, which lasted approx. 10 mins, took place on a semi-vertical Vic.Nat, Vol. 96 tree trunk and was characterised throughout by continuous rolling, raspy guttoral shrieks resembling ‘“GAR-GAIR, GAR-GAIR.’ The first syllable ‘GAR’, has an upward inflection and is made as the animal inhales, the second syllable ‘GAIR’, is downwardly inflected and produced as the animal exhales. These calls were uttered by both male and female, who during the entire procedure inter- twined and thrashed their tails around, in a manner similar to that seen in dis- gruntled domestic cats, When mating finished, the second male who had been sitting near a Cuscus (Phalanger maculatus) in an adjacent tree, joined the mating male in pursuing the female through the canopy. The males when in close contact threatened one another with loud harsh rasping calls and then finally ignored the female in their preoccupation with pursuing one another, Little is known of the reproduction of wild striped possums. Although in this isolated case, mating took place in late winter, other specimens captured indicate that breeding takes place at much earlier times of the year, The pouch of one 310 g female captured 17 Aug 1978 at Steene’s Shack contained an clongated, milk-producing teat indicating the possibility of her having a well developed nestling young. The pouch of a 390 g female captured at Buthen Buthen 22 Aug 1978 contained two very young hairless female joeys each approx. 50 mm long (H.B.) and weighing 8 g each. A Queensland Museum specimen (J10978) collected 24 June 1959 at Gordonvale had a 94 mm (H.B.) newly furred young. In comparison with development data for other petaurids (Collins 1973), this joey was approx. 80 days old, indicating a mating in early March. A female with one young was collected April 1948 by Brass (1953) at Cairns. This information suggests a long period over which mating may take May/June Vig. 1. Adult female striped possum collected at Gordonvale, north-east Old. Photo: S. Breeden (Q.Mus,) place (Feb, to Aug,), and in relation to its Opportunistic feeding habits may indicate that the reproduction cycle is not geared to wet scason food increases, Acknowledgement | wish to thank Dr, R. Molnar (Queensland Museum) for reading and criticizing this paper, REPERENCES Brass, Lo J., 1953. Results of the Archbold Expedi tion, No, 68 Summary of the 1948 Cape York (Australia) Expedition, Bull Amer. Mus, Hist, 102; Att, 2, pp, 145-206 Breeden, 5S. and Breeden, K,, 1970, Tropical Queensland 262 pp. (Collins Lid) Australia) Collins, L. Ry, 1973, Marsupials in’ captivity, (Smithsonian Institute Press: Washington) Rand, A. L,, 1937, Results of the Archbold expedi- tions No. 17, Some original observations on the habits of Dactylopsila trivirgata Gray, Amer, Mus Novit, 9571-7 85 Lordosis in the Northern Blue-Eye Pseudomugil signatus (Gunther, 1867) BY J. P. BEUMER* Introduction Vertebral abnormalities in fishes are common (Dawson 1971: Hickley 1972). The abnormalities may be manifest in a number of ways including fusion of two or more vertebrae, dis- location of one or more vertebrae, or damage to musculature surrounding normal vertebrae. Two major abnor- malities in the spinal column are readily recognised, lordosis, curvature of the spine with dorso-ventral flexures (Rosenthal and Rosenthal 1950), giv- ing a ‘hump-backed’ appearance, and scoliosis, curvature of the spine with lateral flexures (McGregor and Newcombe 1968), giving a ‘sway- backed’ appearance. Other abnor- malities, e.g. anchylosis, where there may be a fusion of the vertebrae result- ing in a compressed or shortened body, have also been recorded but are less distinct and may be overlooked without detailed examination. Documentation of such abnor- malities in Australian freshwater fishes is lacking. The only record appears to be that of a ‘sway-backed’ Murray cod (Whitley 1961). This paper reports the occurence of lordosis in two specimens of the northern blue-eye, Pseudomugil signatus (Gunther, 1867). In addition, observations on reproduction are recorded. Methods Samples of P.signatus were collected by a combination of fine-mesh stop- *Freshwater Fisheries Section, Arthur Rylah Institute for Environmental Research, Fisheries and Wildlife Division, Heidelberg, Victoria. 3084. 86 nets and a Cybertronic Mark II d-c electric fisher during a two-year study (September, 1972 to August, 1974) of the fish community of the Black — Alice River System, Townsville, North Queensland (Beumer 1976). X-rays were taken of affected specimens on Kodirex film with exposures of 30 Kv and 16 mas. Results A total of 1,527 specimens of P.signatus were collected. Live speci- mens are translucent with the spinal column and alimentary tract being readily visible. Two of the specimens were ‘hump-backed’. These were col- lected in different fortnightly samples but at the same sampling station, approximately 18 km upstream from the mouth. Both specimens were females, measuring 34 mm (12 July, 1974) and 39 mm (9 August, 1974) in total length. None of the vertebrae was malformed. The curvature in each specimen commenced at the 10th abdominal vertebra (Plate 1). The dorso-ventral flexure in each specimen is typical of lordosis. P.signatus was observed spawning among Spirogyra in June of each year of the study. Nine females and one male, collected and examined by the author in May, 1974, had mature gonads. The range of oocyte diameters was 0.1 to 2.0 mm. This large variation in diameter is typi- cal of species with adhesive eggs where protracted spawning occurs. Discussion The causes of the recorded abnor- malities have not been identified in this study. It is possible that these may be Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Plate 1. Pseudomugil signatus specimen (34 mm) with lordosis abnormality. due to a genetic condition (Rosenthal and Rosenthal 1950) although a num- ber of recent studies have linked abnormalities of this type with the use of electric fishing equipment (Hauck 1949; Hopkins 1970; McCrimmon and Bidgood 1967; Spencer 1967), Max- field, Lander and Liscom (1971) sub- jected hatchery rainbow trout to pulsat- ing direct current and found ‘no apparent effect’ on survival, growth, and fecundity, or on the survival and development of their progeny. In con- trast, Marriott (1973) found that eggs from electrically shocked and re- shocked female pink salmon had almost ‘double the mortality’ of those from unshocked or single-shocked females. While the use of an electric fisher for sampling fiish populations is perhaps the method involving least physical damage to the fishes’ habitat as well as being a rapid sampling technique, the effects, both short—and long-term May/June require detailed consideration prior to the commencement of any sampling programme. The effects, although often minimal in terms of the number of specimens likely to be affected, may require the use of the electric fisher to be restricted to certain periods of the life cycle, e.g. non-spawning periods, or may require the use of alternative methods of sampling, particularly when endangered species, e.g. the Australian grayling (Prototroctes maraena Gunther, 1864), or species with the protracted spawning periods such as P.signatus, are being studied. Acknowledgements Thanks are due to Norm Milward, Darwin Evans and Peter Jackson for advice and criticism of the manuscript. Kay Beumer and Paul Mak assisted with field work. The assistance of Joan Dixon and Dave Grant (radiography) and Jim Cooper (photography) is also acknowledged. 87 REFERENCES Beumer, J. P. (1976). The fishes of a tropical river with emphasis on the spangled perch, Therapon unicolor Gunther, 1859, and the East Queens- land rainbowfish, Nemarocentris splendida Peters, 1866. Ph.D. thesis, James Cook University of North Queensland. Dawson, C. E. (1971). A bibliography of anomalies of fishes. Supplement 2. Gulf Res, Repts, 3; 215-239, Hauck, F. R. (1949). Some harmful effects of the electric shocker on large rainbow trout. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 77: 61-64. Hickley, C. R. (1972), Common abnormalities in fishes, their causes and effects. N. Y.Ocean Sci. Lab. Techn, Rept. 0013: 1-20. Hopkins, C. L. (1970). Some aspects of the bionomics of fish in a brown trout nursery stream. Fish. Bull. N.Z. 4: 1:37 Marriott, R. A. (1973). Effects of electric shocking on fertility of mature pink salmon. Progve, Fish. Cult, 35: 191-194, Maxfield, G, H., Lander, R. N. and Liscom, K. L. (1971). Survival, growth, and fecundity of hatchery-reared rainbow trout after exposure to pulsating direct current. Trans. Am. Fish. Soe. 100: 546-552. McCrimmon, H. R. and Bidgood, B. (1965). Abnormal vertebrae in rainbow trout with par- ticular reference to electro-fishing. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 94: 84-88. McGregor, J. F. and Newcombe, H. B. (1968). Major malformations in trout embryos irradiated prior to active organogenesis. Radiat. Res, 35: 282-300. Rosenthal, H. L. and Rosenthal, R. S. (1950). Lordosis, a mutation in the guppy, Labistes reticulatus. J. Hered. 41; 217-218. Spencer, S. L. (1967). Internal injuries to largemouth bass and bluegills caused by elec- tricity. Progve. Fish. Cult. 29: 168-169. Whitley, G. P. (1961). Freak fishes. Aust. Mus, Mag, 13; 298-301. Do you grow these native plants? Work has commenced on an Illustrated Flora of Victoria in which there will be botanical descriptions, illustrations and horticultural information (where known) on each Victorian species. It is intended that the work will be published in parts, in groups of genera. Horticultural information is needed on the Victorian species in the families—Pit- tosporaceae and Ranunculaceae. If any readers can help with their experiences of cultivating any of the species in these families, their assistance would be much appreciated. Joy Martin The National Herbarium of Victoria Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra Victoria, 3141. Ph. 63 7030 or 63 8935 PITTOSPORACEAE-— Victorian species Pittosporum undulatum P. revolutum P. bicolor (Sollya heterophylla) P. phillyreoides v. phillyreoides vy, microcarpa Bursaria lasiophylla v, lasiophylla v. parviflora B. spinosa v. macrophylla v. microphylla v. obovata v, spinosa v. australis Cheiranthera alternifolia C. linearis (or C. cyanea) Billadiera bignoniacea (Marianthus bignoniaceus) B. cymosa B. longiflora x longiflora B. procumbens (Marianthus procumbens) B. scandens y, scandens Sweet Pittosporum Rough-fruit Pittosporum Banyalla Weeping Pittosporum Finger flower Finger flower Orange bell-climber Sweet apple-berry Purple apple-berry White marianth Common apple-berry Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 RANUNCULACEAE —Victorian species Clematis microphylla G “al glvcinoides aristata Caltha introloba Adonis aestivalis Myosurus minimus Ranunculus collinus R. *R DSS RR REAR * * AAD DAADA * a> » . repens . rivularis . robertsonii . sardous . scapigera "KR . sessiliflorus v. sessiliflorus eichleranus flammula . glabrifolius . graniticola . gunnianus . inundanes . ligulatus . lappaceus . lingua . millani . muelleri . muricatus . ophioglossifolius . pachycarpus . pentandrus . papulentus . parviflorus . pimpinellifolius . plebius . pumilio v. pumilio v. politus scleratus v. pilulifera . (richophyllus . trilobus . undosus R. vicloriensis Small-leaved Clematis Forest Clematis Australian Clematis Alpine marsh-marigold Pheasant’s-eye Adonis Mousetail Strawberry Buttercup Eichler’s Buttercup Lesser Spearwort Shining Buttercup Granite Buttercup Gunn’s Alpine Buttercup River Buttercup Tongue Buttercup Australian Buttercup Dwarf Buttercup Felted Buttercup Sharp Buttercup Snake-tongue Buttercup Thick-fruit Buttercup Inland Buttercup Large River Buttercup Small-flower Buttercup Bog Buttercup Forest Buttercup Ferny small-flower Buttercup Creeping Buttercup Small River Buttercup Slender Buttercup Pale Hairy Buttercup Celery Buttercup Australian small-flower Buttercup Water Buttercup Buttercup Victorian Buttercup May/June CULTIVATION OF NATIVE PLANTS Habitat requirements: soil type; soil moisture/drainage; sun/shade; wind/ shelter; cool root run. Horticultural uses: screening or windbreak; specimen plant; rockeries; containers. Maintenance: fertiliser; flowering time; pruning; pests and diseases; longeuity. Propagation: collection of seed—how/when? germination of seed—how successful? from cuttings—how successful? by divi- sion. Hybridisation: any known hybrids. Economic uses: honey; timber; medicines and herbs. 89 Observations on Parturition, Litter Size, and Foetal Development at Birth in the Chocolate Wattled Bat, Chalinolobus morio (Vespertilionidae) BY R. A. YOUNG* Introduction The majority of Australia’s insec- tivorous bats give birth to one or two young during a single parturition period in the spring or summer of each year (McKean and Hamilton-Smith, 1967). Observations on parturition in bats are few and in most instances these observations were made on bats held in captivity. However, the review by Wimsatt (1960) provides a number of interesting generalizations regarding parturtion in bats: The foetus is presented in the breech position in many vespertilionids and in some molossid bats, whereas head pre- sentation appears to be common in the families Rhinolophidae and Pteropidae. Both types of presentation occur in the family Phyllostomatidae (Bhatnagar, 1978). The practice of eating the afterbirth (placentophagia) by the female is com- mon in the family Vespertilionidae, but variable in occurrence in other families. Bats are very large at birth; a single young may be 25% of the postpartum weight of the female, whereas the com- bined weight of twins can exceed 30% of the mother’s weight, Study Site The following observations on Chalinolobus morio were conducted in 1973 at an attic nursery site, located if * Darling Downs Institute of Advanced Education, Baker Street, Toowoomba, Queensland. 4350. 90 Bunya Mountains (lat. 27° 75' S; long. 151° 58’ E; elevation 1050 m), Queens- land. Parturition At 1320 hours (E.S.T.) on 20 Octo- ber, 1973, a female was observed in the early stages of parturition. The foetus was in the breech position with the legs, tail and lower rump protruding from the vagina. Portions of the rup- tured amnion were also extending from the birth canal. The female was in the ‘vespertilionid parturition position’. She was sus- pended by both feet and the left thumb so that the head was directed upwards. The tail and uropatagium were sharply recurved towards the abdomen and the right wing was partially enclosing the body. At 1330 hours the foetus was delivered into the pouched uropatagium. The final stages of deliv- ery were probably aided by the flexing action of the legs and lower torso of the foetus. Immediately after delivery the neonate crawled, without any assis- tance from the female, to the right mammary gland and attached to the teat. The neonate remained attached to the undelivered placenta via the umbilicus for 80 minutes after birth, During this time the female periodically engaged in an intensive grooming sequence which usually com- menced with gentle licking of the neo- nate followed by vigorous chewing and licking of the vaginal region and uropatagium, Eighty minutes after Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Table 1. Measurements of Chalinolobus morio at birth compared with adult females. October, 1973. Parameter Mother Neonate Age of neonate (hours) — 80 Total length (mim) 96.6* 45.2 Forearm length (mm) 37.6** 13.3 Wingspan (mm) 266.5* 92.5 Nett weight (gm) 8.0 2.0 * Mean of 3 post-partum females ** Mean of 32 adult females, birth the placenta and attached membranes were pulled from the vagina and eaten by the female. The umbilicus was severed in the process. The female remained in the parturition position during the entire period. After the umbilicus was severed the female was collected in order to measure and weigh the neonate. Breech presentation results in the head of the foetus being orientated towards the mammary glands at birth and therefore minimizes the number of manoeuvres required in order to reach the teats, This feature of parturi- tion, together with the posture of the female during delivery and the persis- tent umbilicus, minimizes the risk of the neonate becoming detached from the female. Development of the Foetus at Birth At birth, chocolate wattled bats appear naked to the unaided eye, except for a few long hairs on the face and the chin. The skin of the body is pink in colour, whereas the tail and wing membranes are darkly pigmented. The eyes are closed and the ear pinnae are folded forward against the head. Neonates are capable of co-ordinated crawling movements at birth and often produce a faint ‘cluck-cluck’ sound when removed from the mother. In Chalinolobus morio, the young are born with 22 deciduous (milk) teeth. The deciduous dental formula is ae | 2— 3 op Pm 5 22 May/June Individual Mother Neonate Mother Neonate Neonate _ 240 - 180-240 180-240 ORS 44.0 96,6* - _ 37,6** 13.3 37.6** 11.6 11S 274.0 92.1 266,5* _ _ 8.2 19 R.5 ips) 14 The deciduous teeth, particularly the incisors, are very different in structure from the permanent teeth. The trilobed and recurved milk incisors probably assist the neonate in clinging to the teat or fur of the female (Allen, 1939), The size of the foetuses at birth com- pared with adult females is given in Table 1. Single foetuses are approx- imately 25% of the mother’s weight, whereas the combined weight of twins is about 35% of the adult weight. Litter Size In south-eastern Queensland, C. morio produces a single litter of one or two young each year. In 1973, 50% (n = 24) of females examined in Septem- ber and October had twin embryos in the uteri. All of the single embryos were present in the right uterus. Acknowledgements I wish to thank L. Rice, Queensland National Parks and Wildlife Service, for his patience and assistance during the study; Helen Young for assistance in the field and Aileen Payne for typing the manuscript. REFERENCES Allen, G. M, 1939, Bats. Dover Publications, New York, 358 pp. Bhatnagar, K. P. 1978, Breech presentation in the hairy-legged vampire, Diphylla ecaudata. J. Mamm., 59: 864-866. McKean J. L., and E. Hamilton-Smith. 1967. Litter size and maternity sites in Australian bats (Chiroptera), Vict. Nat, 84; 203-206, Wimsatt, W. A. 1960. An analysis of parturition in Chiroptera, including new observations on Myotis |. lucifugus. J. Mamm., 41; 183-200. 91 The Comparative Effectiveness of Drift Fence Pitfall Trapping and Conventional Cage Trapping of Vertebrates in the Big Desert, North-Western Victoria. BY A. COCKBURN‘, M, FLEMING*, AND J, WAINERt Summary Drift-fence pitfall trapping in the Big Desert in N.W. Victoria proved to be a more effective means of survey of small terrestrial vertebrates than was cage trapping. There were 17 species pitfall trapped but not cage trapped, whereas only two species, the hopping mouse Nofomys mitchelli and a large scincid lizard Tiliqua rugosa, were cage trapped but not pitfall trapped. Introduction Australian small mammals, such as dasyurids, rodents and burramyids, are rarely seen because of their secretive nocturnal habits. Many other verte- brates, including frogs, lizards and small nocturnal snakes are likewise infrequently sighted. Thus traditional survey techniques in Australia, have used baited cage traps, either wire mesh or sheet aluminium (*‘Elliott” type), or snapback traps. Although there is anecdotal information regard- ing the trappability of various small mammals, no Australian studies have made long-term comparisons of techni- ques, though Fox and Posamentier (1976) investigated responses to different types of trap. Recent alternative approaches to vertebrate survey have included the identification of hair and bone frag- ments in the scats of predators (e.g. Brunner ef a/., 1975; Brunner er al., 1976; Brunner ef al., 1977), hair sam- pling tubes (Suckling, 1978), and pit- fall traps. Pitfall trapping, although well “Department of Zoology, Monash University, Clayton, Vic. 3168. tDepartment of Zoology, Melbourne University, Parkville. 3052 92 established elsewhere (e.g. Andrze- jewski and Wroclawek, 1963; Chelkowska, 1967), has only recently been employed in Australia, and has already extended the known range of species of dasyurids and burramyids in South Australia (Aitken, 1977; Barritt, 1978: Aslin, 1976). This study reports the results of a vertebrate survey extending over two years in mallee heath vegetation in the Big Desert of Victoria, using both drift- fence pitfall trapping and conventional trapping. Methods a) Location A trapping grid and pitfall lines were established adjacent to No. 2 Bore on the Murrayville to Nhill Road (35° 51’ S, 141° 24’ E) in the Big Desert of N.W. Victoria. The site is approximately 15 km N. of Broken Bucket Bore (35° 45' S, 141° 24’ E) and 15 km S. of Moon- light Tank (35° 45'S, 141° 22' E), two localities at which less intensive pitfall trapping took place. b) Vegetation The vegetation of the area is a diverse community of heath species (Cockburn, in prep.) to a height of 1 m, with scattered mallee eucalypts (Eucalyptus incrassata and E. foecunda) up to 5 min height. The overall cover is sparse, but there are dense patches of Triodia irritans, Casuarina muellerana, Adenanthos terminalis, Leptospermum laevigatum, L. myrsinoides and Astroloma conostephioides. c) Trapping technique The trapping grid consisted of 12 rows of 10 sites, any two adjacent sites being 25 m apart. A small Elliott trap baited with peanut paste and rolled oats mix- ture was set at each site for four con- secutive nights during each trapping Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Table 1. Vertebrates pitfall trapped at No. 2 Bore, Murrayville Track, Big Desert. 20ct. 7Noy, I8Apr. 17 June 2 Au 8Oct, 27Dec. 5Feb 1976 1976 1977 1977 1977 ~—«1977 19771978 Amphibians Leptodactylidae Limnodynastes dumerilii e e e Neobatrachus centralis e e e Reptiles Agamidae Amphibolurus fordi e e e e e A, pictus e e e Scincidae Crenotus robustus e C. schomburgkii « e e e ) C. uber orientalis e e Lerista bougainvillii e Menetia greyi e Morethia obscura e e Elapidae Echiopsis curta e Unechis brevicauda e Mammals Dasyuridae Ningaui sp. e e ® Sminthopsis murina e Burramyidae Cercartetus concinnus e e C. lepidus t e Muridae Mus musculus e Pseudomys apodemoides e e e ° Table 2. Vertebrates trapped in Elliott cage traps at ‘‘No. 2”? Bore, Murrayville Track, Big Desert (Captures in 6480 trap nights). Species Captures Reptiles Scincidae Ctenotus schomburgkii 1 Tiliqua rugosa 2: Birds Pachycephalidae Colluricincla harmonica ] Sylviidae Sericornis cauta 4 Mammals Dasyuridae Sminthopsis murina 1 Muridae Mus musculus 22 Notomys mitchellii 55 Pseudomys apodemoides 502 May/June 93 Table 3. Vertebrates pitfall trapped at two other localities in the Big Desert. “Broken Moon- Bucket” light Bore Tank Reptiles Gekkonidae Diplodactylus vittatus e e Phyllodactylus marmoratus e 7 Scincidae Crenotus robustus e e C. schomburgkii e — Elapidae Drysdalia mastersi _ e Mammals Dasyuridae Ningaui sp. e — session. The results are based on a total of 6,480 trap-nights. Three different pitfall traps were employed. Insect pitfalls consisting of 1 / glass jars, with a mouth diameter of 8 cm, containing preserving fluid were left open for one to three months. A fly wire drift fence (0.5 m x 100 m) was used in conjunction with seven 20 / steel drums as pitfalls. The fence was laid in a straight line and straddled the pits, which were spaced regularly. A smaller drift-fence pitfall system was made from PVC waste paper pipe (0.1 x 0.45 m) and the PVC damp course (0.12 x 50 m). The drift-fence and pit- falls were unbaited and checked each morning and evening. The results are based on the use of the drift-fence pit- fall system for a minimum of four nights on eight occasions. Results Table 1 records the vertebrates pitfall trapped, with their dates of capture. Table 2 lists the vertebrates live-trap- ped with Elliott traps, with an indica- tion of trapping frequency. Table 3 records results of less intensive pitfall trapping at two other nearby localities in. the Big Desert. Discussion Of a total of 23 species recorded, 21 were pitfall trapped and five were Elliott trapped. The two species of frog 94 were recorded only in pitfall traps. They are probably the only species of frogs occurring in the Big Desert sandridge landform and appear to be active on the surface at all times of the year after heavy rain. Although the reptile fauna of the area is no doubt far more extensive, 13 species were pitfall trapped, two species were Elliott trap- ped and a further three species (Varanus varius, Amphibolurus muricatus and Delma australis) were encountered but not trapped. Thus drift-fence pitfall trapping which does not require any specific attraction of animals to traps, is an effective means of amphibian and reptile survey. The hopping mouse, Nofomys mitchelli was the only mammal Elliott trapped and not pitfall trapped. As its name suggests it is saltatorial and capa- ble of jumping out of the pitfall traps used. Conversely the two species of Cercartetus, and Ningaui sp. were taken only in pitfall traps. C. concinnus, the western pigmy possum, is typically a dry forest and mallee species (Wakefield, 1963); C. lepidus, the little pigmy possum, until recently was con- sidered a denizen of more mesic areas in Tasmania (Wakefield, 1963), but is now known to occur also on Kangaroo Island (Aitken, 1970, 1974), in S.E. South Australia (Aitken, 1977), and in N.W. Victoria (Dixon, 1978). Our records of C. lepidus are the 2nd and 3rd for the state. Ningaui is a genus of small mar- supial mice close to Planigale and Sminthopsis (Archer, 1975). The four specimens recorded here, the first taken in Victoria, appear to belong to the undescribed species taken in semi- arid areas in southern South Australia (Aslin, 1976; Aitken, pers. comm.) and §,W. New South Wales (D. Black, pers. comm.). The two localities in the Big Desert at which Ningaui was trap- ped are 15 km apart, one in uncommit- ted crown land and the other in a small reserve of the Department of Crown Lands and Survey. The first locality is in an area used for mobile military training, but both localities show evi- dence of recent off-road heavy vehicle activity. Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Acknowledgement Angus Martin is gratefully acknowledged for his helpful com- ments on the manuscript. REFERENCES Aitken, P. F. (1970). Cercartetus lepidus (Thomas) an addition to the fauna of Kangaroo Island. Rec. S, Aust. Mus. 15:575-6. (1974). The Little Pigmy Possum Cercartetus lepidus (Thomas) on Kangaroo eae, South Australia. Sourh Aust. Nat, 48:36- (1977). The Little Pigmy Possum Cercartetus lepidus (Thomas) found living on the Australian mainland. Sourh Aust. Nat. 51:63-6. Andrzejewski, R., and Wroclawek, H. (1963). Metal cylinder as a live trap with a bait. Acra Theriologica, 6:297-300. Archer, M. (1975). Ningaui, a new genus of tiny dasyurids (Marsupialia) and two new species, N, timealeyi and N. ridei, from arid Western Australia. Mem, Qld. Mus, 17:237-49, Aslin, H. J. (1976). Discovery of a new dasyurid marsupial in South Australia. South Aust. Nat. 50:39-4). Barritt, M. K. (1978). Two further specimens of the Little Pigmy Possum Cercartetus lepidtis (Thomas) from the Australian mainland. Sourh Aust. Nat. 53:12-3, Brunner, H., Lloyd, J. W., and Coman, B. J. (1975). Fox scat analysis in a forest park in rik Si Australia. Aust. Wildl. Res. 2:147- Brunner, H., Amor, R. L., and Stevens, P. L. (1976). The use of predator scat analysis at Dartmouth in north-eastern Victoria. Aust. Wildl. Res. 3:85-90, Brunner, H., Wallis, R. L., and Voutier, P. F. (1977). Locating and trapping the Broad- Toothed Rat (Mastacomys fuscus Thomas) at Powelltown. Victorian Nat. 94:207-10. Chelkowska, H. (1967), An attempt at comparing two methods of trapping small rodents (in pit- falls and live traps). Ekol. Pol. A. 15:779-85, Cockburn, A. (in prep,) Habitat selection by Pseudonys apodemoides, Finlayson 1932 in Vic- toria, Dixon, J. M. (1978). The first Victorian and other Victorian records of the Little Pigmy Possum, Cercartetus lepidus (Thomas), Victorian Nat. 95:4-7. Fox, B. J., and Posamentier, H. G. (1976). Rela- tive efficiency of two types of small mammal trap in eastern Australia. Austr Zool. 1919-22. Suckling, G, C, (1978), A hair sampling tube for detection of small mammals in trees. Aus. Wildl. Res, 5:249-52 Wakefield, N. A. (1963). The Australian Pigmy Possums. Vicrorian Nat. 80:99-116. Naturalists of Yesteryear A paper presented to the F.N.C. on February, 11th, 1884 gave an account of ‘‘a Holiday on Cup Day spent on Mount Cor- tanwarrabul, rather than on the hill at Flemington’’.(1:19). The paper describes flowers at Warrandyte Station (Patersonia glauca—with perianth one inch in diameter which could not be found in the evening, as the flowers had closed) and also in the Dan- denongs. The author noted how a Mr. Singleton sends heliograph messages from his country house on Mt. Corranwarrabul to his residence in Malvern, Messrs French and Best describe a F.N.C. excursion to Frankston undertaken on Ist July, 1884. They found it difficult to under- stand how people could not enjoy such an outing ... “‘the day was all that could be desired, the sun shone out brightly, and a mild breeze prevailed which rendered walk- ing not only exceedingly agreeable but a positive pleasure, indeed one must have been of a most lazy and indolent nature who could not appreciate all the advantages to health and mind, to be derived ... ”’. They May/June found the train journey ‘‘somewhat monotonous ..., so far as scenery is con- cerned, especially after we leave Brighton. The country presents nothing worthy of note, for after passing Mordialloc, the train skirts so close to the beach on one side and the wretched looking Carrum swamp on the other, that nothing is to be seen but the everlasting tea-tree, Melaleuca ericifolia, and the common Coast Honeysuckle, Banksia integrifolia, and the station master here, (unless he be of a particular romantic turn of mind), must indeed have anything but a lively time of it.” The authors subsequently decry the onset of civilisation in the area. Thirty years pre- viously, their collecting trips at Frankston were only disturbed by sounds of ‘‘cattle, bullock bells, or perhaps the yabbering of a stray blackfellow and his lady”’, remnants of the ‘‘fast disappearing Mordialloc tribe, who used to frequent the Kananook Creek for the purpose of spearing eels ...”’. The members were fascinated by a 17 foot high Tuwarrow cactus (Cereus gigantus) 95 imported from Mexico and growing 3 miles from Frankston, Also of interest was the Adder’s tongue fern (Ophioglossum vuleatum, Whilst the sportsmen of the party “brought down” a Scarlet-breasted Robin, and a White-eared Honey-eater, a Har- monius Strike Thrush and a spine-bill! (/:98 and 112), A plea Was made for squatters and other country readers of the ‘‘Naturalist’’ to pro- vide information on observations of “sense’’ shown by Australian marsupials and monotremes. This would add valuable data on the “lowest mammals’? for Dr, Romanes’ work on Animal Intelligence (in addition to all Darwin's notes on this subject which that eminent biologist has handed over to Dr. Romanes). (/:96), In May, 1885 (2:13) there was a report of the Rev, A. Cresswell’s lecture on some of the ‘‘Larger Extinct Animals of Australasia”. He reminded readers of the well-known laws connected with the geographical distribution of animals, accord- ing to which i) every large continental division of the earth has a certain class of existing animals which are more or less peculiar to or charac- teristic of it; and ii) the fossil remains of the animals found in the most recent Tertiary deposits of every such *‘Zoological Province” indicate a pre- existant group of animals of the same types as are now living there, only for the most part on a very gigantic scale. He then gave details of some fossil “giant’” marsupials (Macropus titans, M. atlas), Procoptodon, Diprotodons (the ancient “representatives of a little native bear’’, but were as large as a rhinoceros, and being, of course, unable to climb up trees, used to pull them down ...), Thylacaleo and several New Zealand birds. The lecture was well illustrated by diagrams and skulls of recent animals. Rev. Cresswell also described how great palaeontologists were able to predict an animal’s natural history from ‘‘a single fragment of bone’’, The conclusion of the lecturette consisted of a quotation of Prof. Owen’s testimony in favour of the Theistic position as against materialism, as the result of his study of Palaeontology. In the Fifth Annual Conservazione of the Club (April, 1885) the President Rey. J. J. Halley made mention of how the F.N.C. Bot habe participation by women in the study of natural history: ‘Other societies have invited ladies to grace and add sweet- 96 ness and lustre to annual gatherings, or occasionally, in a kind of superior patronis- ing way, have arranged special evenings when more serious work was dispensed with, und curious or pretty things were shown or said, fitted lo what was evidently deemed the taste of weaker intellects, but not only thus we meet on gala days in festive dress, but to share with us in honourable toil, side by side to delve in intellectual mines—to make common explorations into undiscovered lands of science—to strive to make nature give up her secrets, recognising in the fullest sense a common inheritance and a common right’’, Furthermore, the President stressed the aim of the Club was the popularisation and domestication of science. This aim could partly be met by fostering a love for nature and by participa- rion in field work, (2:3). In the same volume (2:20) A. H. Lucas presented an interesting account of Charles Darwin's visit to Australia, Although Dar- win made many interesting observations (one was his pondering over the mystery of infection to account for the declining num- bers of aborigines—in days long before the germ—theory of zymotic diseases had been broached), he was rather unimpressed by Australia’s scenery, natural history and “awful convict atmosphere”’ of a station at which he was guest. Darwin was doubtless worn out by his arduous Beagle trip, but Lucas believed that Australian natural history had **been hindered in its develop- ment probably for years—by the publication of this chapter by the great authority”, On Sept. 14th, 1885 the Rev. W. Woolls delivered a paper on “‘The Sanitary Proper- ties of Eucalypts’* (2:84) in which he noted the great powers of Eucalypt trees to absorb walter, In particular, he observed that £, globulus ““has the property of mitigating the influences of malaria’. He refers to a writer in an English periodical who ‘‘gives it as his opinion that a large Eucalypt will dispose of a vast amount of house sewage, and thus prevent the development of typhoid fever und other diseases which are supposed to arise from imperfection of drainage and impurity of atmosphere.’’ Rev. Woolls warned, however, of planting Eucalypts too close to wells, as the insatiable thirst of these Vegelable monsters (Eucalypts) has a ten- dency to dry up the sources of supply’’. He then listed eight useful species of Eucalyptus and their characteristics. (2:84). (To be continued) Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Frogs Preyed on by Ants? BY MARGARET DaAvigs*, M. J. TYLER* AND A. A. MARTINt Athough frogs are predators of ter- restrial arthropods there are occasions when the predator/prey relationship is reversed, and frogs are preyed upon by creatures generally forming part of their prey. Littlejohn and Wainer (1978) listed five published reports of spiders and mantids preying upon frogs in Australia, and also reported their observations of predation by large carabid beetles (Catadromus lacordairei Boisduval) upon the spotted marsh frog Limnodynastes tasmaniensis Gunther and the brown tree frog Litoria ewingi (Duméril and Bibron). In November-December 1978 we visited the East Alligator River Region, N.T. and undertook field studies on the frog fauna. On December 1 we col- lected along the bed of a shallow creek at Birndu, between Jabiru and Oen- pelli, and observed large numbers of recently-metamorphosed frogs, Litoria meiriana (Tyler), upon the damp sand and wet rock at the edge of the water. The young frogs were small (snout- vent lengths of 16 frogs range from 8,3 to 11.0 mm), and their vulnerability to predation was clearly very high. Upon a damp rock face at the western edge of the Arnhem Land escarpment * Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide, G.P.O. Box 498, Adelaide, S.A. 5001. + Department of Zoology, University of Melbourne, Parkville, Vic. 3052. May/June we found a dead frog being carried away by seven ants. Three of the ants and the frog were collected and preserved in 75% alcohol. The ants are representatives of Oecophylla smarag- dina F., a tree nesting species charac- terised by its pale green abdomen and by its aggression. The ants transporting the L.meiriana had body lengths of approximately 8 mm, whereas the juvenile frog was 10.8 mm long. The frog was extensively lacerated, with a large patch of skin missing from the posterior part of the dorsum. Although we did not witness the actual capture of the frog, the-ferocity of the ants, and their abundance upon the ground within the area occupied by the frogs indicate that such predation may be a common occurrence. Previously ants have been reported to feed upon frog spawn (Tyler 1976), but we are unaware of any record involving the predation of ants upon frogs. Fieldwork was supported by an Australian Research Grants Commit- tee grant to M. J. Tyler, and by the Office of the Supervising Scientist, East Alligator River Region. REFERENCES Littlejohn, M. J., and Wainer, J. W. (1978) Carabid beelle preying on frogs. Victorian Nat. 95:251-252, Tyler, M. J. (1976) Frogs. Williams Collins, Sydney. 97 An Examination of the Reptile Fauna of Wyperfeld National Park using Pitfall Trapping BY P. B. MATHER* Introduction Reptile surveys have usually been conducted using the traditional method of hand capture, There have been few reports of studies employing the pitfall technique (Heatwole, 1976), This study was part of a general study into the effeets of fire on fauna in north-west Victoria, conducted by the Victorian National Parks and Wildlife Service. The areas selected for examination were all part of the exist- ing Wyperfeld National Park in north- west Victoria or areas adjacent to the park which are soon to be incorporated into the park boundaries, (see inset on Fig. 1). The aim of this study was to provide information on reptile species in the park, the species present, their relative densities and the relationships between the species and their habitats. In addi- tion it was hoped that by selecting areas with different fire histories, informa- ion would be available on possible effects of fire on reptiles in the park. This study was not designed as a com- plete reptile survey of the area. Many habitat types were not included in the sites investigated and a complete survey would have to include intensive work in these habitats, Materials and Methods Specimens were collected using a series of pitfall trap/drift fence lines in eight habitats within the park bound- aries, Pitfall traps consisted of plastic buckets buried to their necks in lines of 30 at 5 metre intervals, Drift fences were constructed between buckets. They consisted of black plastic sheets, approximately 40 cms. high, held erect by aluminium wire pegs. * Zoology Dept Latrobe University, Melbourne, Victoria 98 Sites were numbered from 1 to 8, and trap lines were examined once each day. Gross vegetation analysis of the eight sites were as follows: — Site 1, Mallee eucalypts over fairly dense shrub layer of Calvtrix letragona Site 2. Mallee eucalypts and fairly dense senescent 7riodia Site 3. Leptospermum coriaceum heath Site 4. Big desert dune; mallee eucalypts with ground cover of Acacia and Melaleuca Site 5, Broombush shrubland with occasional mallee eucalypts 6. Banksia ornata heath with Triodia and Melaleuca Site 7. Yellow gum flat with sparse Triodia Site 8. Mallee eucalypts over dense Triodia and Leptospermum coriaceum. Site Figure | contains a map of Wyperfeld National Park and surrounds. The loca- tions of the eight sites are marked. These sites were selected prior to the commencement of this reptile study to be used for bird and vegetation analysis by the National Parks and Wildlife Ser- vice as part of the north-west fire study, Results A total of 633 specimens were removed from the eight trap lines be- tween 17.x.78 and 10.xi.78. Twenty trap days were recorded for each site after adjustments were made for time taken to install and remove traplines. Twenty-seven species of reptiles from seven families and three species of amphibians were recovered from the pitfalls or were sighted in or near trap areas. Vic.Nat. Vol, 96 Vig. |. Wyperfeld National Park Table | contains a list of specimens which were collected together with a list of the number of individuals of each species collected from each site, Summations are presented of the total number of each species collected (A) and the number of specimens taken from each of the eight sites (B), Discussion Five species of reptile were con- sidered to be relatively common in trap areas, excluding large species such as Tiliqua rugosa, Pseudonaja textilis and Varanus gouldii which are wide-ranging species encountered throughout the park. The five species were Amphibolurus fordi, A, pictus, Clenotus schomburgkii, Morethia obscura and Lucasium damaeum, Together they account for approximately 60% of the total captures. A, fordi provided approximately 40% of total captures, The majority of species were collected in low numbers and this was assumed to reflect their relative densities in the wild, May/June Legend Mm osites KN PA KN WMST PIAL Fires 1481 fires \WWG fitee Two sites (6 and &) provided approx. imately 60% of all individuals captured, The two. siles have one important feature in common, fairly well developed dense Triodia, Triodia appears to affeet the density and diver: sity of reptile species in this habitat, Areas with 7riodia had the highest dene sity and number of reptile species, Two broad reptile species “come munities’’ were recognised relative to the dominant vegetation, (a) Triodia community and (b) Broombush com- munity, Species belonging to the first type included Cvrenotus brachyonyx, Menetia greyi, Drysdalia mastersii and Amphibolurus ford. Species belonging, to the second group included Lgernia inornata, Clenotus robustus, Ctenotus uber, Lucasium damaeum and to lesser extent Amphibolurus pictis, The two ‘communities’? are not mutually exclusive bul refer to preferred habitat measured by relative densities, It is difficult to discuss effects of fire as areas investigated were not com- 99 Table | Number of Individuals Collected from Each Site | Amphibolurus — fordi 0 muricatus 0) nobbi | pictus 0 vitticeps - Ctenotus brachyonyx 0 robustus 0) schomburgkii | uber Egernia inornata l Lerista bougain villii 0 Morethia boulengeri obscura 10 Menetia greyi | Tiliqua occupitalis - rugosa - Aprasia inaurita 0 Delma australis 0 Lialis burtoni 0 Lucasium damaeum 5 Diplodactylus intermedius 0 vittatus 6 Phyllodactylus | marmoratus 0 Drysdalia mastersii 0 Pseudonaja textilis - Unechis brevicauda 0 Typhlina australis 0 Varanus gouldii - Limnodynastes dumerilli 0 Neobatrachus pictus 0 centralis 0 TOTAL B 45) parable except in gross vegetation detail. However broad observations are possible. Two major fires have occur- red in the park; one in 1946 and the other in 1959. Three sites were located in unburnt areas and five sites were in 1959 fires areas (see fig. 1). There appears to be a greater diversity (measured by the number of species, and density of reptile species) in 1959 fire areas. However this could be related to the fact that there are more Triodia sites in the 1959 fire area. Pitfall trapping with drift-fences is a method of reptile collection which has been very littke used in Australia. Although this technique cannot possi- bly account for every species of reptile present in an area, it would appear that 100 2 3 4 5 6 6(a) & TOTALA 15-0 SO" ‘@ 14528 sOstealz? We OF OF Ue 2a See ieee + ene Pe: ae es PO 0 G. thels (gor 2a as 5. De Oey Ng ae Fass Qi ce 22" Ga pee ee ene U0: 66. VW 83 Ui Saar 205 05 559 06 Oy Se Oemees O05 Ql <4. AU st) Us eG So lee a Mee ad rt Sed Riverine country only GO 2 Die Se ele eee O “0 oO eee G02 42 70" a0 a 12 G” 02 20.2 40% 0: smal amend Oy 320) +0: | (0 SOS ones Ce aly 0 OR OLS Gee DierOr sO: or CeO Ohne oer: O (04°20) 0 se Cee 0. 2: 70: Sale 2 SO Coa Or, Oy “OF: Oeil One 43 5 48 78 23954 141 633 in this habitat type, it provides an effective method of capture for a large number of the smaller reptile species. A complete census of the reptile fauna of Wyperfeld National Park would involve other capture methods, as well as an examination of all habitat types. Acknowledgements I would like to thank the Victorian National Parks and Wildlife Service for funding this project and in particular Mr. Arnis Heislers for his support. I would also like to thank Mr. A. J. Coventry and Ms. J. M. Hughes for their help with the manuscript and their valuable encouragement through- out this project. Vic.Nat. Vol, 96 REFERENCES Brooks, A. J, (1975). The distribution of Anuran amphibians in Victoria, Merorian Nat, 92:6 Cogger, H. G. (1975). Reptiles and Amphibians of Australia, Reed, Sydney Coventry, Ao J, (1971), Identification of black. headed snakes (Denisonia) within Vietoria, bi torian Nat, 88:11 Gilmore, A, M. and MeVieur, J. M. (1973), Report on the reptiles of the Victorian Mallee from the collections and archives of the National Museum of Vietoria, Land Conservation Coun el Report Heathwole, H, (1976), Reptile ecology, University of Queens, Press. Brisbane Rawlinson, PA. (1966), Reptiles of the Vietorian mallee, Proc, KR. Soe. Viet, 794part 2 Rawlinson, P, A. (1971), Reptiles of Viet In. VI Arnold (hd). Kietorian Year Book 85: Melb Rawlinson, PA. (1975). The endemic Australian penus Moretia (Scincidae: Lygosominae) in southern Australian, Mem Nam Mus. Vien, 7 2242 A Note from the Editor As the new editor of the Victorian Naturalist’ | think it is important to com- ment on the role of the magazine and to outline some plans and policies, As the official organ of the P.N.C.V. the “Naturalist’’ should reflect the Club's aims and philosophy. It should be a vehicle for communications about natural history, club activities, requests for information and other items of relevant natural history. Several people have made comments to me recently that they considered the “Naturalist” was becoming loo “‘scien- tifically oriented.”’ The scientific method and those of natural history are not mutually exclusive. Indeed, a past president of the F.N.C.V. once claimed the Club aimed to ‘““popularise and domesticate science’’, Charles Darwin was a brilliant naturalist who demonstrated powers of observation and description on a very wide range of topics; he was also one of the greatest biologists the world has known, Norman Wakefield was another example of a man who was both a very able naturalist and scientist. lam convinced most of the dissatisfaction regarding “‘scientifically oriented’’ articles arises from their incomprehensibility rather than the topics that they cover. It is, I believe, the duty of scientists to report their findings in a clear interesting, meaningful and understandable manner, Authors sub. mitting articles for publication in the Vic torian Naturalist should remember that the readers of our journal are nol specialists; thus undue specialized knowledge of jargon and techniques cannot be assumed. May/June Arucles submitted for publication will be refereed to by at least one specialist in the field to ensure they meet the criteria of acceplability regarding accuracy, come prehension, interest and relevance, | would thus appreciate authors forwarding two copies of their manuseript (preferably typed with double spacing) | would also urge readers to submit natural history notes for inclusion in the journal, Notes are generally not refereed and may report interesting observations or experiences Of natural history which are often not only simply interesting, but often of great value to science! The “Naturalist” is also a vehicle for requests for information and for book reviews; readers are invited to supply such details directly to the editor One new feature which occurs in this issue of Vie. Nat and which, | hope, will be a regular feature, is a collection of reports taken from early editions of the “Naturalist”. The old issues of the journal contain some fine instances of natural history reporting—as well as extremely interesting descriptions of the Victoria of yesteryear, This issue contains items leaned from the first two volumes (1884- 5), future issues will deal with sequential volumes, Special issues of the Victorian Naturalist will again be produced at irregular intervals, ‘Topics planned for the future include “The Arid Zones” and “Exotic Species” hditor Robert 1, Wallis 101 Two Introduced Snail Records for Melbourne BY BRIAN J. SMITH Two species of introduced snails, not previously seen in the Melbourne suburbs, were recently identified from the metropolitan area. The purpose of this note is to record the presence of these species and alert members to these animals and request further records of these or any other snails and slugs in Melbourne gardens for a survey of this fauna being carried out at the Museum. Specimens of snail Theba pisana were found by Mrs. M. E. Heuston in a garden in Ashburton. This has a medium sized shell, diameter 18-24 mm, with slightly flattened, convex spire, white in colour with fine brown bands and characterized by a closed umbilicus and rose pink aperture (Fig.1). It is a very common species in many coastal habitats of southern Australia, reaching plague proportions at several Victorian beaches. More recently it has been recorded in gardens in coastal townships and this record in suburban Melbourne may be a centre of introduction into the metropolitan area. Theba pisana belongs to the family Helicidae and is a native of central Europe. A large population of the small snail, Cionella lubrica, was found in a garden in Eaglemont by Mrs. N. Perry. This has a small, elongate, glossy shell, 4 to 6 mm long, with a rounded spire, small ovate aperture with a thickened callus on the outer lip and straight columella, and dark brown in colour (Fig.2). The specimens were found attached to a brick wall under foliage in a shady locality. This species has only been seen two or three times before in Central Victoria, this being the first Senior Curator (Zoology) National Museum of Victoria 102 Fig. 2. Cionella lubrica. record from suburban Melbourne. It is native to northern Europe and North America and belongs to the family Cionellidae. I would be very interested to hear from any members who have these species in their gardens or who have any other “‘strange’’ snail or slug. Live specimens can be sent in small sealed boxes with moist dead leaves (not green) address to Dr. B. J. Smith, Senior Curator (Zoology), National Museum of Victoria, Russell Street, Melbourne, 3000 and marked LIVE SPECIMEN. Please also enclose a description of the locality and habitat where the specimen was found. Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 A request from the Fisheries and Wildlife Division I have received this request from M. Fleming, R. Thompson, I. Temby of the Fisheries and Wildlife Division concerning a vertebrate survey they are conducting. It reads: ‘The Wildlife Survey section of the Fish- eries and Wildlife Department* is currently engaged in a vertebrate survey of public and private land in the shires of Lillydale, Healesville, Sherbrooke and Upper Yarra. The project has been commissioned by the Upper Yarra Valley and Dandenong Ranges Authority with the aim of providing the Authority and Local Government bodies with a document delineating sites of special scientific significance and ecological sen- sitivity, A parallel project is being conducted by the National Herbarium to identify sites of botanical significance, and it is expected that reports will have considerable bearing on the assessment of planning proposals and development strategies. Part of our task is to collate available data on the distribution of animals in the study area. For this reason we would be most interested to hear from any person or group who may have records of birds mammals reptiles or frogs at particular sites in the area, We would also be interested in any suggestions of sites which may be of biologi- cal significance or ecological sensitivity. Such sites may include areas which are of particular diversity, areas with rare fauna or important breeding sites, and areas where the fauna together with the vegetation form important complete or near complete rem- nants. Sites of ecological sensitivity may include habitats surrounding waterways and swamps or forested corridors connecting larger areas of bushland. This project is important in that it is one of the first major surveys in this state which has been commissioned by a local planning authority with a view to protecting areas of land on the basis of biological significance. The time allowed for the project is however very short (the project should be completed by July 1979) and consequently any sugges- tions should be forwarded to us as soon as possible. We will be very grateful for any informa- tion which your members may be able to give us.” *Information should be forwarded to Mr. M. Fleming P.O. Box 137 Heidelberg. 3084. May/June Artists Wanted Can you do black and white drawings of birds (pen and ink, scraper board etc)? Can you recognize at least some of the birds liv- ing where you do? If so, then the Atlas of Australian Birds wants to hear from you. The Atlas is to be published by Melbourne University Press in 1982/83 and is expected to have wide international distribution. By inclusion, unknown artists particularly may gain recognition otherwise difficult to obtain. The Atlas will cover the distribution of all birds in Australia and its surrounding seas. The period covered is from the first explora- tion of Australia until the end of 1981. A page will be devoted to each species and will include a short discussion, maps and a black and white drawing (see layout). Thousands of volunteer birdwatchers are supplying information. Artists, both profes- sional and amateur, will be represented and receive a fee and it is hoped that a large number will be involved, Artists familiar with species inhabiting remote areas are encouraged to provide illustrations. Accuracy and realism are essential, In October/November 1979 a decision will be made as to allocation of species so that artists will have ample time to complete their drawings.We need to know by the end of July which groups of species you are interested in, with a photocopy of a sample drawing. But first, apply for further informa- tion (and do not submit a sample) to: The Atlas of Australian Birds 119 Dryburgh Street, NORTH MELBOURNE VIC. 3051 Editor’s note: The Chairman of the Atlas Committee has provided an intended page format for the Atlas. Interested readers should contact the Committee directly for these details. ERRATA 96 (2) p. 57 1.10 ‘“‘next” not ‘‘new’’, p. 58 16 “‘spinose’’ not ‘‘spinosa’’, 1.14 ‘‘caesura’’ not “‘casura’’. p.61 holotype is J184, all paratypes and slides J185. ‘*Wescott”’ for ‘““Westcott’’. 103 On Frogs, Earthworms and Night-jars ... After reading of predation on frogs by carabid beetles, | remembered an unusual incident also concerning predation, not of a frog but by a frog. One morning about 3 years ago, | missed one of two baby tortoises I was keeping. Some hours later the lost one was recovered from the mouth of one of the adult golden bell frogs which live in my large backyard pond. The baby—about 3 cm in diameter—was jammed in the frog’s mouth so firmly that both predator and prey would have died without my intervention. Happily, both creatures suffered no ill effects. Two other rather unusual observations may be worth reporting in the hope that further information might be elicited from readers. The first concerns the large native earthworm which lives in the coarse soils derived from the Basket Range sandstones of the Adelaide Hills. During January, 1979, I unearthed about a dozen of these worms while shifting topsoil at several locations. Every one of these solitary worms was arranged in a simple, loose knot when uncovered and made no effort to straighten oul, appearing rather lethargic in the dry soil. In the dampness of winter the worms are quite active, drawing themselves quickly into their large burrows when they become exposed but never appearing other than straight. Perhaps a reader can offer an explanation of the summer knot. The next observation is secondhand. It concerns a brooding spotted night-jar at Inglewood, Victoria. Competent resident bird-observers, apparently so disturbed the bird that it took up its egg and moved house to the next stony mallee ridge where the young hatched. Later the birds returned to the original nest site among the shaley peb- bles on an ironstone ridge. It would be interesting to hear from anyone who can reveal how the night-jar actually moved its egg. Colin Hutchinson Murrumbeena Do Flatworms eat Snails? This unusual but interesting question arose from an observation and collection made by Mrs. Lyndon of Leongatha, South Gipps- land. She found seven land planarians seemingly attacking and eating a garden snail, Helix aspersa in her garden. She sub- mitted them to the National Museum for identification and to find out more about her observation. We sent the specimens to the Australian specialist on land planarians, Mr. Leigh Winsor of the James Cook University of North Queensland, Towns- ville who is also Honorary Associate in Invertebrates at the National Museum of Victoria. Mr. Winsor’s reply is as follows: ‘Two species of land planarians are repre- sented in the collection: Geoplana atrata Steel, 1897. (3 specimens) and Geoplana ventrolineata Dendy, 1892. (4 specimens). It is interesting to note that both species were found together. This has usually been the case when these species have been collected in private gardens, or other man-modified areas. In such situations they are undoub- 104 tedly introduced by the agency of man. However, both are in fact Australian native planarians, generally frequenting the rather dry open forest areas of northern Victoria, N.S.W. and the Bunya Mountains, S.E. Qld. G. atrata was first recorded in the Upper Manning area, N.S.W., G. ventrolineata from Brunning’s Nursery, St. Kilda. Both are found in gardens in Tasmania, in urban and bush areas in Victoria, and only in bush in N.S.W. and S.E. Qld. From my limited observations, both species appear to be necrophagous, scaveng- ing along moist stream banks, and through the jungles of the suburban backyard. I do recollect G. atrata feeding on a dead Bulinus washed up on a stream bank. I have never observed nor read of any land planarian attacking a non-marine mollusc (including slugs). This may be due to some repugnant effect of substances secreted by a live snail; perhaps to the speed and manouvrability of a snail also it can usually crawl into dry areas that would be a barrier to land planarians. I have often found land planarians and non- Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 marine molluscs cohabiting under the same log, and, rarely, land planarians living in what appears to be long-disused shells. Thus | do not think that land planarians could attack and kill an adult Helix aspersa. The only very oblique reference to non- marine molluscs and land planarians in the role of victim and predator is that of Mead (1973). In a discussion of possible biological control agents for the Giant African snail in Florida, Mead mentions that... °°... a pre- datory terrestrial planarian, Geoplana sp., has been discovered in Florida, but the nature of its predation on snails has not yet been determined’. Nothing following from this note has appeared in the literature.” A field description of Geoplana atrata is given in the Naturalist by Winsor (1973). The answer to the question posed at the beginning appears to be ‘No’. At least it appears very doubtful that land planarians will attack and kill a live healthy garden snail. However the flatworms will clean up any dead snails in the garden along with any other dead animal material. REFERENCES Mead, A. R., 1973. New outbreaks in the Florida Giant African Snail Infestation. Amer. Malac. Union Bull., for 1972: 19. Winsor, L., 1973. Geoplana atrata Steel, 1879—A new planarian record for Victoria. Victorian Nat., 90(4): 101-102. Brian J. Smith Senior Curator (Zoology) National Museum of Victoria AUSTRALIAN NATURAL HISTORY MEDALLION FUND Amount on hand invested December 1978 Mr. Robin Sandell (second donation) Total April 1979 $812.00 10.00 $822.00 New Books **Tasmanian Odonata”’, Piers Allbrook 80 pgs., $2.50 posted. ’ ; ‘“A Field Guide to the Common Sea & Estuary Fishes’’, J. M. Thomson (Collins Library), 145 pgs., $8.95 “The Garden Jungle’’, Densey Clyne, 185 pgs., $19.95 “Yates Garden Guide”’ 1979, 296 pgs., $7.95 ‘*Handbooks of the Flora of Papua New Guinea’’ Vol. 1, John S. Womersley, 278 pgs., $26.00 Postage extra on books, Discount to Members. Order from Sales Officer F.N.C.V. Mr. D. E. Mcinnes Book Reviews ‘*Pumpkins, Poisons and People’’ The Conservation Council of Victoria has published another of its valuable environ- mental awareness booklets; this time con- cerning the dangers of pesticides in the home garden. The themes of the booklet are that pesiticides are not necessary in home gardens, that safeguards are virtually non- existent for urban use and that the Depart- ment of Agriculture has not provided home gardeners with adequate advice on the hazards of and alternatives to chemicals. May/June Suggestions are given for alternative methods of pest control. The dangers of careless storage of poisons in the home is stressed as well as the need to properly dis- pose of used containers and residues. A valuable book for all home gardeners, environmentalists and those wishing to know more of ‘backyard’ chemical warfare:- ‘‘Pumpkins, Poisons and People”’ costs $2.60 plus 45c postage (40 pages). Available from the Conservation Council of Victoria, 324 William St. Melbourne, 3000. B, McGregor. 105 ‘Tasmanian Odonata’. BY PIERS ALLBROOK Fauna of Tasmanim Handbook No. 1, issued by the Fauna of Tasmania Commit tee, University of Tasmania, 1979, 84 pp,, 107 text figures, 27) distribution maps. Orders to: The Pauna of Tasmania Office, University of Tasmania, Box 252C, G.P.O., Hobart, Tasmania 7001, Price $2.50 Cinelud- ing postage and packing), Cheques ete, pay- able to University of Tasmania This is the first of a projected series of handbooks on the Fauna of Tasmania, I comprises a brief introduction appropriately pointing Out the existing lacunae in the tax- onomie knowledge on the nymphal Odonata, OF the only 27 species recorded from Tasmania (out of the total of 269 Australian species), 6 are endemic, and some, being archaic, are of considerable zoogeographic interest, A useful section on collection and preservation follows this, A check list of Tasmanian Odonata is pro- vided (the species Archipetalia auriculata is listed under a separate family Petaliidae rather than under Aeshnidae as done by other recent workers.) Under examination of material and use of the key, the author points out that for adults the keys work equally well for both males and females, and the keys are not based only on Tasmanian species, some major features which were found useful in the key construction have also been mentioned, Detailed, accurately lubelled outline drawings of various adult and nymphal structures of taxonomic importance in both Zygoptera and Anisop- (era have been provided under structure of Odonata, to give the reader an adequate morphological background to facilitate the use of the keys following, Keys to nymphs (primarily for last instars) followed by those of adults occupy more than half of the text, and it ts these keys which will make this book extremely useful. The same key keys out suborder, family, genus and species. All key characters are reasonably well selected 106 and their different states are explained by profuse illustrations, Additionally some descriptive notes are given in the key for the ready recognition of individual species. The distribution maps of individual species have been plotted with the available distribution data. The insert on each map indicates the known distribution of the species in Australia, Brief notes on bio-ecology, rela- tive abundance of the species in Tasmania, and extra Australian distribution of the species When known are given at the bottom of cach map. A list of major references, including some not referred to in the body of the book, particularly relevant to the Australian fauna, is provided, followed by a useful species index which completes the book, There are several minor errors, mostly typographic: Selys, not Martin, is the correct author of Ausiroaeschna parvisugma; **Nan- nophya’’ misspelled as “‘Nanophya’’; species names ‘‘nigriscens’’ and “ervthroneurum'* are misspelled as “mericens”’ and “ervthroneum’’ respectively in several places. The terms ‘larva’? and ‘““nymphs’* are erroneously used interchangeably in a couple of places. The book is very well printed, and fine quality paper used enabled good reproduc- tion of most of the drawings, The outside front cover carries an attractive illustration of an adult im situ of Tasmanian endemic Svathemiopsis gomphomacromioides by Carol Johnston, All in all its a very commendable book with its modest price, and should prove very useful to all interested biologists both in Tasmania and on the mainland Australia alike, since the majority of the included Species occur outside Tasmania. M. Malipatil National Museum of Victoria. Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Western Australian plant names and their meanings: A glossary by P. A. Sharr. xxxvi + 228 pages. Price $16.50, University of Western Australia Press, 1978 There is a 78-page part of generic names, and a 144-page part of specific epithets, Entries are arranged alphabetically, and vary from one to four and more lines. An entry may contain the latin or greek Components of the name and their meanings, both in the classical and in the botanical sense where they differ. Or it may give full name, life span and a brief biographical note on a per- son for whom the genus or species was named. A valuable introduction explains the variability of the endings of the latin or latinised specific names, the rules for pro- nunciation, and several other topics perti- nent to the naming of W.A, plants, Apparently great care has been taken to achieve accuracy, and the original deserip- tions have been consulted in cases of doubt, By observing relevance, the author has avoided meaningless translations, thus he translates sibiricus as Siberian, but adds that Acacia sibirica was named after Siberia Soak in W.A. Perhaps anserinifolius would, similarly, be more correctly explained, in regard to Acaena, as “Leaf similar to that of Potentilla anserina”’ rather than “Leaflets resemble a goose toot’, The book is probably complete for the vascular flora of W.A, Now most Victorian genera have members in W.A,, and many if nol most specific names are common to several genera, so the Victorian) reader stands a good chance of finding the unknown meaning of a Victorian plant's name. And as the author says in the Introduction, it is much easier to memorise a plant’s name if one is aware of the mean- ing, More so if it is descriptive of the plant, Therefore, this is a welcome addition to our botanical literature, A, W, Thies The Origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora Part 2—Latin, Greek and Miscellaneous (Continued from page 66 in the previous issue) By JAMES A. BAINES *Pontederia. Named after Giulio Pontedera (1688-1757), a genus still valid for Pickerel Weed (P. cordata), which has not been introduced here. Name included here only because it is the type genus for Pontederiaceae, to which belongs “Hichhornia crassipes, Water Hyacinth, named in 1823 as P. crassipes, and now a serious pest in this State. (Pontedera was professor of botany at Padua, Italy.) “Populus. Classical Lat name of the poplar, with long vowel o in contra- distinction to populus, people, with May/June short 0, there being apparently no link between the two words though identi- cal in spelling, Adding the -ier tree suffix, the French called it first poplier then peuplier (cf. Fr. peuple, people, so this language has the same coincl- dence). Victoria has 3 species that per- sist by suckering, including *P alba, White Poplar, and "P, nigra var, italica, Lombardy Poplar, so called because it apparently originated as a sport in the plains of Lombardy in the 18th Cen- tury. The genus is in family Salicaceae, and includes Trembling Aspen and America’s Cottonwoods, 107 Poranthera. Gk poros pore; anthere, anther. Australia has 9 endemic species, plus 1 shared with N.Z., P. microphylla. Small Poranthera, which is one of Victoria’s 2 species. The only other species is an alpine endemic in N.Z. This minute-flowered genus belongs to family Euphorbiaceae. Portulaca. Lat name for *P. oleracea, Purslane, but the form used by Pliny, porcilaca, suggests an original meaning of ‘sow’s milk’, the plant being likely to be conducive to lactation, as it has been often used as a salad vegetable. Por- cilaca became porcelaine in Middle Fr, then purslain in Eng., finally purslane. In addition to the above naturalized species, the garden portulaca, *P. grandiflora, from Brazil, sometimes persists. The genus gives its name to family Portulacaceae. Potamogeton. Gk potamos, a river; geiton, neighbour; in allusion to the aquatic habitat. Victoria’s 10 species are mostly cosmopolitan, and are known as different kinds of pondweed. Type genus of Potamogetonaceae. *Potentilla. Name formed by L. from Lat potens, powerful; from the supposed tonic and astringent qualities of some species. Two of our 3 introduced species are known as cin- quefoil, a word coming from Lat quin- que folia and Fr cing feuilles, 5 leaves, *P. reptans, Creeping Cinquefoil, hav- ing compound leaves each of five leaflets. (Cf. England’s Cinque Ports, originally 5 in number.) Our other species, *P. anserina, is known as Silverweed, the specific epithet mean- ing ‘pertaining to geese’, hence meadow-loving. The genus is a mem- ber of family Rosaceae. *Poterium. Gk poterion, drinking cup; potirrion was the name of a plant in Dioscorides, thought to be either a burnet or a species of Astragalus. Our species, *P. polygamum, is Salad Burnet, the word burnet coming from 108 the colour of the flowers, meaning dark brown (brunette is a later word of same origin and meaning). The genus belongs to family Rosaceae. (The plant called Salad Burnet in England is P. sanguisorba, to which Ewart wrongly assigned our plant, the latter being an introduction to Britain also.) Prasophyllum. Gk prason, leek phyllon, leaf, alluding to the resem- blance of the solitary leaf to those of this vegetable; hence also the common name of leek-orchids used for most species. Victoria has 29 species, all known as different kinds of leek-orchid or midge-orchid. The Gk a is short, hence the first syllable should be sounded praz, not like praise. Pratia. Named in 1829 by Gaudichaud after Charles L. Prat-Ber- non, a midshipman in Freycinet’s scientific voyage, who died at sea soon after the expedition set sail in 1817. Appropriately, the surname Prat is the southern French form of pré, a meadow (Lat pratum), as the flowers are often seen growing in grassy meadows. Victoria has 7 species, all vernaculars including the generic name for want of any other common name. *Proboscidea. Gk proboskis, elephant’s trunk (from pro, in front of; bosko, to feed); alluding to the elong- ated curved ends of the fruit. Our introduced species, *P. louisianica, Pur- ple-flower Devil’s-claw, was originally named as a Martynia from Louisiana, U.S.A. An alternative common name is Elephant Trunks. Prostanthera. Gk prostheke or pros- thema, an appendage; anthere, anther, alluding to the spur-like appendages to the anthers. Victoria has 15 species of this Australian endemic genus of more than 60 spp., all known as different kinds of mint-bush except P. lasianthos, Victorian Christmas Bush. Being in family Labiatae, they are related to the true mints (Mentha). Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Australians invariably accent the second syllable, despite the third sylla- ble stress recommended in overseas publications. Prunella. Lat prunum, plum, with diminutive -ella added, hence plum- coloured, and the words for the colour brown (Eng), brun (Fr), bruno (Ital) and braun (Ger). Briune became the German word for quinsy, for which P. vulgaris, Self-heal, was reputed to be a cure, hence its name in the German medieval herbals brunella and pru- nella, from which came the generic name given by L. This species is native but cosmopolitan, whereas our other Species, Cut-leaf Self-heal, is an introduction (to the far S.W. of the State only). The genus is in family Labiatae (Lamiaceae). *Prunus. Lat prunus, plum-tree. Only one species, *P. cerasifera, Che- try-plum, is truly naturalized, and that only in the ranges near Melbourne, but other species (Almond, Apricot, Peach, Sour Cherry and Cherry-laurel) sometimes occur in the wild where stones have been discarded. Pseudanthus. Gk pseudos, false; anthos, flower; because in one species, P. pimeleoides, the small flowers clustered at the summit of the branchlets were thought by Sieber to resemble one showy flower. Our 2 species are known as the Oval-leaf and Tangled Pseudanthus respectively; they are in family Euphorbiaceae. Pseudoraphis. Gk pseudos, false; rhaphis, needle; alluding, according to Black, to the solitary bristle; but likely to have been given, by Griffith in 1851, because of difference from Chamaeraphis, the genus in which our 2 species, Spiny and Slender Mud- grass, were previously included. *Psilocaulon. Gk, psilos, naked, bald, smooth, glabrous; kaulos, stem; although our plant, Wiry Noon-flower, is a densely papillose plant. It is syn- May/June onymous with Mesembryanthemum bicorne, and is found only in the far N.W. of Victoria. The genus is in family Aizoaceae, Psilotum. Gk psilos, naked, bare; because the leaves are few and scat- tered. Our species, P. nudum, Skeleton Fork-fern or Clubmoss, has references to this characteristic in both the specific epithet and the vernacular name. The genus gives its name to family Psilotaceae. *Psilurus. Gk psilos, bare; oura, tail; from the nature of the slender spike. Our sole species, *P. incurvus, Bristle- tail Grass, is restricted to the Wimmera (Mt. Arapiles area); it is native to the Mediterranean region. Psoralea. Gk psoraleos, scabby; alluding to the immersed glands in the lissue of the plants. Victoria has 6 native species, and one introduced from South Africa, all Known as different kinds of scurf-pea. P. tenax, Tough Scurf-pea, is also known as Emu Grass, but that name ts unsuitable, as it is in family Papilionaceae (Fabaceae). Pteridium. Name formed from the generic name Preris, the Gk word for fern. P. esculentum, Austral Bracken, is different from Common Bracken of the Old World, P. aquilinum, pteridios means feathery, from Pteron, wing. Pteris. Gk pteris, fern (pteron, wing); from the feathery fronds. Vic- toria has 4 species, all native, known as different kinds of brake or bracken. P. vittata, Chinese Brake, is also known as Long Sickle Fern. The genus belongs to family Adiantaceae. Pterostylis. Gk pteron, wing; stylos, column; because the column has hatchet-shaped wings on either side of the rostellum. Victoria has 40 species (of 60 in Australia; N.Z. has 19 spp.). Nearly all Victoria’s species are known as different kinds of greenhood, but other names are often used in other 109 States. We have Summer, Autumn, and Winter Greenhoods, Rusty-hood, Ruddy-hood, Maroon-hood (known as Greentops in Tas. and Little Red Rid- ing-Hood in N.S.W.), and the Nodding Greenhood (which is Cow-horns in Tas. and Parrot’s Beak Orchid in N.S.W.). Ptilotus. Gk ptilotos, winged (from ptilon, wing, feather); alluding to the feathery appearance of the dense ter- minal flower spikes. Robert Brown set up 2 genera in 1810, Prilotus and Trichinium, which were combined under the name of the former by Poiret (1817) and under the latter by Sprengel (1825). As they are now recognized as one genus, the name Prilotus prevails. Victoria’s 9 species are picturesquely known respectively as Silver-tails, Long-tails, Yellow-tails, Feather- heads, Pussy-tails, Rabbit-tails, Lamb- tails and Hairy-tails. They are in family Amaranthaceae. Pyrrosia. Gk pyrros, flame-coloured (more correctly, pyrrhos, from pyr, fire, cf. Eng pyre). Our sole species is P. rupestris, Rock Felt-fern or Creeping Polypody, the specific epithet meaning ‘growing on rocks’, though it also grows abundantly on trunks of jungle trees in its far East Gippsland habitat. The genus belongs to family Polypodiaceae. *Quercus. Lat name for the oak. Seedlings often appear in quantity under trees of *Q. robur, English Oak, but many other cultivated species do not readily propagate themselves. Oaks belong to family Fagaceae. (Robur in Lat means strength, hence the adjec- tive robustus, strong, robust.) Ranunculus. Lat ranunculus, little frog, tadpole (from rana, frog); also the name given by Pliny to a plant, pro- bably a crowfoot, and applied by similar analogy, but most sources suggest a mere reference to the aquatic habitat of some species. Victoria has 19 native 110 species and 8 introduced, mostly known as different kinds of buttercup, though 2 of the introduced species are called spearworts. Many of Britain’s 23 species are known as crowfoots. The genus gives its name to family Ranun- culaceae. Rapanea. A new Lat name coined by Aublet in 1775, based on a native name of a plant in tropical America, Our species, R. howittiana, Mutton-wood, is close to Myrsine, type genus of the family Myrsinaceae to which our small Gippsland tree belongs. The specific epithet commemorates Alfred William Howitt, botanist, geologist and ethnologist, who lived for many years in Gippsland. *Raphanus. Classical name for the radish, *R. sativus (from Gk rhaphanis) in Latin. Our naturalized species are the Common Radish and *R. raphanistrum, Wild Radish, the lat- ter being far more widely distributed. The genus belongs to family Cruciferae (Brassicaceae), *Rapistrum. Lat name of some plant of this cruciferous family, from rapum or rapa, turnip; the -istrum suffix, as in raphanistrum above, was used for denoting resemblance or imitation of (cf. poet and poetaster). Our species, *R. rugosum, Giant Mustard, is also known as Turnip Weed. (The Eng name rape also comes from Lat rapum,) *Reseda. The Lat name for mig- nonette, derived from resedo, to heal (re-, again; sedo, to settle, soothe or calm). Mignonette is Fr for little dar- ling (cf. Ger Minne, love). There are 60 species in the world, of which 3 have become naturalized here, *R. /uteola, Dyer’s Weld, *R. lutea, Cut-leaf Mig- nonette, and *R. alba, White Mig- nonette. It is the type of genus of Resedaceae. Common Mignonette, *R. odorata, was once used as a remedy for bruises. Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Restio. Lat restio, a ropemaker; because some species are used for thatching and making cords in South Africa, which shares this genus of 120 species with Madagascar and Australia. Victoria has only 3 species, known as Tassel, Flat and Mountain Cord- rushes. The genus gives its name to family Restionaceae. Rhagodia. Gk rhagodes, bearing ber- ries, grape-like (from rhax, genitive rhagos, a berry, kernel, grape); allud- ing to the small globular berry fruits. We have 7 species, all known as different kinds of saltbush except R. hastata, Saloop (although it is called Red-berried Saltbush in N.S.W.). Our commonest species is R. baccata, Seaberry Saltbush, the specific epithet of which means ‘in the form of a berry’. The genus belongs to family Chenopodiaceae. *Rhamnus. Gk rhamnos, name of various spiny shrubs. Our species is *R. alaternus, \talian Buckthorn, Alaternus being a superseded synonym for Rhamnus, derived from Lat ala, wing; ternus, three. The genus gives its name to family Rhamnaceae. Buckthorn ber- Ties are purgative, and the bark of one species of Rhamnus is the source of cascara sagrada. Rhynchospora. Gk rhynchos, beak; spora, seed (here meaning fruit), from the beaked nuts. Out sole species is R. brownii, Grassy Beak-rush, which has only been collected once in our State (Tawonga, 1941). It belongs to the family Cyperaceae. Ricinocarpos. Lat ricinus, tick; Gk karpos, fruit. This hybrid Lat-Gk name was formed by Desfontaines in 1817 because fruits reminded him of those of Castor-oil Plant or Castor Bean, Ricinus, which got its name from the likeness of the seed to a tick; had he spelt the name Ricinocarpus, as it was later spelt for many years, he would have given us a pure-bred Latin name! May/June Our species, R, pinifolius, is called Wedding Bush because of its attractive white flowers. Like Ricinus, the genus belongs to family Euphorbiaceae. Ripogonum. Gk rhips, a plaited mat of rushes, wicker-work; gony, a knee; from the many-jointed stalks. Our species, R. album, White Supplejack, is in the same tribe of Liliaceae as Smilax, and both occur in the jungle habitats of East Gippsland. Supplejack is a name given to climbing and twining plants of a number of unrelated genera in various parts of the world. Rorippa. Latinized by Scopoli in 1760 from a Saxon (East German) ver- nacular name, Rorippen, mentioned by Euricius Cordius, perhaps derived from German roh, raw, rough or coarse; rippen, ribs, nerves of a leaf. Our species, R. islandica, Yellow Marsh-cress or Marsh yellow-cress, although native to Victoria, was named from an Iceland specimen (as the specific epithet indicates) and is also a native in the British Isles, It belongs to family Cruciferae (Brassicaceae). *Rosa, The Lat name of the rose. *R. rubiginosa, Sweet Briar, is truly naturalized in Victoria, and *R. canina, Dog Rose, almost so. The genus gives its name to family Rosaceae, of about 100 genera and 2000 species. *Rubus. The Lat name for a bramble or blackberry bush (from ruber, rubra, red). (Cf. Rubia, Madder, the Lat name for this plant whose roots supply ared dye). Victoria has 3 native species and 12 introduced, the commonest of the indigenous species being R. parvi- folius, Small-leaf Bramble. Blackberries Juxuriating in our nearer ranges are an odd sequel to the early aberration of the great Baron von Mueller in seeking to provide a natural food supply in our native bush. The genus is in family Rosaceae. *Rumex. The Lat name for sorrel or dock. Victoria has 4 native species and ahh 6 introduced (likely to increase to 7, since the Bladder Dock or Pink Dock, the red ‘hops’ that covers the Flinders Ranges so spectacularly, has appeared in far N.W. Victoria). *R. acetosella, Sheep Sorrel, is the only species not known as some kind of dock. The genus is in family Polygonaceae. Rutidosis. Gk rhytidosis, a wrinkling (from rhytis, a wrinkle); alluding to the transversely wrinkled involucral bracts of R. helichrysoides, Grey Wrinklewort, one of our 3 native species. The other 2 species are known as Small and Button Wrinklewort. De Candolle, who estab- lished the genus in 1838, saw a resemb- lance to our other composites called everlastings, hence the specific epithet helichrysoides. Saccharum. Greco-Lat saccharon, name in Pliny for a sugary juice exud- ing from the joints of the bamboo, hence saccharum came to mean sugar, giving us our Eng words saccharine (adj.) and saccharin (noun). Saccharum fulvum was the name of Eulalia fulva, Sugar Grass or Silky Browntop, from 1811 to 1878. Sagina. Lat sagina, fattening, nour- ishment, fodder; from the fattening qualities of spurrey (now Spergula sativa), which was placed by L. in this genus. Victoria has 3 native species, all known as different kinds of pearlwort. The genus is in family Caryo- phyllaceae. *Sapittaria. Lat sagitla, arrow; from the shape of the leaves. *S. graminea, Grassy Arrow-head, omitted by Willis and by Churchill & de Corona, is men- tioned by Helen Aston in ‘Aquatic Plants of Australia’ 1973 as growing in 5 areas of the Numurkah-Nathalia dis- tricts of Victoria. The genus is in family Alismataceae, Salicornia. Lat sal salt; cornu, a horn; because the branches are horn- shaped and taste of sall. Victoria’s 2 112 species are known as Beaded and Thickhead Glasswort respectively, glasswort being the name shared with Arthrocnemumand Pachvcornia because of the glassy sheen of the leaves. Salicornia is often called Samphire (=Saint-Pierre, i.e. St. Peter’s herb), but that name is better applied to Crithmum maritimum, an umbelliferous seaside rock plant included in Ewart’s ‘Flora of Victoria’ but deleted by Willis. Salicornia is in family Cheno- podiaceae. *Salix. The Lat name for the willow. Our 3 naturalized species include *S, cinerea, Common Sallow, and *S. babylonica, Weeping Willow, a native of western China that reached England in 1730, and now adds a graceful, exotic touch to some of our landscapes, especially riverbanks. The genus gives its name to family Salicaceae. *Salpichroa. Gk salpinx, salpingos, a trumpet; chroa, skin, skin colour, with reference to the trumpet-shaped flowers (shortly cylindrical corolla- tube). *S. origanifolia, Pampas Lily-of- the-Valley, is an introduction from South America, a troublesome weed in gardens. The specific epithet indicates resemblance of the leaves to those of *Origanum vulgare, Marjoram, of family Labiatae, but Salpichroa is a solanaceous genus. (Lily of the Valley, Convallaria majalis, is a true lily, family Liliaceae). Salsola. Lat salsus, salted (from sal, salt); because most species grow in salty ground and contain alkaline salts. S. kali, Prickly Saltwort, is also known as Buckbush, Roly-poly, Russian This- tle, and in U.S., Tumbleweed (a name applied there to plants of 6 different genera, because they break loose at the ground line when dry, and bowl along in the wind). This generic name should be accented on the first syllable, despite the commoner stress on the second. The specific epithet kal/ is the same as Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 alkali, from Arabic al-qaliy, the soda- ash or saline substance obtained by lix- iviating the calcined ashes of marine plants (arabic qalay, to roast in a pan). There is a superseded family Salsola- ceae, now included in Chenopodiaceae. Salvia. The Lat name of Sage, S. officinalis, of our herb gardens (from Lat salvus, safe, well, sound, cf. Eng. salvation). Victoria has one native species, S. plebeia, Austral Sage, and 2 introduced, Mintweed and Wild Sage. *S. horminoides, Clary, is naturalized in Tas., and may be in Vic. also. The specific epithet means ‘like Horminum’, a monotypic labiate genus of southern Europe, while Clary is Clear-eye, because it was formerly valued in treat- ment for affections of the eye (cf. daisy = day’s eye). Sambucus. The Lat name of the Elder, *S. nigra (naturalized in parts of Vic.), perhaps connected with sam- buca, a harp. Our 2 native species are Yellow Elderberry, S. australasica, and White Elderberry, S. gaudichaudiana (a name honouring Charles Gaudichaud- Beaupré, French botanist with Freycinet in the ‘Uranie} 1817-20, who described many new plants from Australia, Mauritius and South America; he was in charge later of the Royal herbarium in the Jardin des Plantes, Paris). Samolus. The Lat name of some marsh plant mentioned by Pliny, of quite uncertain identity, but probably of Celtic origin, as it was gathered by May/June the Druids. S. repens, Creeping Brook- weed, is much more widely distributed in Victoria than the other species, also known as a brookweed, S. valerandii, which is native too to Britain. The accent falls on the first syllable. The genus belongs to family Primulaceae. Santalum. Late Lat name of the san- dalwood tree, from Gk santalon (ultimately through Persian sandal, chandal, chandan from Sanskrit chan- dana). Sandals originated in Persia, this wood being used to protect the feet, bound on with leather straps or thongs, the name used for these in Gk being sandalion, a diminutive of the name of the timber. Two of our species, S. acuminatum, Sweet Quandong, and S, murrayanum, Bitter Quandong, have previously been referred to Fusanus R.Br. and Eucarya Mitch., but the third, known in Vic. only from a single tree in the Warby Ranges, and another at Boundary Bend, was recognized by Brown in 1810 as a true Santalum San- dalwood. The genus gives its name to family Santalaceae. *Saponaria. Lat sapo, soap (genitive saponis); because the roots of Soap- wort, *S. officinalis, our introduced species, lather and were once used as a substitute for soap. The genus is in family Caryophyllaceae. Sarcochilus. Gk sarx, sarkos, flesh; cheilos, a lip; alluding to the fleshy labellum. Victoria has 2 species, S, australis, Butterfly Orchid, and S. faleatus, Orange-blossom Orchid. Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Reports of FNCV Activities General Meeting Monday, 9 April, 1979. The President. Dr. Brian Smith welcomed the 51 members and visitors to the first of the Special Study meet- ings, which was a talk given by three members on various aspects of Sherbrooke Forest. Mrs. Rosas spoke upon the geology of the Dandenongs, of which Sherbrooke Forest is situated on a Rhyodacite lava block, 350 million years old. Mrs. Weatherhead spoke upon the Botany of Sherbrooke. The name Dan- denong comes from an aboriginal word ‘Banyenong’ meaning ‘‘Bush burnt a long time ago’’. The oldest trees stand- ing in Sherbrooke are 300 years old, others are 90 and 60 having withstood the successive fires. There are 5 levels of vegetation ranging from 200 ft Mountain Ash Trees, the 70 ft level of Silver Wattle and Blackwood, the 30 ft level of Hazel, Pomaderris, Blanket Leaf, Musk Daisy, Austral Mulberry and Sassafras. The fourth level of 3 ft consists of Mother Shield fern, Soft and Rough Treefern and finally the ground level plants. The lower levels provide a humid moist atmosphere where only 1/50 light can penetrate from above. Conse- quently the ground is rich with inver- tebrates and food for the animals which inhabit the area. Mr. Callanan then spoke about the mammals which live in the Sherbrooke Forest. These consist of the ground dwellers: the Antechinus and Native Rats, Bandicoot, Wombat and Swamp Wallaby; Climbing animals consist of the Ringtail, Brushtail and Bobuck possums and the Koala. The Gliders found in the area are the Sugar, Feathertail and Greater Glider. The monotremes consist of the echidna and (possibly) the platypus. There are numerous species of bats in the area. Dr. Smith thanked the speakers. Exhibits. Under the microscope were speci- mens of Actinosphaerium eichnornii, and uncommon protozoan related to the amoeba, and several small bugs that had just hatched from egg cases. Rock samples from the Dandenongs con- sisted of Rhyodacite (Hypersthene and Dacite) and Grandodiorite (Hornb- lende) all from the Upper Devonian Period. F.N.C.V. ANNUAL REPORT 1979 The year has been one of change and continued activity for the Club. Mem- bership has held steady or slightly increased, the many new members being balanced by resignations and 114 people failing to renew their subscrip- tion. The year started with vacancies for President, Vice President, Secretary and Treasurer. Three of these four Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 positions were filled but we have oper- ated without a Vice President for over 12 months. Mr. Garnet Johnson resigned after only a short time as Sec- retary and Miss Wendy Clark was appointed half way through the year. We have been very fortunate during the year in finding willing workers in key areas but the general level of mem- ber participation in the running of the Club is disappointing. Costs are still rising, including room rental, printing and postage. This forced a subscription rise of $2 in Janu- ary. We again received a grant from the State Government towards these costs, for which we are very grateful. The six special interest groups met regularly during the year and continued to thrive and give splendid service to members. General meetings provided a varied fare of interest. Ideas were put forward for increasing member partici- pation in general meetings with one innovation being the special study night, Conservation issues and activities were again to the fore with submission to the L.C.C. and other bodies and even a letter to the Prime Minister on the whale issue (One we like to think helped in the success of that cam- paign). The bookstall continued to prosper during the year, providing a valuable service to members and a good source of revenue for the Club. This is due to the efforts and enthusiasm of Mr, Dan McInnes. Excursions remain a major activity of the Club with regular day excursions providing a wide range of experiences for members. Besides these our hard working Excursion Secretary Miss Marie Allender also organised longer excursions to Queensland in July and August, to the Grampians and Little Desert in October to Bundanoon in December-January and with the Hawthorn Juniors to Kerang at Easter and the WV FNCA to Halls Gap in April. The Club was host to this year’s meeting of the Field Naturalists Clubs Association of Victoria in March and May/June meetings and excursions were organised, The Kinglake property facilities have been further improved and used by several groups. The Victorian Naturalistcontinues to be possibly the most important single achievement of the Club, being a sig- nificant scientific journal with a wide field of interest which is of value to all members. Thanks are due to Mr. Ruben Kent for his 2 years as Editor and to Mr. Rob Wallis for taking over this year. The standard of the Naturalist remains high and this year included a special issue on the Victorian Alps. Costs of production and mailing have continued to rise and cause concern. Work on the Subject Index has con- tinued over the year and is in the hands of the printer at this moment. The standard of the library service to members has improved with the appointment of Miss Madge Lester as Assistant Librarian plus several volun- teers to help the Librarian. Two bodies affiliated with the Club during the year—the Native Fauna Conservation Society and the Black Rock F.N.C. Three people were appointed hon- orary members during the year— Mr. Cedric Ralph, Mr. Alf Baker and Mr. Colin Lewis. The Australian Natural History Medallion was awarded to Mr. Allan Sefton from Wollongong and he came down to receive the medallion from Professor Lovering, President of the Royal Society and deliver the Medal- lion Lecture. A Centenary Committee was formed to carry out planning and organisation of the celebration of the Club’s centen- ary in 12 months time and to make the centenary year a special one for the Club, Finally I would like to express my thanks to the Council for all the assis- tance they have given me during the year and in particular Mrs. Margaret Corrick and Mr. Dan MclInnes. Thank you. BRIAN J. SMITH PRESIDENT 115 Bundanoon Excursion December 1978 to January 1979 On Saturday, 30th December, a group of Victorian Field Naturalist Club members enthusiastically boarded the Daylight train, which was to transport them to the small village of Bundanoon in the southern high- lands of New South Wales. This train makes an interesting journey between Melbourne and Sydney, which enables one to see the typical Australian farming country, cattle and sheep grazing in sun dried paddocks, dotted with river red gums under blue skies with fleecy white clouds, The train also tra- vels through contrasting country of the Australian eucalypt bush and rocky terrain of unsettled areas. Sunday, 31st December With the promise of a very warm day ahead, the group walked from Bundanoon down the steep hill to the Morton National Park, situated along the Bundanoon Creek. Here trails and lookouts along the edge of the plateau overlook the rugged steep gorges of Bundanoon Creek. The word ‘Bundanoon’ means big deep green gullies. The sandstone tops have a fine display of wild flowers in Spring and we were fortunate to see a good selection of plants in Nower— the colourful Christmas Bells Blandifordia noblis and honey-pots—Lambertia formosa —purple fan flower—Scaevola ramosissima, blue dampiera. Dampiera stricta—small flan- nel flower — Actinotus minor, several orchids and many scribbly gums— Eucalyptus rossi. We followed a circular road to Grand Canyon Lookout, where we had lunch and a few members made a short detour to the Fern Glen to see the southern tree fern— Cyathea australis. The track to Fairy Bower Falls looked attractive to the naturalist, however the day proved too warm for a steep climb so we returned to Gambell’s Rest. We saw the spider flower—Grevillea shiresii and holly lomatia— Lomatia fraseri. Monday, Ist January We set oul to walk to the Glow Worm Glen, situated on Bundanoon Creek. Glow- worms found in the Glen are the larvae of the Fungus-gnat of the species Arachnocampa (Campara) richardsae. Nearby we saw several types of wasp and in the sandstone overhang above the creek were impressions of fossil brachiopods. Epiphytes, lichen and fungi were growing on the Coachwood trees und along the sandstone scrambing coral fern Gleichenia microphylla was Nourishing in the damp atmosphere. Several members returned via a track to Amphitheatre further 116 downstream and saw clusters of hyacinth orchid—Dipodium punctamum. Tuesday, 2nd January We travelled by coach to Fitzroy Falls in Morton National Park—78,000 hectares. The Hawkesbury sandstone supports a dry sclerophyll forest. Most members walked the West Rim track getting glimpses of the Fitzroy Falls cascading over the escarpment. From the look down one can see the Swan Falls leap 120 metres, then a further 60 metres into the valley below where the Yar- runga Creek joins the Shoalhaven River, Returning via one hundred sandstone steps, we saw a number of interesting plants— lady’s slipper—/Hyhanthus _filiformis, iwigger plant—Salidium graminifolium & Spylidium laricifolium, hibbertia— Hibbertia asterotricha and slender rice flower—VPimelea_ linjfolia, and also many colourful butterflies. Lunch was eaten, while viewing the garden of plants which are indigenous to the park area. Afterwards the East Rim Track was followed as far as Fern Tree Gully. This track is a Contrast to the morning walk as it is through a fern gully and provided views of many little birds flitting through the bush and bathing in the creek. It was from this district of Australia the first description of a lyrebird was sent to England in 1798. Leaving the Fitzroy Falls area we pro- ceeded across the Yarrunga Creek and over a new canal which was part of the Shoalhaven Water Scheme, and then the bus followed the winding road seventeen kilometres down Mount Barrenjoey to the Kangaroo Valley, where we crossed the river on the castellated Hampden Bridge built in 1898, from large blocks of sandstone; a brief stop enabled a walk to the Kangaroo River. The road continued through the rain forest to Mount Camberwarra Lookout, where usually one can get a splendid view of the coastline and mouth of the Shoalhaven River, however the mountain was shrouded in mist. Nearby, we saw some large speci- mens of the turpentine tree—Syncarpia glomulifera. On our return route our driver detoured to show us the Shoalhaven Water Scheme which augments the water supply to Sydney and South Coast Areas. Approaching Tallowa Dam many acacias were in bloom, making an attractive sea of gold in the forest. The Dam is downstream from the junction of the Kangaroo and Shoalhaven Rivers and creates Lake Yarrunga, From Vic.Nat. Vol, 96 here the water is pumped up by the Ben- deela Pumping Station to Bendeela Pondage and on to other parts of the scheme. Upstream of Fitzroy Falls we had a look at Fitzroy Falls Dam. Wednesday, 3rd January Again travelling by coach, we journeyed through the attractive highland towns of Moss Vale, Bowral, Mittagong, then via the old South road—the route of the early set- tlers—to Alpine and then along the old Hume Highway to Wirrimbirra at Tahmoor, near Bargo. This is a wildlife refuge and a property of the National Trust of Aust. (N.S.W.), is under the management of the David G, Stead Memorial Wildlife Research Foundation of Australia. It is almost one hundred hectares of which a small part is being developed as a wild flower garden, where flowering plants from all states mingle with native plants. There are several nature trails, so during the morning we walked No. | Trail through plants of the Myrtle Family Myrtaceae, scribbly gum, fine leafed geebung— Per- soonia mollis, hairpin banksia— Banksia spinulosa which is native to Wirrimbirra and acacias, Trail No, 2 leads to Caloola Creek through grass dotted with fringed violet— Thysanotys tuberous—trees of the large leafed geebung—Persoonia laevis and the colourful bottlebrushes—Callistemon citrinus. The lovely little eastern spinebill— Acanthorhynchus tenuirostris was flitting around the shrubs selecting honey from the blossoms. It was necessary to travel by bus to the other area of the property, where we wandered along the Waratah Trail. This area was unfortunately burnt in a bushfire in December 1977, We saw many cicada cases clinging to the blackened tree trunks— double drummer Thopha saccata and cherry- nose— Macrotristria angularis. Travelling back to Bundanoon we saw the F5 Expressway in progress of construction, and made a short visit to Nepean Dam, part of the Metropolitan Water & Sewerage Drainage Board Scheme, where we saw a mass of large flannel flowers in bloom— Actinotis helianthi, During the evening several members walked to Glow Worm Glen at Bundanoon to see the worms really glowing. Thursday, 4th January We retraced our route to Kangaroo Valley, but continued down Cambewarra Mountain to Bomaderry and followed the Shoalhaven River to the coast, where we entered Seven Mile Beach National Park. Here the lovely golden sand stretched endlessly in either direction, with silver grey May/June driftwood, scoured by sand and wind action piled high along the foreshore. We saw Specimens of Portuguese Man-o-War— Physalia and a uni-valve molluse—Jansthina at almost the wave splashline. We saw these with their filmy float still attached. We continued along the scenic coastal Princes Highway to Kiama and viewed the little blowhole. Although smaller than the famous Kiama Blowhole it often outblows its big brother and is seen at its best when seas are rough and the wind blows from the North-east as we saw it. On reaching Albion Park our route was inland and followed the attractive Hlawarra Highway steadily upwards through the Mac- quarie Pass, under the cool treeferns, hang- ing over the road from higher ledges, Glimpses of the mountain heath—Fpacris longiflora trailed colourfully from cliff faces. Robertson wildlife refuge is four hectares of virgin rainforest, which is one of the few remaining stands of the original thick forest growth common in Australia’s past. There is a system of paths through this small area, almost dim as the canopy of branches met overhead—leather jacket or coachwood tree—Ceratopetalum apetalum. A haven for birds in the cool atmosphere of the dense forest of sassalfras—Dorvphora sassafras and lilly-pilly—Acmena smithii Syn Eugenia smuthii, Carrington Falls nearby proved to be an interesting area with a track around to various lookouts towards the falls, even an iron ladder and tunnel to climb to one view point of the twin falls cascading down the cliff-face, and to the west through the blue haze to Kangaroo Valley far below. Our road crossed the stream above the falls by a ford, which sometimes has the stream flowing very swiftly across it, and so back to Bundanoon. Friday, 5th January This morning our coach went south from Bundanoon to Wingello and to Long Point Lookout, where breathtaking views of the valleys and gorges were seen clearly. Returning to Bundanoon for lunch at Gam- bell’s Rest in the National Park and after- wards some members walked to the Erith Coal Mine. Animals were represented by an echnida or spiny ant eater— Jachyglossus aculeatus seen by members. Saturday, 6th January Once again the day dawned with much promise of being very hot. It was a pleasant drive through the farming country to Ber- rima. Governor Macquarie saw the area in 1820 on his southern journey. The historic village of Berrima founded in 1829 by Sir Thomas Mitchell, New South Wales Surveyor General, has many old 117 sandstone buildings preserved, although still performing an active service to the com- munity. There was time to inspect the sandstone structures and the enterprises of Berrima—perennial garden, lavender farm and geranium house. From Berrima we followed the Hume Highway to Mittagong and Lake Alexandra, a cool haven nestling below Mount Alex- andra, where there are deposits of coal, locally called anthracite. This is the closest Australia has to anthracite which is found elsewhere in the world. Mount Alexandra is a glarious sight in October when its slopes “are covered with glowing blooms of the Waratah, the floral emblem of New South Wales—Telopea speciosissima. Lake Alex- andra was created after the Fitzroy lron- works closed and nearby can be seen the blue-green slag heaps from the old Fitzroy Iron Foundry founded in 1841. Along a nearby track we saw many heal- thy specimens of waratah, ready for next year’s blooming. Our route continued via Mount Gibralter, from where one can see the far distant Blue Mountains, several one time volcanoes in the middle distance and Mittagong nestling directly below. The scenic drive down from the mountain passed by tall timbers and masses of ferns growing in the old crater. The ‘‘Gib” is an igneous intrusion of micro- syenite, which is “‘Bowral Trachyte”’ used for facing many of Sydney’s buildings. Fine specimens contain small vughs of calcite, sanidine felspar, black aegirine pyroxene, red jasper, small agates and occasionally amethyst. We made a short visit to Sir Cecil Hopkins’ Nature Reserve. Sir Cecil Hopkins was involved in many projects related to parks and gardens throughout the district during his lifetime. Close to the reserve on the banks of the Wingecarribee River was established the village of Bong Bong in 1817. The weir was built in the 1920’s forming a lagoon, which is an ideal home for water: birds. We saw white faced heron—A. novae- hollandiae, swans— Cygnus atratus, pelican— Pelecanus conspicullatus and some emus— E. dromaius novae holladiae. We also watched a pair of pardalotes—Pardalotus punctatus feeding their young in the hollow of a dead tree. Our coach returned to Bundanoon and much later that evening a party of Field Naturalists Club of Victoria gathered on the Bundanoon railway station to board the Spirit of Progress to return to Melbourne. We were given a real naturalist’s farewell by the low call of a Lovering owl in the dusky evening. Ruth Parkin GROUP EXCURSIONS All FNCV members are invited to attend Group Excursions Botany Group Saturday, 28 July. Heathlands, Mornington Peninsula, Leader: Tom Sault. Saturday, 25 August. Warrandyte and Tyndals Rd. Reserve. Saturday, 29 September. Brisbane Ranges. Day Group—Third Thursday in the Month Thursday, 21 June. Ripponlea. We are unable to view Channel 2, so will have a day at Rip- ponlea Mansion, 192 Hotham St., Elsternwick. Meet at the gates at 11.30 a.m., bring lunch. Take Brighton bus No. 602, in Swanston St. which will stop at gates or train to Ripponlea Railway Station. There will be a charge of $1.50, or 70 cents for pensioners. Thursday, 19 July. As the Institute of Archaeology is unavailable on this date, we shall visit the National Museum, 285—321 Russell St. Meet inside Commonwealth Building, enr. LaTrobe St. and Spring St. at 11.30 a.m. Thursday, 16 August. LaTrobe University. Meet at the bus terminal in the grounds at 11.30 a.m. Details later. i Geology Group Sunday, 3 June. Geology group to join Maribyrnong excursion led by Mr. D. McInnes. Sunday, 8 July. Mt. Blackwood area. Meet at Shire Hall, Bacchus Marsh at 10 a.m. Mammal Survey Group June 16,17,18. Camp at Big River. July 21,22. No details of camp venue as yet. Contact Secretary for details. mT 118 Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 (Continued from page 82) GROUP MEETINGS All FNCV members are invited to attend any Group Meeting; no extra payment. At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra at 8.00 p.m. First Wednesday in the Month—Geology Group Wednesday, 6 June. ‘‘Formation of the Solar System.” Speaker: Dr. A. Prentice Applied Maths Dept., Monash University. Wednesday, 4 July. ‘‘Offshore Oil Exploration and Marine Life.”’ Speaker from B.H.P. Wednesday, 1 August. Volcanics of West-Central Victoria.” Speaker: Pam Gawith. Third Wednesday in the Month—Microscopy Group Wednesday, 20 June. How to prepare slides and mount objects in Canada Balsam, Glycerine Jelly, Euparel and other mountant. Wednesday, 18 July. Pond and marine microscopic life: collection, method of viewing, preservation. Wednesday, 15 August. Botanical section cutting, staining, mounting. Wednesday, 19 September. Special forms of transmitted light, Kohler illumination, Phase Contrast, Modulation Contrast, Oblique lighting. On each meeting night there will be half an hour of members exhibits and discussion after the principal subject. Second Thursday in the Month—Botany Group Thursday, 12 July. ‘‘Thems White Fella’s Plants: some comments on the need for botanical understanding and management of the rural countryside of Australia.” Professor Chambers, Melbourne University. Thursday, 9 August. Saltbushes and other topics. Thursday, 13 September. ‘‘Botanical aspects of recent safari to Central Australia.’’ Speaker: Dr. Elizabeth Turner. > At the Conference Room, The Museum, Melbourne at 8.00 p.m. Good parking area—enter from LaTrobe Street. First Monday in the Month—Marine Biology and Entomology Group Monday, 2 July. ‘“‘Hydroids and Jellyfish’? by Mr. Harry Bishop. Monday, 6 August. ‘‘Scale Insects’” by Mr. Urwin Bates. Monday, 3 September. “How Molluscs Eat’’ by Mr. John Strong. At the Arthur Rylah Institute, Brown St., Heidelberg at 8.00 p.m. First Thursday in the Month—Mammal Survey Group. The new Secretary for the Mammal Survey Group is Ray Gibson, 26 McCulloch St., Nunawading. Phone: 874 4408, Meetings. Due to the disruption of meeting places, contact the Secretary for details of meet- ings. May/June 119 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Established 1880 OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora. Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Patron: His Excellency the Honorable Sir HENRY WINNEKE, K.C.M.G., O.B.E., Q.C. Key Office-Bearers 1977-1978 President: Dr. BRIAN SMITH, 8 Hunsford Avenue, North Clayton, 3168 (560 8358) Secretary: Miss WENDY CLARK, 27 Rangeview Grove, North Balwyn, 3104 (859 8091) Correspondence to: FNCV, National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004. Treasurer: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Subscription-Secretary: Mr. F. J. KOTH. 21 Smart Street, Hawthorn, 3122. Editor: Mr. R. WALLIS, c/- State College of Victoria—Rusden, Blackburn Road, North Clayton, 3168, 544 8544. Librarian: Mr. J. MARTINDALE, c/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004 Excursion Secretary: Miss M. ALLENDER, 19 Hawthorn Avenue, Caulfield, 3161 (527 2749) Book Sales Officer: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Archives Officer: Mr. B. CALLANAN, 29 Reynards Street, Coburg, 3058 (36 0587) Group Secretaries Botany: Mr. CAMERON McCONCHIE, 158 Warrandyte Road, Ringwood, 3134 (870 9986) Day Group: Miss D. M. BELL, 17 Tower Street, Mont Albert, 3127 (89 2850) Geology: Mr. T. SAULT, c/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004 Mammal Survey: Mr. MICHAEL HOWES, 10 Palmer Street, Fitzroy, 3065 Microscopical: Mr. M. H. MEYER, 36 Milroy Street, East Brighton (596 3268) Entomology and Marine Biology: c/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne; 3004 FNCV Kinglake Nature Reserve: McMahons Road, Kinglake. Bookings and keys: Mr. DICK MORRISON, 788 Elgar Road, Doncaster (848 9148) MEMBERSHIP _ Membership of the F.N.C.V. is open to any person interested in natural history. The Victorian Naturalistis distributed free to all members, the club’s reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. Subscription rates for 1979 Metropolitan ...... Soe acy BE -e-dow'g aig Poker Cal eh le og a o chee eieth eines hb DO CRN G Cony Hoe RT Serre Cee aon + tebe Joint Metropolitan....... 2 ; ountry Members and Retired Persons. . AHS Joint Country and Joint Retired cence ene teen eee nee Junior .... wi tees was hos ch poe a Fives bat Subscription to Victorian Natticalial cess c4eyco.0ki cate pateabac cL MATL t te Pook Overseas Subscription to Leeda Naturalist Individual Journals All subscriptions should be made paca: to the Field Naturalist Club of Victoria and posted to the Subscription Secretary. @ JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY. LTD., WEST MELBOURNE {he victorian naturalist FNCV DIARY OF COMING EVENTS GENERAL MEETINGS At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra Monday, 13 August, 8.00 p.m. . The South-West of Tasmania, in particular the Franklin River Gorge, illustrated with slides. Speaker: Dr. G. Mosley, Australian Conservation Foundation. Presentation of Honorary Membership certificate to Professor J. F. Turner. Monday, 10 September, 8.00 p.m. A special study meeting on Wilsmere Park, Kew. Speakers: From Marine Biology, Entomology, Microscopical, and Botany groups. Monday, 8 October, 8.00 p.m. A talk on advances in biological control of vermin in noxious weeds in Victoria. Speaker: To be announced. Monday, 12 November, 8.00 p.m. Natural History Medallion Award. New Members —July- August General Meetings Ordinary: Mr. A. Smith, 3/121 Arnold St., North Carlton, Vic, 3054. Mr. R. Buckingham, 18/117 Caroline St., South Yarra. 3141. Mr. G. Wilton, 11 Wimborne Ave.. Chelsea, 3196, Mr. E. L. Ryan, 15 Chaucer St., Canterbury, 3126. Mr. A. Bennett, 76 Wallace St., Preston, 3072, Mr. J. Davies, 45 George St., Ashwood, Vic. 7347 Dr. P. Robertson, Dept. of Zoology, University of Melbourne, 3052. Mr. M. O’Sullivan, P.O. Box 137 Heidelberg, 3084. Mrs. M. McSpedden, 10 Elphin Grove, Canterbury, 3126. Mr. N. McGillivray, 29 Overend St., East Brunswick. Ms. H. Farquharson, 4 Kingston Rd., Surrey Hills, 3127. Mr. M. R. Fleming, 39A Lansdowne Rd., East St.Kilda, 3183. Ms. E. Abrahams, 1/462 Belmore Rd., Box Hill North, 3129. Mr. G. Sargant, P.O. Box 176, Elsternwick, 3185. Miss S. Finne, 60 Lansdown St., North Balwyn 3104. Country Members: Mr. P. Muller, c/- Tidal River P.O. Wilson’s Promontory, 3960, 4 Mrs. R. McWhae, Box 131 Cohuna, 3568. Botany. int: Mr. & Mrs. M. Southwell-Keely, 11 Huntingdale Drive, Lilydale, 3140. Mr. & Mrs. B. F. Davey, 2 Barry St., Kew, 3101. FNCV EXCURSIONS Saturday, 25 August—Thursday, 6 September. Broken Hill. The coach will leave Flinders ze Eee the Gas and Fuel Corporation at 8.15 a.m. Bring picnic meals for Saturday and unday. Saturday, 22 September. The Native Plants Preservation Society has a private car excursion to the Brisbane Ranges and FNCV members are welcome to attend. Meet at 10.30 a.m. at Bacchus Marsh Post Office. Sunday, 7 October. Dargile Forest, Heathcote area. Leader: Mr. A. Lewis. This is the area that was proposed as a dumping ground for waste materials but the plan was abandoned due to possible contamination of water and protests from citizens. It is good wildflower country and it will be interesting to see what has been saved. The coach will leave Batman Ave. at 9.30 a.m., fare $5.00. Bring a picnic lunch and a snack. Tuesday, 6 November. Cup Day. Leader: The President, Dr. B. Smith. Gembrook and Gil- well Scout Camp. Junior members are specially invited. Bring a picnic lunch and a snack. The coach will leave from Batman Ave., at 9.00 a.m. Fare: $5.00 adults; $2.00 juniors. A meeting place and time for those going by private cars will be announced. Bus booking should be made with the excursion secretary, Miss Marie Allender. (Continued on page 163) 122 Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 The Victorian Naturalist Volume 96, Number 4 July/August, 1979 Editor: Robert L. Wallis Editorial Committee: S. Beattie, M. Corrick, R. Kent, A. Oates, B. Smith The Reptiles of Kinglake National Park kee IMINO RLUTCHIT SOL] Mein n> Ue MI Osan a Eerste gc ronan 124 Naturalist of Yesteryear jon ee SSihentedtorn it hy eh Med Loo SOO 8 RA oe, ete FO Py 134 The Paper Nautilus VUE Ala BEsIShLO Derren othe NEMS AEs cl Ve RE Pecs yer chad vat essere ee ji) A Note on the Vegetation of Citadel Island, Wilsons Promon- tory, Victoria by F. 1. Norman and D. R.S. Brown......... 1g) Ningaui: a New Genus of Dasyurid for Victoria bys MARES minced de GOCKDUGME mses. heii... fou a « 142 A Tour with a Difference bY Cyril Ee Alens Na Were eye poh are tuts onigisio ake bitin AS 145 Change from Quartz Arenite to Calcarenite Coast at Warrnam- bool, Victoria, Australia by Edmund D. Gill............... 151 The Origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora byehames: AS Atge Seu, Rew eer mune Pantha ne tye ries 153 Land Planarians (Tricladida: Terricola) of the Royal Botanic Gar- dens, Melbourne, Victoria by L. Winsor .................. 155 ReDOlicOler Ne NEACUVMHIGSe 2 Fx q S 4 2 2 H 1 = a F ; p 4 y 5 & ‘ ra M \¢ = 1 A a Ge epris IN) . g = IW ( S “ 2. E 4 5 KE = SMVIONT we (9 im ga e £ A cm BeseTI9 TUM 27) =] a =) 2 WHEEL DRIVE Ronp! 4 Wrter DRIVE River nw CREEK CNet Contoug w METRES 72000. Survey Bouwwary —: Mammar Trapping AREA @ 177 Methods Trapping, spotlighting, observation by day and interpretation of tracks, faeces and skeletal material were the main methods by which animal pre- sence was noted. Small mammals were trapped using 32.5 x 9 x 9.5 cm. Elliot traps baited with a mixture of honey, oatmeal and peanut butter. Pit traps Table 1 MAMMALS Number of trap nights: 1460 Number of spotlight hours: 21 measuring 19 cm in diameter by 21 cm in depth were used for reptile trapping. Spotlighting was undertaken with a 12 volt sealed beam spotlight powered by motor cycle batteries. Results Thirteen species of mammals were identified in the study area. At least two species of bats were also observed TOTAL NUMBER (a) Number of animals caught per 100 trap nights Antechinus swatnsonit* Antechinus stuartit* Burranys parvus Rattus fuscipes* Mastacomys fuscus (b) Number of animals seen during daylight Ornithorhynchus anatinus Tachyglossus aculeatus Vombatus ursinus* Oryetolagus ecuniculus* Lepus europaeus* 8.6 pbs 0.5 7) 0.2 3 19.5 284 kee 17 1 1 le 4 a (c) Number of animals seen per spotlight hour Psuedocheirus peregrinus* Macropus giganteus Vombatus urstnus* Vulpes vulpes* Lepus europaeus* 0.4 8 0.05 1 0.05 Av 0.4 8 0.05 rf (Bats were also seen frequently during spotlighting) * Mammals also observed in winter. 178 (Osborne et al, 1978) Vic. Nat. Vol. 96 ee a LOCATION Table 2 DESCRIPTION OF TRAPLINE LOCATION DESCRIPTION 1 Dense woodland with heath understorey. Less than 15m. from creek. Southerly aspect. Boulders present. 2 Dense woodland with heath understorey. Less than 15m. from creek. Southerly aspect. Boulders present. 2 Open woodland with tall heath. Less than 15m. from creek. Southerly aspect. Boulders present. 4 Rock tor with snowgrass and heath. Greater than 15m. from creek. 5 Dense heath land. Less than 15m. from creek. Westerly aspect. Boulders present. 6 Grassland. Less than 15m. from creek. Valley floor. 7 Open Heath land. Less than 15mm from creek. Easterly aspect. 8 Open heath land. Less than 15m. from creek. Valley floor. Boulders present. 9 Open woodland and heath. Less than 15m. from creek. Northerly aspect. Boulders present. 10 Dense heathland. Less than 15m. from creek. Few boulders. dal: Boulder moraine with some overlying vegetation. Greater than 15m. from creek. Easterly aspect. 12 Open woodland and heath. Greater than 15m. from creek. Westerly aspect. Boulders present. 13 Open woodland with dense heath. Greater than 15m. from creek. Westerly aspect. Boulders present. 14 Open woodland and heath. Greater than 15m. from creek. Westerly aspect. Boulders present. als) Dense heathland in gully. Less than 15m. from creek. Northerly aspect. Boulders present. 16 Dense heathland. Less than 15m. from creek. Westerly aspect. 17 Regenerating woodland (after fire). Greater than 15m. from creek. Northerly aspect. September/October 179 but not identified. Forty species of birds, seven species of reptiles, two species of amphibians and two species of fish were also recorded. Details of the animals recorded can be found in tables 1, 3, 4 and 5S. Notes of the Mammals Recorded Swainson’s Antechinus Antechinus swainsonii. This animal was found in a wide range of localities, including woodland, shrubland, rock tors and along creeks. Brown Antechinus A. stuartii. This animal was found to be most common at low altitude among thick woodland, but was also found in a rock tor near Dicky Cooper Bogong at 1920m and near the Kerries ridge at 1880m. Mountain Pigmy Possum Burramys parvus. Two females were caught in one night along a creek | km downstream from the Schlinks Hilton hut. The Bur- ramys were caught 110m apart in a small rocky gorge among heath. Another female was trapped on a rock tor near Dicky Cooper Bogong at 1920m in vegetation dominated by Podocarpus lawrencei. Allied Rat Rattus fuscipes. This was the commonest animal collected in traps and was found throughout the study area. Broad Toothed Rat Mastacomys fuscus. This animal was trapped in four localities north of Schlinks Pass. Three of the four localities were along creeks Table 3 NUMBERS OF INDIVIDUALS AND SPECIES CAUGHT AT TRAPPING LOCATIONS Locneot ees ES Se ee Se om 3 28 3 - © 6 - 9 2 40 6 ti . 3 7 3 3 80 19 2 ll ¥ 32 4 40 6 1 1 6 2 a 5 224 8 = o 73 : re 6 45 - - - - - = 7 30 1 - = . = 1 8 120 8 o . 26 ‘ = 9 280 23 - = 72 & 95 10 190 18 3 a 49 i te 11 13 - - - - - = 12 17 1 “ * 7 £ 6 13 22 - - - 6 k 6 14 140 18 ‘a . 1 ¢ a a a 14 - 2 23 4 43 16 20 - - - - - a, 17 20 - = ~ 2 > 2 ste Vic. Nat. Vol. 96 and the fourth was in the rock tor as described above. One young individual was found in daylight just south of Schlinks Pass. Echidna Tachyglossus aculeatus. One individual was found on the slope on the western side of White’s River. Platypus Ornithorhynchus anatinus. One individual was seen in White’s River at 1520m early on an overcast afternoon. Ringtail Possum Psuedocheirus peregrinus. Ringtails appear to be more common south of Schlinks Pass, where five hours of spotlighting revealed the presence of seven individuals. North of the pass, sixteen hours of spotlighting revealed the presence of only one possum at an altitude of 1800m. Grey Kangaroo Macropus giganteus. One individual was seen at 1600m on Disappointment Spur. A skeleton of the same species was found near Valentine Hut and faeces of a macropod were noted ’2km south of Orange Hut. Wombat Vombatus ursinus. Though signs of wombat activity, diggings, faeces etc. are common along Duck Creek, Whites River Valley and on the Kerries only one was seen by spotlight and one in daylight. These two sight- ings do not, obviously, reflect their abundance. Wombat faeces were also noted at an altitude of 2050m on Gungartan. Red Fox Vulpes vulpes. The eight sightings of foxes were probably of a maximum to two individuals in the valley north of Schlinks Pass, Hare Lepus europaeus. Hares were seen on only two occasions but faeces were noted throughout the study area. Rabbit Oryctolagus cuniculus, Three individuals were sighted at the southern end of the survey area at low altitude and one near Orange Hut at 1760m. The only signs of permanent occupation by rabbits were at the southern end of the survey area and it is probable that the rabbit seen near Orange Hut was a vagrant as no rabbits were seen in this area in winter. Bats. Bats were observed but not col- lected, however, possible species within the area include Tadarida September/October australis, Pipistrellus tasmaniensis, Nyc- tophilius geoffroyi and Chalinolobus gouldii. (Dr. J. H. Calaby, pers. com.) Discussion The results of this survey show that representatives of all classes of vertebr- ates were present in the study area. Three of the classes (Amphibia, Rep- tilia and Osteichthyes) were not observed during the winter survey (Osborne et al, 1978). Of the mammals not recorded in winter: a) The Eastern Grey Kangaroo was recorded in areas easily accessible by summer migration from lower altitudes. The echidna, which hibernates in cold weather and has been recorded on the snow surface in spring (Osborne et al, 1978) was observed in sub-alpine woodland. c) The platypus was observed at a loca- tion on Whites River not normally covered by snow in winter. The broad toothed rat was recorded in low numbers, generally in cool gullies close to water except for two individuals which were trapped in a rock tor at 1920m. No available water was obvious at this site. This high tor locality suggests that the broad toothed rat also occupies some protected localities not pre- viously recorded as within their habitat range (Ride, 1970; Newsome and Catling, in press). e) The mountain pigmy possum was trapped 1 km downstream from the site where the first individual of this species was trapped in N.S.W. in 1970, (Calaby er al, 1971). In this area the seed pods of Hovea longifolia had been bitten off and the seeds extracted in a similar fashion to that described for the mountain pigmy possum in cap- tivity by Dixon (1971). In this locality snow gums were absent as in the trap site near Dicky Cooper Bogong. A further interesting trapping was of Antechinus stuartii above the tree line in a rock tor with some cover provided by Podocarpus. This species of Antechinus b — d — 181 Table 4 BIRDS KEY: SS Single Sighting SE Southern Extreme of survey area* U_ Uncommon NE Northern Extreme of survey area* Cc Common TO Throughout survey area vc Very Common WL Woodland OA Open Areas WW Waterways BF Bog and Fen * The north and south ends of the study area border on montane habitat. Animals recorded within the study area, but close to these borders, have therefore been identified. NOTE: This key is also used in Table 5. SPECIES STATUS AREA Black Cormorant Phalacrocorax carbo ss WW NE Black Duck Anas superctiliosa U ww TO Brown Goshawk Accipiter fasciatus c TO Wedge-Tailed Eagle Aquila audax* U TO Peregrine Falcon Falco peregrinus* ss NE Nankeen Kestrel Falco cenchrotdes c OA TO Stubble Quail Coturnix pectoralts ss NE Japanese Snipe Gallinago hardwickit ss OA Common Bronzewing Phaps chalcoptera ss WL NE Yellow-Tailed Black Cockatoo Calyptorhynchus funereus* c SE Gang-gang Cockatoo Callocephalon fimbriatun* vc TO Crimson Rosella Platycercus elegans* ve TO Fan-Tailed Cuckoo Cuculus pyrrhophanus U WL TO Horsefield's Bronze cuckoo Chrysococcyx basalis U WL TO Spine-Tailed Swift Hitrundapus caudacutus c TO Welcome Swallow Htrundo neoxena ss SE Australian Pipit Anthus novaeseelandiae ve OA TO Ground Thrush Zoothera dawma U WL TO Flame Robin Petrotca phoenicea vc WL TO Olive Whistler Pachycephala olivacea [e WL TO Grey Shrike-Thrush Colluricinela harmonica* c WL TO Grey Fantail Rhipidura fultginosa ve WL TO White-Srowed Scrub Wren Sericornis frontalis* ve WL TO Brown Thornbill Acanthiza pustlla ve TO Striated Thornbill Acanthiza lineata* TO White-Throated Tree Creeper Climacteris leucophaea* o WL TO Red Wattle Bird Anthochaera carunculata c WL 10 Yellow Faced Honeyeater Lichenostomus chrysops ss SE White-Eared Honeyeater Lichenostomus leucotis U WL SE Crescent Honeyeater Phylidonyris pyrrhoptera ¢ WL SE Eastern Spinebill Acanthorhynchus tenutrostris & WL TO Striated Pardalote Pardalotus striatus U WL NE Grey-Breasted Silvereye Zosterops lateralis ic WL TO Goldfinch Carduelis carduelis ss WL SE Starling Sturnus vulgaris* c TO Olive-Backed Oriole Oriolus sagtttatus ss WL SE White-Backed Magpie Gynmorhina ttbicen hypoleuca* c TO Pied Currawong Strepera graculina* ss WL SE Australian Raven Corvus coronoides U OA Little Raven Corvus mellori* ve TO * Birds also observed in Winter (Osborne et al, 1978) 182 Vic. Nat. Vol. 96 Table 5 REPTILES SPECIES STATUS AREA White-Lipped Snake Drysdalia coronotdes (oF TO Copperhead Austrelaps superbus U TO Mountain Dragon Amphibolurus diemensis U WL TO White's Skink Egernia whitit c WL TO Grass Skink Leiolopisma entrecasteauxit vc TO Alpine Water Skink Sphenomorphus kosciuskot U BF TO Mountain Water Skink Sphenomorphus tympanum vc TO AMPHIBIANS Crinta signifera es BF TO Litoria vereauxit ve TO FISH Galaxtas brevipinnis vc TO Brown Trout Salmo trutta c NE + SE is generally confined to woodland at lower altitudes. (Newsome and Cat- ling, in press). Although only fourteen species of birds were recorded in winter, forty species were recorded in summer, indicating a large summer immigration. The immigrants consisted of all the honey eaters and waterbirds and some of the insect eaters and seed eaters. As listed in the results, reptiles were quite common but were generally restricted to rocks and woodland, regions that, in winter, provide hiber- September/October nation sites. The two species of Sphenomorphus occuring in the study area showed a niche separation, in that S. tympanum was restricted mainly to rocky creeks and moraines whereas S. kosciuskoi was found largely in bogs and wet fens. Litoria vereauxii and Crinia signifera were common in the study area. Psuedophryne coroboree, however, was not recorded although it was common further to the north in the Grey Mare Region. Galaxias brevipinnis were found to be very common within the study area, 183 extending into the headwaters of many creeks. In Whites River, however, where brown trout Salmo trutta were common Galaxias were not in evidence but in Valentine Creek where the population of brown trout was introduced above a high water fall and is therefore isolated from lower river systems, Galaxias are still common. Acknowledgements The authors wish to thank V. Musala and A. Mednis for their enthusiastic field assistance throughout the study period and also L. Best (C.C.A.E.) for his assistance at the beginning of the study and for criticism of the manu- script, Dr. J. H. Calaby (C.S.1.R.O.) for his advice concerning mammals, the Canberra College of Advanced Educa- tion for equipment loan, the N.S.W. National Parks and Wildlife Service for permission to trap mammals and W. Fulton (inland Fisheries Commission, Tasmania) for identifying Galaxias bre- VIPINNIS. REFERENCES Calaby, J., Dimpel, H. and McTaggart Cowan, I. (1971). The Mountain Pigmy Possum, Burramys parvus Broom (Marsupialia) in the Kosciusko National Park, New South Wales. C.S.I-R.O. Division of Wildlife Research Technical Paper No. 23. Costin, A, B. (1954). A Study of the Ecosystems of the Monaro Region of New South Wales with Lee Reference to Soil Erosion. Govt. Printer, Sydn Dimpel. “a. and Calaby, J. H. (1972), Further Observations on the Mountain Pigmy Possum (Burramys parvus) Victorian Nat, 89, 101-106. Dixon, J. M. (1971). Burramys parvus Broom (Marsupialia) from Falls Creek are of the Bogat High Plains, Victoria. Victoria Nat. 88: 133-138. Newsome, A. E. and Catling P. C. (in press). Habitat preferences of Mammals Inhabiting Heathlands of warm temperate coastal, montane and alpine regions of South Eastern Australia. In Heathlands of the World, Ed. R. L. Specht, Osborne, W., Preece, M., Green, K. and Green, M. (1978) Gungartan: A Winter Fauna Survey ubove 1500 metres. Microrian Nat. Vol, 95: 226- 235. Ride, W, D. L. (1970), A Guide to the Native Mam- mals of Australia. Oxford University Press. Melbourne. Some Methods for Surveying Kangaroo Populations BY G. M. COULSON* Large-scale aerial surveys have been used to study the movements, abun- dance and population density of kangaroos (e.g. Caughley et al., 1977). Although faecal pellet counts have been used in the study of dispersion and habitat preference of kangaroos (Caughley, 1964), there has been little development of small-scale localized population surveys. By contrast, populations of white-tailed deer, Odocoileus virginianus, have been surveyed by such methods as faecal pellet counts (e.g. Thompson, 1955), road kill data (e.g. McCaffery, 1973), trail counts (e.g. McCaffery, 1976) and hunting effort (e.g. Holsworth, 1973). * Department of Zoology, Melbourne, Parkville, Vic. 3052. University of 184 A widely applicable method of density estimation is the line transect (Eberhardt, 1978) which depends on the animal making a conspicuous response (flushing) at the approach of the observer. The flushing distance is recorded and a density estimate derived. Counts of the well-defined trails made by kangaroos require a similar technique of searching along randomly selected lines, and could be combined with line transects. Also useful is a simple head count; counting is best conducted at favoured feeding sites in twilight, but the method often lacks reliability. Another possible method specifically applicable to kangaroos is based on their habit of pushing under fences at certain points. This tendency has been exploited Vic. Nat. Vol. 96 for trapping (Wapstra, 1976) and move- ment studies (Naarding, 1979). Measurements of the holes or runways created could form an index of popula- tion density. The aim of this study was to evaluate line transects, trail counts, fence hole measurements and counting in attemp- ting to estimate the size of a kangaroo population. Methods A population of eastern” grey kangaroos, Macropus giganteus, was surveyed on Strathfieldsaye Estate, University of Melbourne, in East Gipp- sland, Victoria (Figure 1). The study was conducted over six days in August 1978. 1. Line transects Four rectangular areas of suitable habitat were selected and referred to as plots A — D (Figure 1). The side with the easiest access was taken to be the base line which was paced out or measured by vehicle odometer. The transect entry points were determined as a percentage of the length of the base line (taken from a table of random numbers) at a sampling intensity of one per 200m of base line. From the entry point the observer walked across the plot on a compass bearing perpendicular to the base line. Whenever a kangaroo was flushed its bearing and estimated distance from the observer were record- ed. At the end of each transect the observer retraced his steps to the base line, then moved to the next entry point. The lines were searched in the most con- venient (not random) order; each plot was searched once. 2. Trail counts While searching line transects a record was kept of the number of trails in- Central Paddocks Lake Wellington Kilometres Big Plain Timber East and West Plain VICTORIA Melbourne Fig. 1. Map of Strathfieldsaye Estate showing transect plots (hatched) and areas surveyed for head counts. The inset shows the location of the Estate. September/October 185 tersected by the line. Only trails which showed evidence of recent use by kangaroos were included. This was judged by the absence of ground litter and the presence of fresh tracks and faecal pellets. 3. Fence measurements A number of fences, particularly those at an interface between pasture and woodland or forest, were examined for kangaroo holes. At each hole the vertical distance from the lowest strand of wire to the deepest part of the hole, and the length of any roll of ac- cumulated hair on the wire, were measured. The amount of traffic through each hole was subjectively classified as light, moderate or heavy on the basis of disturbance of soil under the fence and on tracks leading to the hole. 4. Head counts The total number of animals seen, ex- cluding possible duplications, was recorded in six favoured areas, both on foot and from a vehicle, The areas were surveyed from a vantage point wherever possible. The counts were made in the two hours after sunrise, the hour before sunset and shortly after sunset, and several hours after sunset. A motorcycle battery and spotlight were used on two foot surveys, and a vehicle with a spotlight and narrow-beam searchlight was used once. All data were recorded on a portable cassette recorder and later transcribed. Binoculars (10 x SO) facilitated sear- ching. Table 1, Estimaten of population density and trai) frequency in four plots surveyed by line transect. Bane transect emtimate Plot Snimals/sha Hean trails /i00m A transect abandoned 186 Results 1. Line transects Searches in plot A were soon aban- doned due to the density of the shrub layer. Visibility was greatly reduced, progress was noisy and it was difficult to maintain a compass bearing. One transect was made in both plots B and C with the intention of sampling daily. Plot B yielded no animals. Many were recorded in plot C, although the open vegetation resulted in a number of sightings being made before the animals actually ‘flushed’ (i.e. hopped away). The estimate from Eberhardt’s (1978) equation 3 is given in Table |. Five transects were made in plot D. One had to be abandoned due to flood water and was randomly replaced by another entry point; two others were shortened by water encountered. No kangaroos were seen on the transects, but a group was located approximately 300 m. from the last transect line. 2. Trail counts Results for trail counts are summariz- ed in Table 1. Plot C was virtually an open paddock with the lowest trail den- sity. Trails reached the highest density (11.7/100m) in the woodland habitat of Plot D. 3, Fence measurements A total of 10 fences was inspected for holes. Two fences (Bush Pad- dock/Home Paddock and Lake Tiny/Lake Tiny A) were each regarded as two separate units according to their orientation (Figure 2). The fences varied in construction from old post and rail fences with decrepit rabbit netting, to new seven-strand fences with electric outriggers. The data are summarized in Table 2. On an intuitive basis the number of holes per 100 m. was selected as the most appropriate index of movement, sup- plemented by data for hole depth and accumulated hair. The fences were ar- bitrarily divided into three classes which were represented by arrows to indicate the direction of movement from cover Vic. Nat. Vol. 96 © 0:0-1-9 holes/100 m or restricted species (about 300) have detailed dis- tribution data provided (Appendix S). The distributions of the remain- 242 ing 900 or so commoner (or introduced) species are presented with reference to the 16 irregularly shaped ‘‘sectors’’ marked on the accompanying map. The author’s way of identifying localities on his map also has some shortcomings. For example his major units, sectors, are identified with capital letters (A-O) which could lead to confusion with the system of Churchill & de Corona (1972). Similarly sub-blocks (his smallest units) are labelled 1A, 2A, 15A ete. which is close to Churchill & de Cor- ona’s way of labelling 10' rectangles. To add to this the Churchill & de Corona system is used in conjunction with his own to identify locations. This leads to confusing nomenclature such as NB3453A to identify the reference area near Lake Brambrook, Wyperfeld National Park. (N = Sec- tor | B = Major Grid : 34 = 10’ grid within major grid B : 53 = block within the Mallee: A = sub-block within block 53). While it is not really difficult to iden- tify localities by this method it is rather cumbersome and should not Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 be recommended as a means for pro- viding easy-access distribution infor- mation, Finally, the audience at which this work is aimed should be considered. The author suggests this audience is primarily professional biologists and government authorities, and this could certainly be true of the conser- vation side of his work. However, the distribution data are of equal interest to both amateur and_ professional people and in this sense Mr, Beaug- lehole’s work could be recommended to the naturalists as the most up to date account. The sad part is that it is obvious there is much more detailed information in species distribution in the Mallee which is not contained in this report. It is to be hoped that this information might be available at some time in the not too distant future. Paul Gullan National Herbarium of Victoria Birdwood Avenue South Yarra. The donation by Stan Kelly of his original Eucalyptus paintings to the National Herbarium of Victoria In October 1978 Mr. Stan Kelly presented to the National Herbarium of Victoria the original watercolour paintings used to illustrate his two volumes entitled **Eucalyptus’*, with descriptive texts by Mr. G. M. Chip- pendale and Dr. R. D. Johnston of the C.S.1.R.O. Division of Forest Research, Canberra, published by Thomas Nelson (Australia) Ltd. The first volume published in 1969 con- tained 250 plates and the second pub- lished in 1978 contained 258 plates and now, thanks to the generosity of Stan Kelly, the original paintings form part of the collection of original artwork of the National Herbarium of Victoria. Stanley Kelly was born in Ararat where he has lived all of his life. Entirely self-trained, he began his art career as a free-lance cartoonist for magazines and newspapers, and then turned to painting wildflowers, Stan Kelly began painting species of Eucalyptus, a genus for which he has a great affection, as a hobby in 1945 and 1949 saw the publication in Sydney of his first book entitled **40 Australian Eucalypts in colour’. The success achieved by this book stimu- lated him to continue painting November/December Eucalypts and he concentrated on the genus for about thirty years. With the completion of the second volume of ‘‘Eucalypts’’ he realized his life-long ambition to paint each species of Eucalyptus described up until that time. Many species of Eucalyptus have very restricted distributional ranges and he travelled extensively over the continent in his quest for specimens to paint. In this he was assisted to some extent by his occupation as an engine driver with the Victorian Railways, but much of the travel was done privately by car and coach. In addition, many people throughout Australia co-operated by sending material to be painted. Through his paintings, Stan Kelly has done much to popularise this impor- tant genus which dominates so much of the Australian landscape. In addition to his wildflower studies, Stan Kelly also paints land- scapes in oils and in watercolours and has had his work exhibited at the Adelaide Festival of Light, the Horsham Art Society and the Ararat Art Society. He is currently painting fungi. Always a keen naturalist and with a love of the bush, he has been a mem- 243 ber of the Ararat Field Naturalists Society for many years and has served as President of the Society on numerous occasions, and exhibited his paintings from time to time at gatherings of Field Naturalists Clubs. Stan Kelly retired from the Vic- torian Railways in 1974 after more than thirty years service and_ his retirement has afforded him the opportunity to indulge in two of his main interests, namely, prospecting for gold and fishing. Both activities bring him in close contact with the bush and afford him plenty of time to enjoy what he likes doing best, ‘‘sit- ting and contemplating its beauty’’. J, H. Ross, National Herbarium of Victoria, Birdwood Ave, South Yarra, 3141. VALE JIM BAINES Members of the Field Naturalists Club were shocked and saddened to learn of the sudden death of Jim Baines at Tor- quay on Thursday, 16th August. He joined the Club in October, 1960, admitted on the nomination of the then honorary secretary of the Club, Eustace Coghill and Miss Laura White. At this same meeting several other well known people became members — Bill King, Alex Stirling, Edna Walling and Ron de Gruchy, to namea few. Jim became well known to his fellow members through his active participa- tion in the affairs of the Club, He took part in its excursions and was an especially enthusiastic participant in those longer trips which were arranged to take place during school vacations. Being a headmaster in the Education Department the school holidays provid- ed him with the needful opportunity of joining such excursions. Not only did he take part in such excursions but he also wrote ample reports on them for publication in the Victorian Naturalist. Being something of a bibliophile he obliged by taking charge of the Club’s bookstall in 1963 and, in the course of the duties involved in that job, he made himself familiar with the library. 244 In 1965 he succeeded Mr Colin Lewis as secretary of the Australian Natural History Medallion General Committee. Through his efforts the machinery of conducting the Award procedures was brought to a high standard of efficiency. ] am sure that it would have been with some regret that he relinquished the task when he retired from the Education Department and betook himself overseas for several months of travel in foreign lands. Those who regularly attended the Club’s general meetings will remember him for his contributions to discussion and for his observations on divers matters of concern to or concerning the Club. His eventual retirement to a new home at Torquay in 1976 left something of a vacuum which has not yet been filled. Naturally enough our sister club at Geelong gained what we lost. While in Melbourne he was, of course, a member, secretary and sometime chair- man of the Botany Group and, stemm- ing from his interest in botany, was his succession of contributions to the Naturalist on the origin of the meaning of the generic names of Victorian plants. These continued to appear from 1973 onwards. Those acquainted with bot- anical taxonomy will appreciate the Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 erudition and research that was needed to prepare such papers. His special talent for arranging things in some sort of order or system led to his taking on the job of indexing the annual tally of contributions to the Naturalist — a self-imposed responsibility for which several editors must have been grateful — but I expect that it will be agreed that his most valuable and painstakingly executed project was the compilation and editing of the Author Index to seventy-six volumes of our journal. The idea for such an index was conceived as long ago as the late 1930's and a team of members worked to pro- duce one for the first fifty volumes. It was never published because of financial problems. Jim Baines and his team of helpers extended and improved upon that index and, of course, extended its usefulness by covering a further forty or so volumes, Although the Club still has financial problems it managed to have the work published in 1976. Due to the drive and energy of Jim Baines the Club members now have at their disposal a ready reference to not only the authors who have contributed to the Victorian Naturalist since its in- ception in 1884 but, as well, a citation of the subject about which each one wrote. Our Club has numbered among its members many of considerable merit and of outstanding stature and I am sure we all agree that Jim Baines has left his mark as one of them. To his widow and family we extend our condolences and deep sympathy. JRG, August, 1979 A Check List of Discomycetes (Fungi) Collected in Victoria What are Discomycetes? They are small, but belong to the largest group of fungi, the Ascomycetes which consist of about 30,000 species. Its members are clearly distinguished by the typical production of eight spores Within a sac-like sporangium or ascus. The sporangia or asci are arranged in various types of fruiting bodies. The fruiting bodies of Discomycetes are usually small, disc or cup-shaped, and vary in size and colour, but they all bear the asci in open cavities or on an open surface, except the truffles. Examples include most of the cup fungi, truffles (Tuberales) and morels. Truffles are formed underground and the spore sac remains enclosed until disintegrated by weathering or by small animals. Cyttaria produces edible, golf-ball sized orange or golden fruiting bodies on the native beech, Nothofagus cunninghamii. In fact Cyttaria occurs on Nothofagus trees in New Zealand, Tasmania, Queensland, Chile and Tierra del Fuego. The two large groups of Discomycetes are differentiated by the way in which the spore sac, or ascus dehisces. Operculate asci have at their apex a small hinged lid or operculum which opens and allows the spores to escape. Such fungi belong to the Pezizales. The in- operculate asci (Helotiales) either open by a small apical pore or slit, or just deliquesce or burst. If you tease out the asci from the fruiting body in a little iodine the operculum November/December or pore is often clearly visible, as certain parts of the apical structure of the ascus may stain blue with iodine. Subterranean fungi (Tuberales) appear to be related to the Pezizales. Recently we described and illustrated ten Discomycetes new to Victoria ( Vicforian Nat. 95: 187-188; 96: 11-19). The check list comprises genera and species of the Cyttariales, Tuberales and Operculate and Inoperculate Discomycetes collected in Victoria since 1962 or identified since that date. From the beginning of the collecting period and for several years thereafter collec- tions were sent to Kew, England, and through the courtesy of Dr R. W. G. Dennis tentative identifications made by the senior author were either confirmed or corrected; many records new for Victoria were thus estab- lished. It soon became apparent that amongst the numerous collections sent there were many new species and genera, both in the Oper- culate and Inoperculate sections. It was apparent that the adequate description and publication of these new taxa required years of work by a Discomycete specialist who was nowhere available. However, Dr Dennis secured the co-operation of M. A. Rifai, at that time an Indonesian student studying for his doctorate at Sheffield University. The result was that 1968 saw the publication of 245 Rifai’s The Australasian Pezizalies in the Herbarium of the Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, a landmark in world Discomycete taxonomic literature. This work contains descriptions and drawings of most of the then known Victorian Pezizales. Unfortunately nothing comparable is available for the large numbers of species in the Helotiales. With growing experience and the assistance of institutions and mycologists in several countries, it became possible to make local identifications and also descriptions of new species that were taxonomically acceptable. The sources mentioned above have provided the foundations of the present Check List. Whilst all care has been taken it is not possible that a list such as this can be free from error and any amendments, corrections or additions will be thankfully received. No attempt has been made to include un- described species in several of the larger and unwieldy genera but where a small genus has contained an unidentified species this has been indicated. Victorian species listed in early publications have been ignored as in most cases the descriptions are inadequate and the real identity of the fungus remains in doubt. Where two genera apparently have equal status, or a few species only have been trans- ferred from one genus to the other, the two genera are indicated at the head of the species list, i.e. Hymenoscyphus Gray =Helotium Pers. ex Gray. Where a species is close to a known species but there is uncertainty about its real identity the species name is preceded by the letters cf, confer =compare. In one case where the fungus is not related to the named genus the genus name has been placed in inverted commas and listed with its closest generic affinity. The taxonomic system is taken from R. P. Korf in The Fungi, Vol, 4A (1973). This does not imply complete agreement with this sytem but it Is at present the most complete and is readily available for reference in the botanical libraries. The following is a short list of useful and available Discomycete publications: Dennis, R. W. G. British Ascomycetes, J. Cramer, 1968 and 1977; also British Cup Fungi, Ray Society, 1960, Korf, R. P. Discomycetes and Tuberales in The Fungi, Vol. 4A, Academic Press, 1973. Rifai, M, A. The Australasian Pezizales in the Herbarium of the Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, J, Cramer, 1968. Seaver, F. J. North American Cup Fungi (Operculates), Hafner, 1961. Seaver, F. J. North American Cup Fungi (/noperculates), Hafner, 1961. 246 Discomycetes recorded for Victoria comprises 240 species of 111 genera from 19 different families. ASCOMYCOTINA DISCOMYCETES Cyttariales Cyttariaceae Cyttaria gunnil (Berk.) Hook. Tuberales Tuberaceae Labyrinthomyces steenisii Boed. L. tessellatus Beaton & Weste L. sp. Mukagomyces hiromichii \mai OPERCULATES Pezizales Sarcosomataceae Plectania campylospora (Berk.) Nannf. apud Korf P. melastoma (Sow. ex S. F. Gray) Fuckel P. platensis (Speg.) Rifai P. sp. Pseudoplectania cf. nigrella (Pers, ex Fr.) Fuckel Sarcoscyphaceae Sarcoscypha coccinea (Jacq. ex S. F. Gray) Lamb. Ascobolaceae Ascobolus amoenus Oud. A. crenulatus Karst. A. furfuraceus Pers. per Hook. A. immersus Pers. ex Pers. Boudiera areolata Cke. & Phill var. macrospora Dennis Jodophanus carneus (Pers. ex Pers.) Korf apud Kimb. & Korf Saccobolus versicolor (P. Karst.) P. Karst Pezizaceae Peziza ammophila Dur. & Mont. . austrogeaster (Rodway) Rifai . cf, badia Pers. ex Merat . cerea Bull, ex Merat . ef, depressa Phill. cf. domiciliana Cooke . echinospora Karst. . retispora Rifai . tenacella Phill. apud Cooke . thozetii Berk. varia (Hedw.) ex Fr, . vesiculosa Bull. ex St. Amans . whitei (Gilkey) Trappe Psilopezia Berk. = Pachyella Boud, P. babingtonii (Berk.) Berk. Morchellaceae Morchella elata Fr. agg. Helvellaceae a> Be-e- a > nH a= ee Be B= Be Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 Gyromitra esculenta (Pers.) Fr. Helvella villosa (Hedw. ex O. Kuntze) Diss. & Nannf, H. sp. Underwoodia beatonii Rifai Pyronemataceae Aleuria aurantia (Pers. ex Hook.) Fuckel A. exigua Rifai A. rhenana Fuckel Anthracobia macrocystis (Cooke) Boud. A. maurilabra (Cooke) Boud. A. muelleri (Berk.) Rifai Ascophanus argenteus (Currey) Boud. A. microsporus (Berk. & Br.) Phill. Ascozonus woolhopensis (Berk. & Br.) Boud, Cheilymenia coprinaria (Cooke) Boud. C. raripila (Phill.) Dennis C. stercorea (Pers.) Boud. Coprobia granulata (Bull. ex Fr.) Boud. Geopyxis majalis (Fr.) Sacc. Inermisia fusispora (Berk.) Rifai Jafneadelphus asperulus Rifai J. asperulus Rifai var. tetraspermus Rifai J, calosporus Rifai J. ferrugineus Rifai “Peziza’’ drummondii Berk. Lamprospora australis (McLennan & Cookson) Rifai L. cree’hqueraultii (Crouan) Boud. L. maireana Seaver L. cf. spinulosa Seaver L. tuberculata Seaver Lasiobolus ciliatus (Schw. ex Fr.) Boud. Leucoscypha catharinea (McLennan & Halsey) Rifai L. sp. Marcellina atroviolacea (Delile ex de Seynes) Brumm. Nothojafnea cryptotrichia Rifai Octospora ct. leucoloma Hedw. ex S. F. Gray O. microspora Rifai Plicaria Fuckel= Pulparia (Karst.) Karst. P. alveolata (Rodway) Rifai P. endocarpoides (Berk.) Rifai P. recurva (Berk.) Rifai Pseudotis (Boud.) Boud. sp. Pulvinula archeri (Berk.) Rifai P. miltina (Berk.) Rifai P. tetraspora (Hansf.) Rifai Pustulina cf. catinus (Holmsk. ex Fr.) Eckblad Pyronema omphalodes (Bull. ex St. Amans) Fuckel Rhizoblepharia jugispora Rifai Rhyparobius polysporus (Karst.) Sacc. R. sexdecemsporus (Crou.) Sace. November/December Scutellinia badio-berbis (Berk. ex Cooke) O, Kuntze S. colensoi (Mass.) Le Gal ex Rifai S. cf. kerguelensis (Berk. apud Hook. f.) O. Kuntze S. pseudomargaritacea Le Gal S. scutellata (L. ex St. Amans) Lamb. Sphaerozone echinulatum Beaton Thelebolus stercoreus Tode ex Fr. T. zukali Heimerl ? Trichophaea Boud. sp. INOPERCULATES Phacidiales Rhytismataceae Coecomyces delta (Kunze) Cooke Hypodermella richiae Petr. Lophodermium pinastri (Schrader ex Fr.) Chev. Phacidiaceae Cerion coccineum Massee & Rodway Phacidium eucalypti Beaton & Weste Ostropales Stictidiaceae Stictis cf. radiata Pers. ex S. F. Gray S. cf. stellatum Wall. S. sp. Vibrissea bicolor Beaton & Weste V. dura Beaton & Weste V. guernisaci Crouan V. melanochlora Beaton & Weste V. tasmanica Rodway Helotiales Hemiphacidiaceae Nemacyclus gilvas Rodway N. niveus (Pers. ex Fr.) Sacc. N. sp. N. sp. Geoglossaceae Geoglossum fallax Durand G. glutinosum Pers. ex Fr, G. nigritum (Fr.) Cooke G. simile Peck. Microglossum viride (Pers, ex Fr.) Gill. Trichoglossum hirsutum (Pers. ex Fr.) Boud. T. walteri (Berk.) Durand Sclerotiniaceae Ciboria peckiana = Rutstroemia macrospora (Peck) Kanouse Lambertella healyi Korf Monilinia fructicola (Wint.) Honey Sclerotinia xanthorrhoea Beaton & Weste Orbiliaceae Hyalinia scolescospora Beaton Orbilia epipora (Nyl.) Karst. O. vinosa (Fr.) Karst. Dermateaceae Dermatea fumosa Cooke & Phill. D, sp. Fabraea rhytismoidea (Cke. & Mass.) Sacc. 247 ?Graddonia Dennis sp. Hysteropezizella Hohn. sp. Mollisia ellipsospora Rodway M. ef. fallax (Desm.) Gillet M. sublividula (Nyl.) Sace. M. undulata Rodway M. sp. Patellariopsis carnea Beaton PF: sp; Pezicula sessilis (Rodway) Dennis P. sp. Pseudopeziza trifolii (Bivona-Bernardi) Fuckel Pyrenopeziza Fuckel sp. Tapesia fusca (Pers.) Fuckel T. cf. culcitella (Cke, & Ell.) Sace. Trichobelonium (Sace.) Rehm sp. Trochila ilicina (Nees. ex Fr.) Greenhalgh & Morgan-Jones T. laurocerasi (Desm.) Fr. Hyaloscyphaceae Dasyscyphus cf. bicolor (Bull, ex Fr.) Fuckel D. canescens (Cooke) Mass. D, emerici (Berk. & Phill.) Sace. var. nothofagi Dennis D, ef. fuscescens (Pers, ex Fr.) Rehm D. glabrescens (Cke, & Phill.) Sace. D. cf. helotioides (Rehm) Dennis D. lachnodermus (Berk.) Rehm D. niveus (Hedw. ex Fr.) Sace. D. pteridophyllus Rodway D. pygmaeus (Fr.) Sace. D, subciboria (Rodway) Dennis D. triseptatus Dennis D. varians Rehm D. virgineus 8. F. Gray D. willisii Beaton Diplocarpa bloxami Berk.) Seaver Hyaloseypha cf, hyalina (Pers.) Boud. Lachnella microspora (Kanouse) Seaver Lachnellula pulveraceae (A, & S. ex Fr.) Dennis L, cf, calyciformis (Willd. ex Fr.) Dharne Otwaya verruculospora Beaton Perrotia aurea (Massee) Dennis P. lutea (Phill.) Dennis ?Unguiculella Hohn sp. Zoellneria clelandii (Hansford) Dennis Z. eucalypt (Berk.) Dennis Z. madsenii Beaton & Weste Z. sp. Leotiaceae Allophylaria atherospermi Beaton Ascotremella faginea (Peck) Seaver Bisporella Sacc. = Calycella Boud. B. citrina (Batsch. ex Fr.) Korf & Carpenter B. orius Beaton B, sulfurina (Quel.) Carpenter Bulgariella pulla (Fr.) Karst, Calycella Boud. = Bisporella Sacc. 248 C. crocina (Berk.) Dennis C. discidens (Karst.) Dennis C. striata (Rodway) Dennis GeEDt Calycellina Hohn. sp. Cashiella Petrak sp. Chlorosplenium aeruginascens (Nyl.) Kanouse C. aeruginosum (Fr.) de Not. C. chlora (Schw. ex Fr.) Curtis Cc. ef. hypochlora (Berk, & Curt. ex Phill.) Dixon C. rodwayi Kort C. versiforme (Pers. ex Fr.) Seaver var. olivacea (Rodway) Dennis C. sp. Cistella carnosa (Rodway) Dennis C. sp. Claussenomyces australis Beaton Coryne Nees ex Gray = Ascocoryne Groves & Wilson C. ef. eylichnium (Tul.) Boud. C. sarcoides (Fr.) Tul. C. tasmanica (Rodway) Dennis Crumenula de Not. sp. ?Cudoniella Sacc. sp. Cyathicula dicksoniae Beaton & Weste C. hyalina Beaton & Weste C. urniformis Beaton & Weste C. spe Discinella terrestris (Berk. & Br.) Dennis D. sp. D. sp. Durella Tul. sp. Encoelia toomansis (Berk. & Br.) Dennis Helotium Pers, ex Gray = Hymenoscyphus Gray . ef. caudatum (Karst.) Vel. . gedeanum Dennis . nova-zelandiae Dennis . pateriforme (Berk.) Cooke . pezizoideum Cooke & Phill. . ef. pseudociliatum Phill. . scutula (Pers. ex Fr.) Karst, . fasmanicum Rodway Hymenoscyphus Gray = Helotium Pers. ex Gray H. ceratinus (Berk.) O. Kuntze H. gratus (Berk. apud Hook.) Dennis H. herbarum (Pers. ex Fr.) Dennis var eucalypti Dennis H. ssp. lonomidotis fulvotingens (Berk. & Curt.) Cash I. sp. Leotia lubrica Neobulgaria Petrak sp. Pezizella notofagi (Rodway) Dennis Phaeohelotium recurvum (Rodway) Dennis Phialea epitephra (Berk.) Dennis Rapeagenpeoguazeageadeny Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 P, complicata (Karst.) Dennis P. sp. Polydesmia pruinosu (Berk, & Br.) Boud. Propolis versicolor (Pr.) V1 Pseudohelotium Puckel sp, Rutstroemia lamaripes Dennis Velutarina rulorolivacen (Alb. & Schw ex Pr.) Kort G, Beaton, bildon, G, Weste, Botany School, University of Melbourne The Origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora Part 2—Latin. Greek and Miscellaneous (Continued from page 205 in the previous issue) BY JAMES A, BAINES Spiculaea. Lat spiculum, diminutive of spica, a point (hence English spike), S. huntiana, Elbow Orchid, was listed in) Ewart under Drakaca, The sharp claw on the labellum prompted the name of the genus, while the general look of the ‘bent’ flower suggested the vernacular name. Spinifex. Lat spinifex, thorn-maker (from spina, thorn, spine; facio, make); alluding to the pungent leaves of the Asiatic species first described, Victoria has one species, S. Airsutus, Hairy Spinifex or Silver Grass (called Spiny Rolling Grass in S.A,), there being only 3 in the world. Spinifex of explorers’ ac counts of the arid interior refers to species of Triodia, usually T. irritans, the correct common name of which is Porcupine Grass, which is in tribe Dan thonieae of family Gramineae, whereas Spinifex is in tribe Paniceae, Spiranthes. Gk = speira, anything wound or wrapped round, a coil, spiral; anthos, flower; because the small, sessile flowers are in a spiral spike. Our sole species, Austral Ladies’ Tresses, was named Neottia australis by R. Brown, but was later found to be synonymous with S. sinensis, an Asian species nam ed from China, as its specific epithet in- dicates, Willis states that it is probably the most widely ranging orchid in the world. Sporobolus. Gk sporos, seed; bolos, throwing; because the seed is shed easily November/December from the flowering glume and palea Victoria has | introduced species, *S, africanus, syn. *S. capensis, Rat-tail Grass, native to South Africa and a troublesome weed in lawns, There are also 3 species native to this State: Yakka Grass or Fairy Grass, Short) Rat-tail Grass, and Salt Couch (Sand and Mud Couch). Spyridium, Gk spyris, a basket; eidos, like; or spyridion, litthe basket; alluding to the flowerheads surrounded by lealy bracts. The commonest of Victoria's & species, S. parvifolium, is known as Dusty Miller from the general ‘dusty’ appearance of the plant. This rham naceous genus is endemic to Australia, there being 30 species in all, *Stachys. Gk name tor various libiate plants, from stachys, spike, ear of prain, Our species is *S. arvensis, Stagger Weed, Woundwort or Hedge nettle, the first common name stemming from the effect on stock of this noxious weed. Stellaria. Lat stella, a star; alluding, to the starry flowers with 5 radiating petals. Victoria has 6 native species, all known as different kinds of starwort, and 2 introduced, *S. media, Chickweed, and *S. pallida, Lesser Chickweed, The genus is in’ family Caryophyllaceae. Stenochilus. Gk stenos, narrow; cheilos, lip; from the form of the flowers, This is a long-superseded name for 4 of our 11 species of EFremophila, 249 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Reports of FNCV Activities General Meeting — Monday 10th September, 9 The President began the meeting by an- nouncing the passing of two members, Mr G. Setford and Mr J, Baines. Mr Baines served the Club in a number of capacities, including Secretary of the Natural History Medallion Committee and Chairman and Secretary of the Botany Group, He also compiled the Author Index to 1976. There were five speakers who spoke on various aspects of Willsmere Park. Mrs Hilary Weatherhead listed the plants found in the Park. Miss Cecily Allen spoke about the birds and reported that bird populations seem not to have been harmed by the new freeway. Aquatic invertebrates, insects and the mos- quito fish were talked of by Mr MelInnes, who also presented many exhibits under the microscope. Dr Smith talked of the oc- currence in the Park of water snails, land planarians and a viviparous fish introduced from South America. The last speaker was Mr Paul Genery who showed a film of microscopic pond life and talked of the freshwater medusa. In connection with their talks the speakers had a number of exhibits. Dr Smith showed an example of a Killifish (family Cyprinodon- tiformes) and Mrs Weatherhead some of the plants discussed, Mr Genery had a microslide of the freshwater medusa Craspedacusta sowerbyi. Mr McInnes exhibited freshwater worms Tubifex, copepods, Cyclops, waterfleas and lerps on redgum leaves. General Meeting — Monday 8th October, 1979. The meeting began with the presentation, by the Acting Chairman, of an Honorary Certificate to Mr R. Lambrock to mark his 40 years of membership. The guest for the evening was Mr Robert Edgar from the Keith Turnbull Research In- stitute who spoke on the control of vermin and noxious weeds. Mr Edgar described early legislation beginning with the Thistle Act of 1856, followed by the Rabbit Suppression Act of 1880 and the Vermin and Noxious Weeds Act of 1922. A biological control plan was drawn up in 1976. Mr Edgar said one problem with biological control was controll- ing the control measures — the cane toad is an example. Currently experiments concern- ed controlling blackberries using the sawfly larvae Hartigia abbornaculatus and a rust 250 fungus Phragmidium violaceum, Mr Edgar also discussed skeleton weed, Paterson's curse, boneseed and rabbits. Centenary Committee: The Acting Chair- man indicated that ideas for the celebration of the Club’s centenary would be welcome. Library. The Assistant Librarian, Miss Madge Lester, spoke of improvements in the library, making it more inviting to readers. Exhibits. Proposis beetle larvae were shown by Mr I. Bates under the microscope. Mr McInnes showed a leafminer on Tallow wood (Eucalyptus microcorys) from the Dargile Forest. Nature notes. Mention was made by Mrs Corrick of a dead Caspian Tern near Yanak in the Big Desert region and Mr M. Turner commented on seeing two on the Murray near Mildura. General Meeting — Monday 12th November, The special guest at the meeting was Miss Helen Aston, this year's recipient of the Australian Natural History Medallion. In making the presentation, the President of the Royal Society of Victoria, Professor Stubbs, spoke of Miss Aston’s considerable achievements in the botanical and or- nithological fields. As speaker for the evening Miss Aston spoke on two quite separate topics. The first was a summary of the formation and pro- gress of natural history clubs, The earliest known such club was the Botanical Club which flourished in England in the early 1700's. Miss Aston also talked of the 100 years of the F.N.C.V. Following this Miss Aston discussed a trip she had made across the Nullabor in August- September 1979, This trip had been organized by the R.A.O.U. as part of the Bird Atlas programme, a S-year project begun in 1977. Alpine area. The Secretary said that because the State Government would soon make a decision on the L.C.C. recommenda- tion regarding an alpine area, the Club had made a final submission to the Premier. This submission was read to members, Exhibits. Miss Aston had an example of the fruit of Eucalyptus youngiana collected on her recent trip, Mr McInnes showed leaf- miners under the microscope. Mr R. Garnet spoke about G. J, Broinowski’s book ‘‘The Birds of Australia’’, published in 6 volumes in 1891. Vic.Nat. Vol. 96 (Continued from page 210) or the first week in February. There are Flats, Lodges and two larger units so please state the type of accommodation preferred and if there is anyone with whom you would like to share, it won't be possible to allot everyone the accommodation they would prefer but we will do our best. Details of accommodation and prices will be at general meetings or may be obtain- ed from the Tourist Bureau. After booking, a deposit of $10 per bed should be sent to the Excursion Secretary by the end of March, the balance to be paid to the National Parks Ser- vice on arrival at the Park. There will be further details in the next Naturalist, in the mean- time please put the dates in your diary, arrange groups to share a lodge and give it all the publicity you can. We would also like to know how many intend camping. GROUP MEETINGS All FNCY members are invited to attend any Group Meeting; no extra payment. At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra at 8.00 p.m. Third Wednesday in the Month — Microscopy Group December. No meeting held in December. Wednesday, 16 January. Members Exhibits. Wednesday, 20 February. Members Exhibits and discussion of program for year. Wednesday, 19 March. Introduction to the Microscope. Display of Microscopes home made to research models. The type of microscope most suited for your need. Half hour Members Exhibits. Second Thursday in the Month — Botany Group Thursday, 14 February. Members night, Thursday, 13 March. Trip through the Big Desert. Speaker: Bruce Fuhrer. At the Conference Room, The Museum, Melbourne at 8.00 p.m. Good parking area — enter from Latrobe St. First Monday in the Month — Marine Biology and Entomology Group Monday, 3 December. ‘Books of Interest’. All members. January. No meeting held in January. Monday, 4 February. Member Exhibits and holiday observations. Monday, 3 March. ‘‘The Evolution of Molluscs’’ Dr Brian Smith. GROUP EXCURSIONS All FNCV members are invited to attend Group Excursions Botany Group Saturday, 16 February — Sunday, 17 February. Board of Works Thomson River excursion. Private transport to Erica, lunch, dinner, bed and breakfast $12.50. Fee includes conducted tour on Saturday afternoon and accommodation. Book with Miss Allender (527-2749). Saturday, 22 March. Please note not last Saturday. Mt Macedon. Leader: Pat Carolan — Eucalypts. Day Group — Third Thursday in the Month No excursions in December or January. First meeting will be on Thursday, February 21 at Fitzroy Gardens. Meet outside tea rooms at 11.30 a.m. Mammal Survey Group Camps. Christmas — New Year. East Gippsland. November/December 251 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Established 1880 OBJECTS; To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists, Patron: His Excellency the Honorable Sir HENRY WINNEKE, K.C.M.G., O.B.E., Q.C. Key Office-Bearers 1977-1978 President: Dr. BRIAN SMITH, 8 Hunsford Avenue, North Clayton, 3168 (560 8358) Secretary: Miss WENDY CLARK, 27 Rangeview Grove, North Balwyn, 3104 (859 8091) Correspondence to: FNCV, National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004. Treasurer: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Subscription-Secretary: Mr. F. J. KOTH. 21 Smart Street, Hawthorn, 3122. Editor; Mr. R. WALLIS, c/- State College of Victoria—Rusden, Blackburn Road, North Clayton, 3168, 544 8544. Librarian: Mr. J. MARTINDALE, c/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004 Excursion Secretary: Miss M. ALLENDER, 19 Hawthorn Avenue, Caulfield, 3161 (527 2749) Book Sales Officer: Mr. D, E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Archives Officer: Mr. B. CALLANAN, 29 Reynards Street, Coburg, 3058 (36 0587) Group Secretaries Botany: Mr. CAMERON McCONCHIE, 158 Warrandyte Road, Ringwood, 4134 (870 9986) Day Group: Miss D, M. BELL, 17 Tower Street, Mont Albert, 3127 (89 2850) Geology: Mr. T. SAULT, c/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004 Mammal Survey: Mr. RAY GIBSON, 26 McCulloch Street, Nunawading, 3131 (874-4408) Microscopical: Mr. M. H. MEYER, 36 Milroy Street, East Brighton (596 3268) Entomology and Marine Biology: c/o National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, Melbourne, 3004 FNCV Kinglake Nature Reserve: McMahons Road, Kinglake. Bookings and keys: Mr |. F. MORRISON, 788 Elgar Road, Doncaster (848 1194) MEMBERSHIP Membership of the F.N.C.V. is open to any person interested in natural history. The Victorian Naturalistis distributed free to all members, the club’s reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. Subscription rates for 1979 Metropolitan ..__. ; Whe i “y lala tey $12.00 Joint Metropolitan... ' ; Be ie 2 Shas oP ed GLAS So, Tetras LATS at $1450 Country Members and Retired Persons. ... . . ary a i dabotets ah oie te $10.00 Joint Country and Joint Retired. - : eriwats c 8or ze BRP ak $12.00 Junior . : = Hands : $2.50 Subscription to Victorian Naturalist “s $10,00 Overseas Subscription to Victorian Naturalist $12.00 Individual Journals ~ f ogni ho nee $1.75 All subscriptions should be made ciel to the Field Naturalist Club of Victoria and Sealed tothe 1¢ Subscciption Secretary @ JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY. LTD., WEST MELBOURNE